Orlando Fire Department Standard Operational Procedures Manual

Orlando Fire Department
Standard Operational
Procedures Manual (SOP)
Table of Contents
1.
COMMAND PROCEDURES .............................................................................................. 1
INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM..................................................................................................................................1
2.
TACTICAL GUIDELINES .................................................................................................... 1
DIVISIONS / GROUPS .................................................................................................................................................1
DIVISION/GROUP LEADERS .......................................................................................................................................4
UNIVERSAL GEOGRAPHIC SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................6
NIMS .........................................................................................................................................................................8
3.
TACTICAL PLANNING ...................................................................................................... 1
STANDARD COMPANY OPERATIONS .........................................................................................................................1
BASIC FIREGROUND FACTORS ...................................................................................................................................5
SEARCH AND RESCUE ................................................................................................................................................9
ENGINE COMPANY OPERATIONS ............................................................................................................................13
TRUCK COMPANY OPERATIONS ..............................................................................................................................19
4.
TACTICAL OPERATIONS .................................................................................................. 1
HOUSE FIRES (1& 2 STORY), DUPLEX, TRIPLEX ...........................................................................................................1
GARDEN APARTMENT FIRES......................................................................................................................................6
COMMERCIAL BUILDING FIRES ...............................................................................................................................14
HIGHRISE FIRES .......................................................................................................................................................20
5.
SAFETY PROCEDURES ..................................................................................................... 1
INCIDENT SAFETY ......................................................................................................................................................1
APPARATUS PLACEMENT ........................................................................................................................................12
TWO-IN/TWO-OUT .................................................................................................................................................15
PERSONNEL ACCOUNTABILITY SYSTEM (PAS) .........................................................................................................18
MAYDAY COMMUNICATIONS .................................................................................................................................22
RAPID INTERVENTION TEAM ...................................................................................................................................27
EMERGENCY INCIDENT REHABILITATION ................................................................................................................31
6.
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING ............................................................................................... 1
BRUSH/WILDLAND FIRES ..........................................................................................................................................1
AIRCRAFT RESCUE FIREFIGHTING (ARFF) PROCEDURES ..........................................................................................12
LARGE VEHICLE FIRES – HIGH SPEED ROADWAYS ...................................................................................................24
7.
SPECIAL OPERATIONS/HAZMAT ..................................................................................... 1
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ..........................................................................................................................................1
NATURAL GAS/PROPANE ..........................................................................................................................................8
RADIOLOGICAL RESPONSE ......................................................................................................................................12
FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS ..............................................................................................................................................18
DECONTAMINATION ...............................................................................................................................................21
8.
SPECIAL OPERATIONS/TRT ............................................................................................. 1
CONFINED SPACE RESCUE .........................................................................................................................................1
TRENCH RESCUE ........................................................................................................................................................4
STRUCTURAL COLLAPSE OPERATIONS ......................................................................................................................6
HIGH ANGLE/ROPE RESCUE.....................................................................................................................................11
9.
SPECIAL OPERATIONS..................................................................................................... 1
INDUSTRIAL MACHINERY ACCIDENT WITH ENTRAPMENT ........................................................................................1
VEHICLE EXTRICATION ..............................................................................................................................................4
ELEVATOR RESCUE ....................................................................................................................................................7
WATER RESCUE .........................................................................................................................................................9
HELICOPTER OPERATIONS.......................................................................................................................................21
EOD - BOMB THREATS, SUSPICIOUS PACKAGE/DEVICE IN POSSSESSION, & POST BLAST........................................25
BOMB THREATS.......................................................................................................................................................29
SUSPICIOUS PACKAGE/DEVICE IN POSSESSION.......................................................................................................32
POST BLAST (CONFIRMED OFD/OPD) ......................................................................................................................36
10.
MEDICAL OPERATIONS ............................................................................................... 1
MASS CASUALTY........................................................................................................................................................1
11.
SUPPORT OPERATIONS ............................................................................................... 1
STAGING....................................................................................................................................................................1
EVACUATION .............................................................................................................................................................6
FIRE CAUSE INVESTIGATION ......................................................................................................................................9
POLICE LIAISON .......................................................................................................................................................14
PROPERTY CONSERVATION .....................................................................................................................................17
PUBLIC INFORMATION ............................................................................................................................................20
EMERGENCY PERSONNEL RECALL ...........................................................................................................................25
12.
ADDENDUMS/FORMS ................................................................................................ 1
PREFACE
Command on the fireground is a demanding task for any Officer. Yet, it is more demanding for
the first arriving Company Officer, who must direct his/her own Company and prioritize actions
to lay the groundwork for the expanded firefighting operation. It is essential that Company and
Command Officers maintain a thorough knowledge of the guidelines in this manual.
Furthermore, the responsibilities contained in this manual should be well known to all civil
service members of the Orlando Fire Department.
Additionally, every individual riding out-of-grade as a Company or Command Officer also has
the authority and responsibility of that position, and therefore must have a working knowledge of
these guidelines and the ability to apply them in given situations.
This manual is the Standard Operating Procedure for all emergency scene personnel. Although
these rules are referred to as Procedures, they are intended to be Guidelines that provide a
framework for emergency scene operations. It is not intended that these procedures be followed
to the letter on every incident. Emergency incidents are dynamic in nature and variations from
these procedures may be necessary to accomplish the goal of mitigation.
A working knowledge of this manual should aid the Commander in fulfilling the mission of the
Orlando Fire Department, which is to protect lives and property.
Occasionally in this manual, individuals are referred to in the masculine form for simplicity. It is
recognized that members of the fire department are represented by both the masculine and
feminine gender.
If the reader notices any errors in content or has suggestions for change, notify one of the
committee members with suggestions. The present committee consists of the following
members:
Committee Members:
Fire Chief John Miller
Deputy Chief Greg Hoggatt
Assistant Chief Keith Maddox
Assistant Chief Frank Cornier
District Chief Dave Haley
Lt. Matt Negedley
Lt. Gregg McLay
Lt. Doug Driscoll
Deputy Chief John McCormack
Assistant Chief Rich Wales
District Chief Rusty Nail
Lt. Phil Kontoulas
Lt. Dave Harris
Lt. Robert Coschignano
Debbie Weber
Revised May 2011
1. COMMAND PROCEDURES
INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
I.
INCIDENT COMMAND SYSTEM
The Incident Command System (ICS) is designed to offer a practical framework for Field
Operations that effectively integrates the efforts of all members, Officers, and
Companies. Terminology changes have been implemented to meet National Standards
(NIMS). The time invested in performing the initial functions should produce ongoing
time savings in the form of a more effective rescue and fire control outcome. An arriving
Officer assuming Command should be able to quickly and efficiently perform the
standard procedures. This understanding will facilitate an organized and orderly tactical
operation and a more effective effort. This is particularly important in more complex
situations and when Command must be transferred to ranking Officers.
II.
POLICY AND PROCEDURES
The effective functioning of fire department units and personnel at operating incidents
requires clear, decisive action on the part of an Incident Commander. This policy
identifies the standard operating procedures to be employed in establishing Command
and operating a Command Post. It also affixes responsibilities of the Command function
and its associated duties on one individual at any time during the operation.
III.
COMMAND PRIORITIES
A. Command Priorities
1. Life Safety
2. Fire Control
3. Property Conservation
B. Responsibility
1. The Incident Commander is responsible for the Command function at all times.
As the identity of the Incident Commander changes (through transfers of
Command), the responsibility shifts with the title. The term “Command” in this
procedure refers to both the person and the function. Command procedures are
designed to accomplish the following:
a. Assign the responsibility of Command on a certain individual through a
standard identification system depending on the arrival sequence of members,
Companies, and Officers.
Page 1 of 17
COMMAND PROCEDURES
b. Ensure that a strong, direct and visible Command will be established as early
as possible in the operation.
c. Establish an effective framework, outlining the activities and responsibilities
assigned to Command.
d. Provide a system for the orderly transfer of Command to subsequent arriving
Officers.
2. Command is accountable for the following:
a. Provide for the safety, accountability, and survival of personnel.
b. Remove endangered occupants and treat the injured.
c. Mitigate the incident.
d. Conserve property after fire/incident control is achieved.
3. Command also must ensure that the following responsibilities are addressed.
a. Assume an effective Command position.
b. Transmit a brief initial radio report.
c. Rapidly evaluate the situation (size-up).
d. Develop strategic goals and tactical objectives.
e. Assign Units as required.
f. Provide continuing overall Command and progress reports within the
framework of OFD fireground procedures, i.e., water on fire, all clear, fire
knocked down, fire out.
g. Review and evaluate the attack efforts and revise the plan of attack, as needed.
h. Request and assign additional units as necessary.
i. Return Companies to service and terminate “COMMAND.”
j. In cases where the initial arriving Officer is a Command Officer, his efforts
should automatically be directed towards establishing a Command Post and
fulfilling the listed responsibilities.
Page 2 of 17
COMMAND PROCEDURES
Note: The first four tasks are “Initial Command Responsibilities.” The continuing
responsibilities stay with Command, whether the initial Officer remains in
Command or Command is transferred to subsequent arriving Officers.
4. Initial Report
a. The first Unit or member on the scene must initiate whatever parts of the
Incident Management System (IMS) are needed to effectively manage the
incident.
b. The Officer in charge shall transmit a brief four-part radio report including:
1) Unit identification
2) Brief description of the building (number of floors, type of construction
and occupancy)
3) Situation found and description of obvious conditions (fire, hazmat,
multiple patients, etc.)
4) Action taken
For example: (E5 is on the scene of a three-story wood frame garden
apartment with heavy fire showing from the second floor, side Alpha. We will
be pulling a 1-3/4 inch line and entering with two on Side Alpha, Quadrant
Delta, on the first floor)
IV.
COMMAND CONSIDERATIONS
A. An initial arriving Company Officer must decide on an appropriate commitment for
the Company. This will usually fall into one of three general modes, listed below.
1. Nothing Showing Mode: These situations generally require investigation by the
first arriving Engine, Truck, and Rescue. Normally, the Officer should go with his
Company to investigate, while utilizing his portable radio to continue Command.
All other responding units should stage unless detailed by Command to assist with
the investigation.
2. Fast Attack Mode: Situations that require immediate action to stabilize.
Situations (such as interior fires in residences, apartments, or small commercial
occupancies) require that an Officer quickly decide how to commit his Company.
Where a fast interior attack is critical, he can take advantage of his portable radio
to permit his involvement in the attack without neglecting Command
responsibilities. This mode should not last more than a few moments and will end
with one of the following:
Page 3 of 17
COMMAND PROCEDURES
a. Situation is stabilized
b. Command is passed to next arriving Company
c. A Command Officer arrives and Command is transferred
d. Situation is not stabilized and the Officer must remove himself to a normal
Command position
3. Command Mode: Primary Command is immediately required. Such situations
(by virtue of the size of the fire, the complexity/potential of the occupancy or the
possibility of extension) require strong, direct, overall Command from the outset.
In such cases, the Officer will initially assume a Command position and maintain
that position until relieved by a ranking Officer.
a. In the event of a major fire involving injuries to occupants, Command should
consider establishing separate Division/Groups to handle ongoing operations.
These Divisions/Groups would be known as Fire, Support, and Medical, etc.
They would operate on separate TACS and remain in face-to-face contact
with Command.
4. If the first arriving Company Officer elects not to join his Company in action, he
may operate within the following options with regard to the assignment of his
Crew:
a. He can “move up” from within his Company and place his Company into
action. The individual and collective capability of his Crew will regulate this
action.
b. He can assign his Company members to perform staff functions for him.
c. He can assign his Company members to another Company to work under the
supervision of its Officer. In such cases, the Officer must communicate with
the receiving Officer and indicate the assignment of his personnel.
5. While the arriving Company Officer has a choice of modes and degrees of
personal involvement in the attack, this Officer continues to be fully responsible
for the identified tasks assigned to the Command function. In all cases, the
initiative and judgment of the Officer are of great importance. The modes
identified are not strict rules, but guidelines to assist the Officer in planning his
action.
Page 4 of 17
COMMAND PROCEDURES
6. The first Officer to arrive on the scene will be in charge until relieved by a
ranking Officer, or another Officer from the agency having jurisdiction.
Note: The first arriving Company Officer has the option of passing the Command
responsibility to another Company Officer arriving with him or close thereafter. This
may be prearranged or necessitated by unknown circumstances. In either case, it
shall be confirmed by both parties on the radio.
V.
FIREGROUND FACTORS
A. Fireground factors offer a standard list of basic items Command must consider in the
evaluation of tactical situations.
B. In critical fire situations, Command may develop an initial plan and initiate an attack
based on an incomplete evaluation of fireground factors. In such cases, Command
must continue throughout the operation to improve the information that decisions are
based upon. Information updates may come from several sources, including: visual,
recon, or preplanning.
C. Most tactical situations represent a complex problem with regard to how Command
deals with fireground information. Fireground intelligence available to Command is
developed utilizing an overlapping variety of these information sources. There are
three primary sources of information.
1. Visual: This includes those obvious to visual observation. This visual information
is categorized as the type that can normally be gained by actually looking at a
tactical situation from the outside.
2. Reconnaissance: This includes information that is not visually available to
Command and must be gained by actually sending someone to check out, go see,
look up, research, go find, etc. This generally involves Command making a
specific assignment and then receiving an information-oriented report.
3. Pre-Planning and Familiarity: This includes the intelligence that is gained from
formal pre-fire planning and by general familiarization of activities. This
information arms Command with intelligence that would not normally be
immediately available.
VI.
COMMAND POSITIONING
A. The Command Post: The standard Command position for the fireground Commander
should be a stationary one, inside a Command vehicle or a piece of fire apparatus,
which is then called the “COMMAND POST.” It should be situated in a conspicuous
location, which affords the Commander a good view of the fire building and
Page 5 of 17
COMMAND PROCEDURES
surrounding area. When possible, it should be in front of the fire building and should
not interfere with apparatus movement. Ideally, it should offer a view of two sides of
the fire building. Once the stationary Command Post has been established, Command
should use the headset provided for communication.
B. The arriving District Commander shall assume Command shortly after giving “on the
scene.”
C. In cases of complex tactical situations that have not been declared under control, or
when a second alarm has been transmitted and second alarm units are committed, the
Assistant Chief shall assume Command.
D. Assumption of Command is discretionary for the Fire Chief and/or Deputy Chiefs.
E. Within the Chain-of-Command indicated above, the actual transfer of Command will
be regulated by the following procedures:
1. Arriving Chief Officers assuming Command will communicate with the Officer
being relieved by radio or preferably face-to-face.
2. The Officer being relieved will brief the Officer assuming Command indicating
the following:
a) General Status: Fire location, conditions, and extension
b) Strategic goals and tactical objectives
c) Effectiveness of control efforts
d) Deployment and assignments of operating Companies
e) Appraisal of needs for additional resources
F. The Officer being relieved should review the “Tactical Command Sheet” with the
ranking Officer in complex situations. This sheet provides the most effective
framework for Command transfer as it outlines the location and status of resources in
a standard form that should be well-known to all members.
G. The arrival of a ranking Officer on the fireground does not mean Command has been
transferred.
H. The response and arrival of ranking Officers on the fireground strengthens the overall
Command function. All Officers will exercise their Command prerogatives in a
supportive manner that will ensure a smooth transition.
Page 6 of 17
COMMAND PROCEDURES
I. In situations where second alarm units are being committed and the Assistant Chief is
to assume Command, the District Chief being relieved will normally be utilized in the
following manner:
1. Where an offensive attack is being mounted in a single-story structure, the
District Chief will become “Interior Division.”
2. In a highrise fire, the District Chief will become the “Attack Group” or “Fire
Floor Division.”
3. In a defensive operation, the District Chief being relieved will be used to the best
advantage by Command.
VII.
SUPPORT OF COMMAND POST
A. At large and/or complex situations, it is recommended that Command establish a
“Support Officer (Group).” This individual should be a District Chief or higher rank.
At three or greater alarm incidents, Command shall establish this Group using a
Deputy Chief or Acting Deputy Chief.
B. Guidelines for the Support Operation are as follows:
1. Command should realize the need for “Support” based on the following:
Command‟s effective span of control has diminished due to the number of nonfirefighting groups: i.e. Logistics, Medical, Rehab, Public Information, Staging,
and Police Liaison, or Command forecasts the need for “Support” due to the
potential magnitude of the situation.
2. At situations where third alarm Units are committed, the first arriving Deputy or
Acting Deputy shall report to the Command Post and, after reviewing the Tactical
Command Sheet, advise Command as to the role he will assume in the operation
based on the progress being made. The Deputy may elect to:
a. Assume Command
b. Assume “Support”
c. Assign a Staff Officer to “Support” and remain outside of the Command
Structure
d. Assign himself to a strategic position within the Command Structure that the
Deputy deems paramount to the success of the operation
3. “Support”
a. Remain in face-to-face contact with Command
Page 7 of 17
COMMAND PROCEDURES
b. Operate on different TAC than Command
c. Advise Communications that they will be assuming “Support”
Note: “Support shall anticipate the need for and provide resources for the fire
operation.
VIII.
COMMAND WORKSHEET
“TACTICAL WORKSHEET”
A. TASKS: Those functions that must be performed at most structure fires have been
identified. Some of these tasks are also benchmarks for reporting FOB goals. Command
should verify and check off each task in the column next to the task and report its
completion to Communications, who in turn logs the time. The areas of primary concern
to Command are:
1. Search/Rescue: Command may need to write off part of the building to affect a
rescue. Once rescue operation begins, Crews assigned must make a rapid search and
report an “All Clear” to Command. Fully involved areas are write offs and need not
be searched. Later in the operations, a secondary search should be conducted
(preferably by different Crews) and reported to Command as “Secondary Search
Complete.”
2. Fire Attack: The benchmark “Water on Fire” is recorded by Communications. The
next two, “Knockdown” and “Fire Out” should be transmitted by Command and
recorded by Communications.
3. Property Conservation: Property Conservation is an area of concern to Command.
Salvage operations should begin as soon as possible to prevent further damage to
unaffected areas.
4. Utility Control: Utility Control is another task that Command must ensure is
completed. This may be accomplished by operating main disconnects, requested OUC
and controlling gas supply.
5. The diagram of Sides Alpha, Bravo, Charlie and Delta and Quadrants A, B, C, and D
is illustrated for geographical reference.
6. Ventilation: This task is vital to the success or failure of the operation.
Page 8 of 17
COMMAND PROCEDURES
7. “Command Considerations”: Depending on the size of the operation, Command
should consider the items listed in this area. An attempt has been made to prioritize
these items. Depending on the size of the operation, these Considerations might
become Tasks for Command. Once an item has been acted upon, the Commander will
check the box and record who was assigned to carry out the function. Some
Considerations need only the notification of Communications: i.e. Red Cross,
Investigator.
8. Company/Assignment: Under the column marked “Unit”, Command would indicate
the Units responding.
9. Under the column marked “IN”, Command would place the total number of personnel
from the identified Unit that have made entry into the structure.
10. Under the column marked “PAR”, Command would keep track of the Accountability
Report of each Unit.
11. Correct Address: Self-explanatory
12. Floor No. (right side of sheet): In a highrise operation, this area provides Command
with a method of tracking units operating on upper floors. Boxes can be filled in as
tasks are assigned. In the event of an evacuation, Command could monitor the
progress of this operation.
13. Divisions/Groups (bottom of sheet): This area provides Command the necessary
space to establish the fireground organization and flow of Command. Command
places his Unit name, Support, Safety, PIO and Liaison in the appropriate boxes. As
the organization grows, Command assigns Divisions/Groups. Fire Attack, Roof,
Staging, and Rehab are basic to most major operations and are provided. Divisions
are normally assigned to geographic location and Groups by task assignment. In the
box just below the Division/Group assignment, Command would place the
Division/Group Leader‟s ID number. The box below that is provided for the Units
assigned to that Group.
14. Examples:
a. The Interior Division could be D-1 and the Units assigned could be E-1 and E-2.
b. Another example could be the Roof Division/Group. T-1 might be assigned this
Division/Group alone and no Units would appear below this box.
Page 9 of 17
COMMAND PROCEDURES
Page 10 of 17
COMMAND PROCEDURES
IX.
FIRE CONTROL
A. Offensive Operation – An aggressive and coordinated interior attack aimed at rescue
of entrapped victims and property conservation.
B. Defensive Operation – Strategy used when the survival capability of victims is nonexistent and interior conditions are such that risk/reward indicators dictate an indirect
attack.
C. Priority Traffic – A notification that can be initiated by anyone on the fireground to
make all personnel aware of an urgent situation or condition that exists. The
announcement of Priority Traffic will be followed by an Alert 1 Tone.
D. Emergency Traffic – A notification that can also be initiated by anyone on the
fireground, however, its use will strictly be limited to either a Mayday or an
Emergency Evacuation situation. The announcement of Emergency Traffic will be
followed by a warble tone strictly in an Emergency Evacuation situation.
E. Command Responsibilities
1. It is standard operating procedure to attempt to stabilize fire conditions by
extending, wherever possible, an aggressive, well-placed, and adequate offensive
interior fire attack effort, and to support that aggressive attack with whatever
resources and action is required to bring the fire under control.
2. A critical Command decision (both initial and on-going) relates to the
offensive/defensive mode of the situation.
3. Command must define offensive/defensive mode based upon:
a. Fire extent
b. Structural conditions
c. Entry capability
d. Ventilation profile
e. Rescue of occupants
f. Resources
Page 11 of 17
COMMAND PROCEDURES
X.
OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS
A. Overview
1. Many times offensive/defensive conditions are clear-cut and Command can
quickly develop a decision that relates to that mode.
2. In other cases, the situation is marginal and Command must initiate an offensive
interior attack, while setting up defensive positions on the exterior. The effect of
the interior attack must be evaluated and the attack abandoned if necessary. Mode
changes can develop almost instantly or can take an extended time. Command
must be aware and responsive to such mode changes.
3. While operating in a marginal situation, Command needs to constantly evaluate
fireground conditions. This will require frequent and detailed reports from
Division/Group Officers. It is also imperative that the Officer receives a roof
report to determine if it is safe to work under.
4. Command should abandon marginal attacks when it is determined that the roof is
unsafe, or when interior Crews encounter heavy heat and cannot locate the fire or
make progress on the fire.
5. Command must consider the most dangerous direction of fire extension,
particularly as it affects rescue activities, confinement efforts, and exposure
protection. Command must then allocate resources based upon this fire-spread
evaluation.
6. In some cases, the most effective tactical analysis involves an evaluation of what
is not burning, rather than what is actually on fire. The unburned portion
represents where the fire is going and should establish the framework for fire
control requirements. Offensive fires should be fought from the interior-unburned
side (interior capability is the principle offensive strategy factor).
7. Initial attack efforts must be directed toward supporting the primary search. The
initial attack line must go between the victims and the fire to protect avenues of
escape.
8. Determine the fire location and extent before starting fire operations (as far as
possible). Avoid operating fire streams into smoke.
9. Command cannot lose sight of the very simple and basic fireground reality that at
some point the fire forces must engage the fire and fight. Command must
structure whatever operations are required to put water on the fire. The rescue/fire
control/extension/exposure problem is solved in the majority of cases by a fast,
strong, and well-placed attack.
Page 12 of 17
COMMAND PROCEDURES
10. Effective fire control requires that water be applied directly on the fire or directly
into the fire area. Command must establish an attack plan that overpowers the
fire with actual water application.
11. Fire in concealed spaces (attics, ceiling areas, construction voids, etc.) must be
opened for extinguishment. Early identification and response to concealed space
fires can save the structure.
12. The attack plan must take into consideration the seven sides of a structure: top,
bottom, front, back, both sides, and the interior. The plan must concentrate on the
most dangerous direction and avenue of fire extension and provide a means to
stop the fire in that direction. The remaining sides are then considered in order of
danger.
13. The basic variables that Command must manage in the attack plan are:
a. Location/Position of Attack: Evaluate options (offensive and defensive)
provided by building openings (doors, windows, and arrangement of
surrounding buildings).
b. Size of Attack: Evaluate options of the fire attack (manpower, handlines,
master streams, etc.) and formulate a strategy based on the resources
available.
c. Support Functions: Evaluate the activities necessary to facilitate access and
operations (forcible entry, ventilation, etc.) and integrate with other attack
variables.
d. Time of Attack: evaluate options of timing of fire attack (when to begin,
duration, etc.).
14. Time becomes an extremely important factor with regard to attack operations.
The bigger the attack or the more interior the attack is positioned, the longer it
takes to get it going. Command must balance and integrate attack size and
position with fire conditions and resources.
15. Companies sometimes have the desire to lay hose and put water on the fire
utilizing the fastest, shortest, and most direct route. This process is called the
“Candle Moth” syndrome and may draw a Company to attack a fire from the
burned side, which should be avoided. Attack from the burned side generally
will drive the fire, smoke and heat back into the building – hindering rescue and
decreasing survivability of victims. When fire is burning out of a building and
not affecting exposures, let it burn out, and extend an interior attack from the
unburned side. It is usually venting in the proper direction. It requires discipline
on the part of control forces to do so and not submit to “candle moth”
temptations.
Page 13 of 17
COMMAND PROCEDURES
16. Command must develop a fire control plan of attack that first stops the forward
progress of the fire and then brings the fire under control. In large complex fires,
Command will not immediately have adequate resources to accomplish all of the
attack needs. Initially Command must prioritize attack efforts, act as a resource
allocation and determine the response that will eventually be required. Accurate
forecasting of conditions by Command becomes critical during this initial
evaluation process.
17. Command must develop critical decisions that relate to cut-off points and must
approach fire spread determinations with pessimism. It takes a certain amount of
time to “get water” and the fire continues to burn while the attack gets set up. If
Command misjudges, the fire may burn past the attack/cut-off position.
Command must accurately project set-up time, write off lost property, and get
ahead of the fire.
18. Write off property that is already lost and go on to protect exposed property
based on the most dangerous direction of fire spread. Do not continue to operate
in positions that are essentially lost.
B. Offensive Strategy
1. Initiate an interior attack and related support directed toward quickly bringing the
fire under control.
2. Basic Offensive Plan
a. Take Command
b. Perform a primary search
c. Fast line – fast, aggressive, interior attack
d. Second line – back-up first/confine the fire
e. Pump water
f. Provide support activities
g. Quickly evaluate and react
Page 14 of 17
COMMAND PROCEDURES
XI.
DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS
A. Overview
1. The decision to operate in a defensive mode indicates that the offensive attack
strategy has been abandoned for reasons of personal safety and the involved
structure has been conceded as lost (written off).
2. The announcement of a change to a defensive mode will be made as “Priority
Traffic” and all personnel will withdraw from the structure and maintain a safe
perimeter. Communications will sound the alert tones and repeat the Priority
Traffic message. Company Officers will account for their personnel and report
PAR to Command.
3. Interior lines will be withdrawn (or abandoned, if necessary) and repositioned
when changing to a defensive mode. Lines should be backed away to a position
that will protect exposures.
4. The first priority in a defensive operation is to protect exposures. The second
priority may be to knock down the main body of fire. This may assist in the
protection of exposures, but does not replace it as a first priority.
5. Master streams are generally the most effective tactic to be employed in defensive
operations. For tactical purposes, a standard master stream flow of 500 GPM
should be the guideline. Adjustments may be made upward or downward from
Page 15 of 17
COMMAND PROCEDURES
this figure to more efficiently extinguish the fire. (Command should consider the
aerial master streams as the most versatile and effective use of water in the
defensive operation.)
6. When the exposure is severe and water is limited, the most effective tactic is to
put the water on the exposure. Once exposure coverage is established, attention
may be directed to knocking down the main body of fire and thermal-column
cooling. The same principles of large volume procedures should be employed.
7. The completion of bringing the fire under control is reported utilizing a radio
report of “Fire Knocked Down.” It is the responsibility of Command to transmit
this report to dispatch. This time will be recorded by dispatch.
8. “Fire Knocked Down” means the forward progression of the fire has been stopped
and the remaining fire can be extinguished with the on-scene resources. It does
not mean the fire is completely out.
B. Defensive Strategy
1. Exterior attack directed to first reduce fire extension and then bring the fire under
control.
2. Basic Defensive Plan
a. Take Command
b. Evaluate fire spread/write off lost property
c. Identify key tactical positions
d. Prioritize fire streams (exposure protection)
e. Provide big, well-placed streams
f. Pump water
g. Determine if additional resources are required
h. Surround and drown
XII.
SUMMARY: FIRE CONTROL
A. Command must:
1. Consider standard factors to determine offensive/defensive mode.
Page 16 of 17
COMMAND PROCEDURES
2. Extend a strong interior attack to confine and control in offensive cases.
3. Protect exposures, stabilize forward fire progress, and surround and drown in
defensive cases.
4. Control position and function of control forces in marginal (offensive/defensive)
cases.
5. Consider most dangerous direction and avenue of fire spread.
6. Attack from the unburned side. Resist “candle-moth” syndrome.
7. Structure initial attack to control interior access and to support the primary search.
8. Apply adequate water directly on the fire.
9. Consider all seven sides (top, bottom, four sides, and inside).
10. Write off lost property.
11. Set up ahead of the fire and overpower it – avoid playing “catch up”.
12. Open up and operate directly into concealed spaces.
Page 17 of 17
DIVIDER
2. TACTICAL GUIDELINES
DIVISIONS / GROUPS
I.
INTRODUCTION
The need will sometimes arise when the magnitude of an incident will require that
Command separate numerous Companies into more manageable Units. These Units are
identified as either Divisions/Groups. The Officer of these Units will be referred to as a
Division/Group Leader. Complex fire situations soon exceed the capability of one Officer
to effectively manage the entire operation. The formation of Divisions/Groups reduces
the span of control of the overall Command function to more manageable sized units.
Safety of firefighting personnel represents a major reason for the forming of
Divisions/Groups. Each Division/Group Officer must maintain the capability to
communicate with forces under his Command, so that he can control the position and
function of his Companies and maintain accountability of personnel assigned.
II.
Geographical “Divisions”
A. Command will establish Divisions to divide large-scale operations geographically
into effectively sized Units. These Divisions are responsible for firefighting
operations involving a manageable number of Companies in close proximity to each
other.
B. Divisions assigned to specific operating areas will be designated by the “Geographic
Universal System” sides Alpha, Bravo, Charlie, or Delta and/or Quadrants Alpha,
Bravo, Charlie, Delta. In some cases landmarks may provide better designations for
operating Divisions (Roof Division, Interior Division). In highrise fires, Divisions
will usually be indicated by floor numbers (Division 15 indicates the 15th floor).
III.
Functional “Groups”
A. Groups will be used to provide an array of major functions that can be created to
address the needs of a particular situation, e.g., Support Group. This places
responsibility for the details and execution of that particular function on a Single
Leader (Group Officer).
B. Functional Groups will be identified by the function e.g., Salvage Group, Ventilation
Group. Leaders will use the Group designation in radio communications.
IV.
Communication Within Divisions/Groups
A. Establishing Divisions/Groups reduces the overall amount of fireground radio
communication. Most communication inside the Division/Group is conducted faceto-face between the fire Companies and their Division/Group Officer.
Page 1 of 12
TACTICAL GUIDELINES
V.
Command should begin to assign Divisions/Groups based on the following factors.
A. When it is forecast that a situation will eventually involve a number of Companies
beyond his capability to directly control. (In such cases, early recognition and
Division/Group assignment are critical.)
B. When Command can no longer effectively cope with the number of Companies
currently involved in the operation.
C. Companies are involved in complex interior operations.
D. Companies are operating from a tactical position over which Command has little or
no control.
E. The situation is such that close Company control is required in cases where difficult
hazardous materials and heavy fire loads are involved.
VI.
Divisions/Groups will be regulated by the following guidelines:
A. It will be the on-going responsibility of Command to assign Divisions/Groups as
required for effective fire ground operations. This assignment will relate to both the
geographic area Divisions and specialized functional Groups.
B. Command must advise each Division/Group Officer of the overall strategy and plan,
in addition to the objective of the Division/Group.
C. The number of Companies assigned to a Division/Group will depend upon conditions
within that Division/Group. Command will maintain an awareness of the number of
Companies operating within a Division/Group, the capability of that Division/Group
and the capability of that Division/Group Officer (Leader) to effectively operate.
D. Divisions/Groups will be commanded by a Leader who may be a Chief Officer,
Company Officer or any other member designated by Command.
E. In some cases, the Leader will be assigned to an area/function initially to evaluate and
report conditions and will advise Command of needed tasks and resources. A Leader
may also be designated during the course of ongoing operations. He will receive his
assignment and mission from Command, along with assigned resources. He will then
proceed to his Division/Group, evaluate conditions and assume leadership of that
Division/Group.
F. In many cases, the initial Division/Group assignment will be given to the Company
Officer (Leader), who receives the initial assignment to a basic tactical position (rear,
interior, roof, etc.). Command will indicate to the Officer that he will be operating as
both a Leader and as an operating Company. Command will, in such cases, assign a
Page 2 of 12
TACTICAL GUIDELINES
Command Officer to relieve the Company Officer as Leader as quickly as possible.
Regular Command transfer procedures will be followed. The early establishment of
Divisions/Groups provides an effective framework on which the operation can be
built.
Page 3 of 12
TACTICAL GUIDELINES
DIVISION/GROUP LEADERS
I.
Division/Group Leaders will be in charge and control of all assigned functions within
their Division/Group. To accomplish this, the Group Officer will be responsible for the
following:
A.
Accountability of Division/Group personnel assigned
B.
Monitor work progress
C.
Redirect activities as necessary
D.
Coordinate with related activities
E.
Monitor the welfare of Division/Group personnel
F.
Request additional resources, as needed
G.
Communicate with Command, as necessary
H.
Re-allocate resources within the Division/Group
II.
The Division/Group Leader will keep Command informed of the conditions in his
Division/Group through regular progress reports. The Division/Group Leader will advise
Command immediately of significant changes in conditions in his Division/Group,
particularly those involving ability or inability to complete missions, hazard conditions,
accidents, collapse, etc. Command allocates overall resources and depends upon the
Division/Group Leaders to actively monitor the resources within that Division/Group.
III.
When a Company is assigned to an operating Division/Group, the Company will be told
what Division/Group they will be assigned to and who the Leader will be. The
Division/Group Leader will be informed which particular Companies or Units have been
assigned to him by Command. It is then the responsibility of the Division/Group Leader
to contact the Company by radio to transmit any instructions concerning the specific
action requested.
IV.
Division/Group Leaders must be sufficiently mobile to be able to supervise the work of
their assigned Companies. This may mean actually going into an interior operating
position to monitor progress while maintaining radio communications. The
Division/Group Leader should be readily identifiable and maintain a visible position as
much as possible, but this does not mean that he must stay away from operating
positions.
A. The primary function of the Company Officer working within a Division/Group is to
direct the operations of his Crew in performing the assigned tasks. Division/Group
Page 4 of 12
TACTICAL GUIDELINES
Leaders will be kept advised by the Company Officer of work progress, and the need
for additional manpower and equipment.
B. Companies assigned to a Division/Group will direct routine communications to their
Leader and should utilize non-radio modes whenever possible.
C. Routine communications from a Company to Command will be redirected to the
Division/Group Leader if the Company is assigned to a Division/Group.
Division/Group Leaders will conduct radio communications with Command and with
other Division/Group Leaders. (This procedure will apply only to routine
communications – “PRIORITY/EMERGENCY TRAFFIC” may be initiated by
anyone, at anytime.)
Page 5 of 12
TACTICAL GUIDELINES
UNIVERSAL GEOGRAPHIC SYSTEM
I.
A universal geographic system for identifying both interior and exterior locations and
exposures is necessary for effective communication. It is imperative that all personnel
and Companies working together be completely familiar with the universal geographic
system.
A. With the designated front of the structure called “Side Alpha” (the side that the
building is addressed to, usually where the Command Post is located), the remaining
three sides and their respective exposures follow in alphabetic order: Bravo, Charlie,
and Delta, in a clockwise manner. Thus, “Side Bravo” is the left side of the structure.
The buildings, exposed to that side are called “Exposure Bravo” (Bravo-2, Bravo-3,
Bravo-4, etc.) Note: Exposure Bravo and Bravo-1 are synonymous. Likewise,
Exposure Charlie and Charlie-1, etc. are as well.
B. If the complexity of the fire building is such that the Incident Commander‟s span of
control is in danger of becoming ineffective, it too may be further divided and
assigned to another Officer. In this case, the interior is divided into four quadrants.
The left front quadrant is designated as Quadrant “Alpha” and proceeding again
clockwise, the remaining three quadrants are designated as “Bravo”, “Charlie”, and
“Delta”.
C. When a status report on conditions in a building is given to the Incident Commander
from a Division/Group Officer, the Incident Commander‟s perception of where the
problems are should be greatly enhanced through the use of universal geographic
system terminology. For example, “the fire has been contained in Quadrant “Bravo”,
but we still have fire in the partition between Quadrants “Bravo” and “Charlie”.
D. The value of the universal geographic system can be further seen in the following
example, “Roof Division to Command – I have roof collapse on Side Charlie,
Quadrant Bravo.”
Page 6 of 12
TACTICAL GUIDELINES
Exposure C
Side C
B
C
Side D
4
Side B
B
A
B-3 B-2 B-1
D
Side A
1
Front Entrance
Exposure A
Page 7 of 12
D-1 D-2 D-3
TACTICAL GUIDELINES
NIMS
I.
INTRODUCTION
Since the September 11, 2001 attacks on the World Trade Center and the Pentagon, much
has been done to improve prevention, preparedness, response, recovery, mitigation
capabilities and coordination processes across the country. A comprehensive national
approach to incident management, applicable at all jurisdictional levels and across
functional disciplines, would further improve the effectiveness of emergency response
providers and incident management organizations across a full spectrum of potential
incidents and hazardous scenarios. Such an approach would also improve coordination
and cooperation between public and private entities in a variety of domestic incident
management activities. For purposes of this document, incidents can include acts of
terrorism, wildland and urban fires, floods, hazardous material spills, nuclear accidents,
aircraft accidents, earthquakes, hurricanes, tornadoes, typhoons, and war-related
disasters.
On February 25, 2003, the President issued the Homeland Security Presidential Directive
(HSPD) – 5, which directs the Secretary of Homeland Security to develop and administer
a National Incident Management System (NIMS). According to HSPD -5:
This system will provide a consistent nationwide approach for Federal, State, and local
governments to work effectively and efficiently together to prepare for, respond to, and
recover from domestic incidents, regardless of cause, size, or complexity. To provide for
interoperability and compatibility among Federal, State, and local capabilities, the NIMS
will include a core set of concepts, principles, terminology, and technologies covering the
Incident Command System, multiagency coordination systems, unified Command,
training, identification and management of resources (including systems for classifying
types of resources), qualifications, certifications, and the collection, tracking, and
reporting of incident information and incident resources.
A. Concepts and Principles
1. To provide the framework for interoperability and compatibility, the NIMS is
based on an appropriate balance of flexibility and standardization.
a. Flexibility
The NIMS provides a consistent, flexible, and adjustable national framework
where government and private entities at all levels can work together to
manage domestic incidents, regardless of their cause, size, location, or
complexity. This flexibility applies across all phases of incident management
prevention, preparedness, response, recovery, and mitigation.
Page 8 of 12
TACTICAL GUIDELINES
b. Standardization
The NIMS provides a set of standardized organizational structures such as the
Incident Command System (ICS), multiagency coordination systems, and
public information systems, as well as requirements for processes, procedures,
and systems designed to improve interoperability among jurisdictions and
disciplines in various areas, including training, resource management,
personnel qualification and certification, equipment certification,
communications and information management, technology support, and
continuous system improvement.
II.
OVERVIEW
The NIMS integrates existing best practices into a consistent, nationwide approach to
domestic incident management that is applicable at all jurisdictional levels and across
functional disciplines in an all-hazards context. Six major components make up this
system approach. Of these components, the concepts and practices for Command and
Management and Preparedness are the most fully developed, reflecting their regular use
by many jurisdictional levels and agencies responsible for incident management across
the country. Resource Management, Communications and Information Management,
Supporting Technologies, and Ongoing Management and Maintenance introduce many
concepts and requirements that are also integral to the NIMS, but that will require further
collaborative development and refinement over time.
A. NIMS Components
The following discussion provides a synopsis of each major component of the
NIMS, as well as how these components work together as a system to provide the
national framework for preparing for, preventing, responding to, and recovering
from domestic incidents, regardless of cause, size, or complexity.
1. Command and Management
NIMS standard Incident Command structures are based on three key
organizational systems:
a. The Incident Command System (ICS)
The ICS defines the operating characteristics, interactive management
components, and organizational structure of supporting incident management,
and emergency response organizations engaged throughout the life cycle of an
incident.
b. Multiagency Coordination Systems
These define the operating characteristics, interactive management
components, and organizational structure of supporting incident management
Page 9 of 12
TACTICAL GUIDELINES
entities engaged at the Federal, State, local, tribal, and regional levels through
mutual-aid agreements and other assistance arrangements.
c. Public Information Systems
These refer to processes, procedures, and systems for communicating timely
and accurate information to the public during crisis or emergency situations.
B.
Preparedness
Effective incident management begins with a host of preparedness activities
conducted on a “steady-state” basis, well in advance of any potential incident.
Preparedness involves an integrated combination of planning, training, exercises,
personnel qualification and certification standards, equipment acquisition,
certification standards, and publication management processes and activities.
1. Planning
Plans describe how personnel, equipment, and other resources are used to support
incident management and emergency response activities. Plans provide
mechanisms and systems for setting priorities, integrating multiple entities and
functions, and ensuring that communications and other systems are available and
integrated in support of a full spectrum of incident management requirements.
2. Training
Training includes standard courses on multiagency incident Command and
management, organization structure, operational procedures, discipline-specific
and agency-specific incident management courses, and courses on the integration
and use of supporting technologies.
3. Exercises
Incident management organizations and personnel must participate in realistic
exercises; including multi-disciplinary, multi-jurisdictional, multi-sector
interaction, to improve integration and interoperability, and to optimize resources
utilization during incident operations.
4. Personnel Qualification and Certification
Qualification and certification activities are undertaken to identify and publish
national-level standards and measure performance against these standards to
ensure that incident management and emergency responder personnel are
appropriately qualified and officially certified to perform NIMS related functions.
5. Equipment Acquisition and Certification
Page 10 of 12
TACTICAL GUIDELINES
Incident management organizations and emergency responders at all levels rely
on various types of equipment to perform mission essential tasks. A critical
component of operational preparedness is the acquisition of equipment that will
perform to certain standards, including the capability to be interoperable with
similar equipment used by other jurisdictions.
6. Mutual Aid
Mutual-aid agreements are the means for one jurisdiction to provide resources,
facilities, service, and other required support to another jurisdiction during an
incident. Each jurisdiction should be party to a mutual-aid agreement with
appropriate jurisdictions from which they expect to receive or to which they
expect to provide assistance during an incident.
7. Publications Management
Publications management refers to forms and forms standardization, developing
publication materials, administering publications, including establishing naming
and numbering conventions, managing the publication, promulgation of
documents, exercising control over sensitive documents, and revising publications
when necessary.
C. Resource Management
The NIMS defines standardized mechanisms and establishes requirements for
processes to describe, inventory, mobilize, dispatch, track, and recover resources over
the life cycle of an incident.
D. Communications and Information Management
The NIMS identifies the requirement for all standardized framework for
communications, information management (collections, analysis, and dissemination),
and information sharing at all levels of incident management. These elements are
briefly described as follows:
1. Incident Management Communications
Incident management organizations must ensure that effective, interoperable
communications processes, procedures, and systems exist to support a wide
variety of incident management activities across agencies and jurisdictions.
2. Information Management
Information management processes, procedures, and systems help ensure that
information, including communications and data, flows efficiently through a
Page 11 of 12
TACTICAL GUIDELINES
commonly accepted architecture supporting numerous agencies and jurisdictions
responsible for managing or directing domestic incidents, those impacted by the
incident, and those contributing resources to the incident management effort.
Effective information management enhances incident management and response
and helps ensure that crisis decision-making is better informed.
E. Supporting Technologies
Technology and technological systems provide supporting capabilities essential to
implementing and continuously refining of the NIMS. These include voice and data
communications systems, information management systems (i.e., record keeping and
resource tracking), and data display systems. Also included are specialized
technologies that facilitate ongoing operations and incident management activities in
situations that call for unique technology-based capabilities.
F. Ongoing Management Maintenance
This component establishes an activity to provide strategic direction for and oversight
of the NIMS, supporting both routine review and the continuous refinement of the
system and its components over the long term.
Page 12 of 12
DIVIDER
3. TACTICAL PLANNING
STANDARD COMPANY OPERATIONS
I.
RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Assign basic fireground functions and activities to the various Companies based upon
the capabilities and characteristics of each type of Unit.
B. Assign major fireground functions to the particular Company who can best
accomplish the operations.
C. Integrate the efforts of Engine, Truck, Heavy Rescue, and Rescue Companies to
achieve effective rescue, fire control and property conservation.
D. Increase the awareness and confidence of Company members in the standard
performance of other Companies operating on the fireground.
E. Reduce the amount and detail of orders required to get Companies into action on the
fireground.
F. The following items represent the standard operations that will normally be
performed by Engine, Truck, Heavy Rescue, and Rescue Operations. These basic
functions will provide the framework for field operations for these Companies.
II.
ENGINE COMPANY FUNCTIONS
A. Search, rescue, and treatment
B. Stretch and pump hoselines (utilize water supply to best advantage)
C. Operate nozzles
III.
TRUCK COMPANY FUNCTIONS
A. Ventilation, forcible entry, search, rescue, and treatment.
B. Raise ladders
C. Provide access/check fire extension
D. Utility control
E. Provide light
Page 1 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
F. Operate Tower nozzle
G. Perform salvage and overhaul
H. Extrication
IV.
HEAVY RESCUE FUNCTIONS
A. Proactive stance on all RIT applications
B. Survey building and building layout
C. Forcibly entry, search, and rescue
D. Extrication
E. Place ladders for rescue
F. Remove obstructions from windows
G. Remove gates over doors
H. Check for building stability
I. In absence or delay of a Truck Company, Command may assign Truck functions to
the Heavy Rescue.
J. In cases of the Heavy Rescue not being available, a second Truck will be dispatched
and should assume RIT until relieved/replaced by Command.
V.
RESCUE COMPANY FUNCTIONS
A. The Rescue shall report to the scene and position vehicle with an unblocked exit path.
B. Acknowledge two-out position over the radio if arriving before RIT is established. If
arriving after RIT has been established, acknowledge Ready Rescue designation.
C. If arriving before RIT is established, Crew will remain together as a team and begin
exterior truck functions, strictly limited to forcing entry, controlling utilities, getting a
vent, giving a backside report and gaining secondary egress for interior Crews.
D. The Rescue will stop all firefighting activities immediately upon the establishment of
a RIT, and then transition to a “Ready Rescue” designation.
E. Designated to render EMS treatment or transport to OFD personnel if needed.
Page 2 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
VI.
READY RESCUE
A. If RIT has been established prior to the arrival of the Rescue, the Rescue will assume
Ready Rescue functions. If RIT has not been established prior to their arrival, the
Rescue Crew will begin functions limited to forcible entry, ventilation, utility control,
secondary egress, and a backside report until RIT is established. The Rescue
Company will then immediately assume “Ready Rescue” functions to include the
following:
B. Position vehicle to have an unobstructed exit path.
C. Abstain from performing any firefighting activities.
D. Remove SCBA, but continue to wear all bunker gear.
E. Take the stretcher and ALS medical equipment and proceed to the Command Post.
The Ready Rescue is designed to provide immediate EMS treatment and transport for
firefighting personnel.
VII.
GENERAL GUIDELINES
A. First Arriving Engine, Truck, Heavy Rescue, and Rescue Companies will
automatically perform their functions as required, unless otherwise ordered by
Command.
B. Company Officers will determine, based upon conditions, the priority of the functions
(listed) for their Company, unless otherwise ordered by Command.
C. This does not limit a Company to only its listed function. Every Company will be
expected to perform all basic functions within their capability, and it will be the
ongoing responsibility of Command to integrate other required tasks and functions as
required with the on-scene Units.
D. In the absence (or delay) of a Truck Company or the Heavy Rescue, Command
should assign Truck functions to an Engine Company. Truck Companies may be
assigned Engine Company functions as well.
E. Rescue crew members shall work in pairs. They are not to separate, unless otherwise
directed by Command. These actions will assist with accountability and safety on the
fire scene.
F. The assignment of these basic operations to Engine, Truck, Heavy Rescue, and
Rescue Companies represents a standard fireground plan for Tactical Operations
designed to improve the effectiveness of all Units working together. This plan should
Page 3 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
enhance the decision making process of all Officers by establishing a standard
operating framework.
G. Command and Support vehicles shall be parked in a location outside the operational
area, where they will not restrict access to the scene.
H. At major incidents, all vehicles shall be parked in an orderly arrangement at a
location that maintains access routes.
VIII.
TACTICAL PRIORITIES
A. Tactical priorities identify the three separate tactical functions that must be completed
in order to stabilize any fire situation. These priorities also establish the order in
which these basic fireground functions must be performed.
B. These functions should be regarded as separate, yet inter-related activities, which
must be dealt with in order. Basic tactical priorities are as follows:
1. Rescue
a. The activities required to protect occupants, remove those who are threatened
and to treat the injured.
b. Recorded as Benchmark “ALL CLEAR”.
Note: The term “ALL CLEAR” relates only to a PRIMARY search completion
report and is not to be used in reporting fire conditions. “NOTHING
SHOWING” indicates the absence of smoke/fire.
2. Fire Control
a. The activities required to stop the forward progress of the fire and to bring the
fire under control.
b. Recorded as Benchmark “FIRE KNOCKED DOWN”.
3. Property Conservation
a. The activities required to stop or reduce additional loss of property.
b. Recorded as Benchmark “FIRE OUT”.
Note: All three tactical priorities require somewhat different tactical
approaches from both a Command and an operational standpoint. While the
objective of each function must be satisfied in its priority order, Command
must in many cases overlap these activities to achieve the required
benchmark.
Page 4 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
BASIC FIREGROUND FACTORS
I.
BUILDING
A. Size
B. Interior arrangement/access (stairs, hall, elevators)
C. Construction type
D. Age
E. Condition – faults/weaknesses
F. Value
G. Compartmentalized/separation
H. Vertical/horizontal openings, shafts, channels
I. Outside openings – doors and windows/degree of security
J. Utility characteristics (hazard/controls)
K. Concealed spaces/attack characteristics
L. Exterior access
M. Effect the fire has had on the structure (at this point)
N. Time projection on continuing fire effect on building
II.
FIRE
A. Size
B. Extent (percent of structure involved)
C. Location
D. Stage (incipient to flashover)
E. Direction of travel (most dangerous)
Page 5 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
F. Time of involvement
G. Type and amount of material involved: structure/interior/ finish/contents/everything
H. Type and amount of material left to burn
I. Ventilation
III.
OCCUPANCY
A. Specific Occupancy
B. Type-group (business, mercantile, public assembly, school, institutional, residential,
hazardous, industrial, storage)
C. Value characteristics associated with occupancy
D. Fire load (size, nature)
E. Status (open, closed, occupied, vacant, abandoned, under construction)
F. Occupancy associated characteristics/hazards
G. Type of contents (based on occupancy)
H. Time – as it affects occupancy use
I. Property conservation profile/susceptibility of contents to damage/need for salvage
IV.
LIFE HAZARD
A. Number of occupants
B. Location of occupants (in relation to the fire)
C. Condition of occupants (by virtue of fire exposure)
D. Incapacities of occupants
E. Commitment required for search and rescue (men, equipment, Command)
F. Fire control required for search and rescue
Page 6 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
G. Need for EMS
H. Time estimate of fire products effect on victims
I. Exposure of spectators/control of spectators
J. Hazards to fire personnel
K. Access to victims
L. Characteristics of escape routes/avenues of escape (type, safety, fire condition, etc.)
V.
EXPOSURES
A. Access, arrangement, and distance of external exposures
C. Combustibility of exposures
D. Access, arrangement, and nature of internal exposures
E. Severity and urgency of exposures (fire effect)
F. Value of exposures
G. Most dangerous direction
H. Time estimate of fire effect on exposures (internal and external)
I. Obstructions to operations
J. Capability/limitations on apparatus movement and use
VI.
RESOURCES
A. Personnel and equipment on scene
B. Personnel and equipment responding
C. Personnel and equipment available in reserve
D. Estimate of response time for manpower and equipment
E. Condition of manpower and equipment
Page 7 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
F. Capability of personnel
G. Nature of Command systems available to Command
H. Number and location of hydrants
I. Supplemental water sources
J. Adequacy of water supply
K. Built-in private fire protection (sprinkler, standpipe, alarms)
L. Outside agency resources and response time
VII.
OTHER FACTORS/CONDITIONS
A. Time of day/night
B. Day of week
C. Season
D. Special hazards by virtue of holidays and special events
E. Weather (wind, rain, heat, cold, humidity, visibility)
F. Traffic conditions
G. Social conditions (strike, riot, mob, music festival)
Page 8 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
SEARCH AND RESCUE
I.
GUIDELINES
A. Search and rescue should be performed according to an efficient, well planned
procedure, while taking into account the safety of search crew personnel.
B. The object of the search effort is to locate possible victims, not create additional ones
by neglecting the safety of the search crew.
C. Prior to entering the search area, all search team members should be familiar with a
specific plan, including the overall objective, a designation of the search area, and
individual assignments, etc. This may require a brief conference among crew
members before entering the search area to develop and communicate the plan.
D. Search activities should be conducted by two or more members.
E. Company Officers must maintain an awareness of the location and function of all
members within their crew during search operations.
F. A brief look around the floor below the fire may provide good reference for the
search team, as floors in multi-story occupancies usually have a similar layout.
G. Whenever a search is conducted that exposes search crews to fire conditions
(particularly above the fire floor) the search team should be protected as soon as
possible with a charged hoseline, in order to ensure a safe escape route.
H. If search personnel are operating without a hoseline, lifelines should be used when
encountering conditions of severely limited visibility. Thermal Imagers should be
utilized to assist with all searches.
I. Unless otherwise instructed, use Search and Rescue Procedures taught and adopted by
the Training Division, which is a right-handed search.
J. It is standard operating procedure to extend a primary search in all involved and
exposed occupancies which can be entered. Command must structure initial
operations around the completion of the primary search. A primary search involves
Companies quickly checking all affected areas for possible victims. Time is the
critical factor when performing a primary search.
K. The completion of the primary search is reported utilizing the standard radio reporting
term “ALL CLEAR.” It is the responsibility of Command to coordinate primary
search assignments, secure completion reports from interior Companies, and to
transmit the “ALL CLEAR” report to Orlando. Orlando will record the time of this
report from Command.
Page 9 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
L.
The rescue functions that follow initial fire control activities will be regarded as a
secondary search. A secondary is the systematic and thorough search of all affected
areas to confirm the absence of any victims. The secondary search should preferably be
conducted by crews that were not involved with the primary search. Thoroughness is
the critical factor when performing a secondary search. Upon completion of the
secondary search, Units involved shall report to Command, “Secondary Search
Complete”. Do not use the term “ALL CLEAR”, as it pertains only to the primary
search.
M. The stage of the fire becomes a critical factor that affects the rescue approach developed
by Command. The following items outline the basic Command approach to fire stages:
1.
In “NOTHING SHOWING” situations, or in very minor cases that clearly pose
no life hazard, Command must structure a rapid interior search and report “ALL
CLEAR”.
2.
In “SMOKE SHOWING” and “WORKING FIRE” situations, fire control efforts
must be extended simultaneously with rescue operations in order to gain entry
and control interior access to complete the primary search.
N. In cases of fully involved buildings or sections of buildings, immediate entry and
primary search activities become impossible and survival of occupants is improbable.
Command will initially report fully involved conditions and advise Communications that
there will not be a primary search performed. As quickly as fire control is achieved,
Command must structure what is in effect, a secondary search for victims.
O. Command and operating Companies cannot depend upon reports from spectators or
occupants to determine the status of victims. Control forces should utilize reports as to
the location, number, and condition of victims as supporting primary search efforts and
must extend and complete a primary search wherever entry is possible. Command must
consider the following factors in developing a basic rescue size-up.
1. Number, location, and condition of victims
2. Affect the fire has on victims
3. Capability to enter the building, remove/protect victims and control power
P. Command must make the basic rescue decision:
1. Do we remove victims from fire?
2.
Do we remove the fire from the victims? (“Defend in place”)
Page 10 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
Q. In some cases, occupants are safer in their rooms, rather than moving through
contaminated hallways and interior areas. Such movement may also impede interior
firefighting.
R. Command must realistically evaluate the personnel required to remove victims and
treat their fire-induced injuries. In fire involving multiple victims, Command must
call for the timely response of adequate resources and quickly develop an
organization that will both stabilize the fire and provide for the removal and treatment
of the occupants.
S. Rescue efforts should be extended in the following order:
1. Most severely threatened
2. The largest number (groups)
3. The remainder of the fire area
4. The exposed area
T. Command must make specific primary search assignments for Companies to cover
specific areas of large/complex occupancies and maintain ongoing control of such
Companies until the entire area is searched. When primary search Companies
encounter and remove victims, Command must assign other Companies to continue to
cover the interior position vacated by those Companies.
U. All initial attack efforts must be directed to support rescue efforts. The placement of
hoselines is a critical factor and must be placed in a manner to control interior access,
confine the fire, and protect the avenues of escape. It may be necessary to operate in
a manner that writes off part or all of the structure in order to buy rescue time.
Normal means of interior access (stairs, halls, interior public areas, etc.), should be
utilized to remove victims whenever possible. Secondary means of rescue (platforms,
ladders, fire escapes, etc.), must be utilized in their order of effectiveness.
V. Command must structure treatment of victims after removal. Multiple victims should
be moved to one location for more effective treatment.
W. Command should coordinate and utilize Paramedic capability wherever available and
assign treatment Companies as required to an exterior Medical Group.
X. Once the primary search has been completed and “ALL CLEAR” transmitted,
Command must ensure control of access to the fire area. Beware of occupants (and
others) reentering the building.
Page 11 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
Y. Command must develop a realistic (and pessimistic) rescue size-up as early as
possible. The most urgent reason for calling additional alarms is to provide life
safety.
Page 12 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
ENGINE COMPANY OPERATIONS
I.
OPERATIONAL PHILOSOPHY
A. The Orlando Fire Department‟s basic philosophy on Engine operations is simple. Put
the appropriate amount of water directly on the seat of the fire. The approach is often
described as an “aggressive attack”. OFD‟s organizational structure is built around
this very concept.
B. OFD‟s firefighting approach demands that tasks be completed rapidly and
simultaneously on the fireground, requiring adequate staffing and a sufficient
deployment model of Engine and Truck Companies. The first Engine has the ability
to stretch and operate an attack line because other functions, such as forcing entry and
establishing a continuous water supply are being completed simultaneously. The
following are guidelines for Engine Company operations.
II.
ATTACK TEAMS
A. In many tactical situations, it is desirable to combine Companies together as
Divisions/Groups to achieve more effective results. This consolidates the efforts on
the Companies toward tactical goals and makes Command more manageable.
B. The Attack Team is an extension of this concept in which Companies are assigned on
the fireground in Divisions/Groups with a specific geographic area or function
assigned. The assignment of an attack team in the early stages of an incident
naturally provides an effective grouping that may be built upon as the incident
progresses.
C. Division/Group Officers should try to structure requests for additional resources in
terms of attack teams whenever possible. This type of assignment leads to a more
effective framework. This does not mean that the Division/Group Officer may not
request single Companies or special Units when indicated.
D. The usual deployment of an Attack Team will involve a “forward” pumper supplied
by one large diameter hose from a pumper on a hydrant. With this configuration the
Company Officer of the forward Engine Company normally becomes the Attack
Team Leader. One of the other Company Officers may in some situations, be
designated by Command to lead the Attack Team. (Example: for a roof operation, it
may be preferable to have the Truck Company Officer designated as the Leader).
E. The deployment of first response Units may be such that there are insufficient
resources to place a full attack team at each strategic position. Command may elect
to assign a single Unit to that position and assign subsequent arriving Units to fill out
the team as they arrive. In this case, the first Engine would usually lay one large
diameter hose to the forward position and a later arriving Engine would pump the line
and join the first Crew at the attack position.
Page 13 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
F. The decision could also be made by Command to make one key position attack with a
full attack team and leave less urgent positions for later arriving Units. This is a
strategic decision that must be made by Command.
III.
HOSELINES AND FIRE STREAMS
A. Standard attack lines are 1 ¾”, 2” or 2 ½” with smooth bore nozzles. The application
of a solid column of water from a smooth bore nozzle applied directly onto the seat of
the fire is optimal for fire suppression as well as limiting the disruption of the thermal
balance. Less thermal balance disruption provides the greatest chance for victim
survivability as well as increased success of VES.
B. Engine Officers have fog nozzles available to them to use in situations where
warranted, such as vapor dispersion, exposure protection, etc.
C. The following items must be considered for the effective use of hoselines:
1. Size
2. Placement
3. Speed
4. Mobility
5. Supply
D. These factors represent the options involved in fire stream management.
1. Hoselines should be advanced inside the fire building in order to control access to
halls, stairways, or other vertical and horizontal channels through which people
and fire may travel. Hoseline placement is a very critical task.
a. The first stream is placed between the fire and persons endangered by it.
b.
When no life is endangered, the first stream is placed between the fire and the
most severe exposure.
c. The second line is taken to back up the first line, confine the fire, and protect
the means of egress for occupants and firefighters. The exception would be
when placement is dictated by SOPs for the second line (always bear in mind
the presence of Crews opposite the second line).
d. Succeeding lines should be utilized to cover other critical areas.
Page 14 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
e. Position hoselines in a manner and direction that assists rescue activities,
supports confinement, and protects exposures.
E. It is the responsibility of each Engine Company to ensure an uninterrupted, adequate
supply of water.
F. Begin with the size of hoseline that will eventually be required. If a big line is
needed, provide it from the outset. If there is any question in the beginning, go to the
next larger size line. Pull the larger size line if there is any question concerning need.
Beware of automatically going for the size used most often or the size that is the
fastest/easiest. The tendency is to rely on one size of fire stream.
G. Choose the proper nozzle and stream for the task.
H. Have attack lines ready during forcible entry operations. Attack crews should be
fully protected and supervised before forcible entry is affected.
I. Effective offensive operations are referred to as aggressive, fast, forward, and
assertive. Offensive attack activities must be highly mobile. As their movement
slows down, they become more defensive in nature and effect.
J. Offensive attack positions should achieve an effect on the fire quickly. If
unsuccessful, back-up judgments should also be developed quickly. If you apply
water to an offensive attack position and the fire does not go out, back it up or move
on and reposition.
K. Company Officers must assume responsibility for the effectiveness of their fire
streams. These Officers must maintain an awareness of where fire streams are
directed and their effectiveness. Progress updates should be reported to their
Division/Group Leader or Command.
L. When the attack plan is changed from offensive to defensive, convert hand attack
lines to exterior master streams.
M. Beware of hoselines that have been operating in the same place for long periods. Fire
conditions change during the course of fire operations (most things will only burn for
a limited time) and the effect of hoseline operations must be continually evaluated.
Move, adjust or redeploy lines if the operation becomes ineffective.
N. Beware of the limitations of operating nozzles through holes. The mobility of such
streams is limited and it is generally difficult to evaluate the effectiveness of such
streams. Consider breaching walls, floors, etc. to operate in a more effective manner.
O. Consider that hoselines pump as much air as they pump water (particularly fog
streams). Think of them as fans. Use the fan characteristics in a manner that
provides for confinement and reduces loss. When entering basement fires, do not
Page 15 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
open nozzles until you can see and are near the fire. Do not use fog streams in
basement fires.
P. If you commit attack crews to inside operations, do not operate exterior streams into
the same building, particularly Tower nozzles. Do not combine interior and exterior
attacks in the same building. It may be necessary to coordinate pulling crews out of
the building while an exterior heavy stream knockdown is made. Many times
continuing operation of large streams prevents entry and complete extinguishment.
Q. Crews should not normally operate fire streams into smoke, unless heat or imminent
flashover conditions exist. Fire location must be determined before water can be
effectively applied.
R. Utilize large exterior streams when possible. Straight bore tips provide better
penetration for heavy streams.
S. The more pumped water, the higher the overall attack capability.
T. Do not apply water to the outside of a roof and think that the fire is being
extinguished. Such water applications may offer effective exposure protection, but, if
part of the roof is intact, it will shed water just like it was built to do, preventing water
from reaching the seat of the fire. This is particularly true of Tower nozzle
operations.
U. Do not operate fire streams down ventilation holes during an offensive operation.
IV.
WATER SUPPLY
A. A 4” hose is the standard supply hoseline. A four-way hydrant valve (Humat) is
connected to the hydrant with a 4” line extending from the valve to the attack Engine.
Engine Companies should easily be able to conduct a forward or reverse lay.
B. In cases dictated by SOP or when ordered by Command, Engines should lay a 4” and
a 3” line. This means Engine Companies should conduct a normal hook up of the
Humat valve and a 4” line to establish a water supply. A dry 3” hoseline should be
placed on the ground when leading out with the 4” line. When the demand for
increased flow arises, an Engine will pump the Humat and charge the 3” line.
V.
FULL HOOK UP
A. A “Full Hook Up” may be called for in cases where the maximum amount of water is
needed from a hydrant. This operation is conducted knowing there is a trade off of
time in order to obtain maximum flow. A “Full Hook Up” is when an Engine takes in
a 5” hoseline directly from the hydrant to the steamer port (remove intake
valve/AWG), and receives a 3” supply line from both 2-½” discharges of the hydrant
to both 2-½” intakes on the Engine.
Page 16 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
VI.
FIRE STREAMS (DEFENSIVE VS. OFFENSIVE)
A. Offensive fire stream operations combined with hoseline selection will have a
profound effect on the outcome of the situation. Offensive operations should be
fought from the unburned side utilizing a proper sized attack line.
1. The Company Officer must decide whether to pull a 1-¾” or a 2-½” attack line
for an aggressive interior attack on a commercial building with heavy smoke
and/or fire showing. If the Company Officer believes the fire is going to progress
to the point of becoming a defensive operation, pull a 2-½” line. A simple rule to
follow would be: “big fire” use “big water”. While a 1-¾” attack line offers
mobility, it may be ineffective in commercial fires with a large fire load. The 2½” line offers the appropriate gallons per minute and penetration to successfully
attack a commercial fire utilizing proper offensive fire stream operations.
2. The decision to pull a 2½” hoseline will require that the Company Officer
evaluate possible water supply options, depending on hydrant location (i.e. bring
in their own supply line). Units must proceed cautiously with interior operations
until a water supply is in place, due to the obvious concern involving the quick
depletion of tank water when utilizing the 2½” line.
B. The first priority with a defensive operation is to protect exposures. The second
priority is to knockdown the main body of fire. When an exposure is severely
endangered and water is limited, the most effective tactic is to put water on the
exposure. Write off property that is already lost and move on. Protect the exposed
property based on the most dangerous direction of fire spread.
1. DO NOT continue to operate in positions that are essentially lost. Company
Officers and Command must decide what application of fire stream in a defensive
operation will have the best outcome:
a. Large handlines.
b. Elevated master streams utilizing Tower-Ladder nozzles and/or Engine deck
guns.
c. Ground master streams utilizing Tower-Ladder nozzles.
d. Ground hugger master streams.
Note: It is recommended that smooth bore tips be used for penetration and G.P.M.
C. Command must accurately project set-up time, write off lost property and get ahead
of the fire and stop its forward progress. It takes a certain amount of time and water,
Page 17 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
while the fire continues to burn. If Command misjudges the fire, it may burn past the
attack/cutoff position.
VII.
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
A. A properly working system can give an advantage to the fire department by keeping
the fire from extending and becoming greater in intensity. This will often translate
into Firefighters‟ lives and property being saved.
B. Firefighters need to possess a working knowledge of sprinkler systems, standpipes
and valves. It is important to know how all these systems work together and how
they tie into the controlling alarm system, which supervises these systems as a whole.
C. In addition we must know how to differentiate between a single, split, and
combination system.
D. The F.D.C. (Fire Department Connection) inlet is used to supply a building‟s
protection system from a fire department pumper. These fire department connections
should be well marked by code at the inlet and should clearly state what type of
system is being supplied. Some multiple inlet connections in large buildings will
sometimes state which portion of the building they are supplying.
E. Two 3” lines connected into the system will reduce friction loss and provide a margin
of safety in the event one of the lines bursts. When supplying a fire protection
system, do not direct too much water away from the system, which may let the fire
extend. The Engineer supplying the system must be cognizant to maintain adequate
volume and pressure in the system, even while supplying attack lines and master
streams. The supply Engine should be connected by supply lines to a secondary
hydrant with careful monitoring of the compound gauge to ensure adequate water for
both the fire protection system and fire attack. A good rule of thumb for initial
supply of a fire protection system is 150 PSI at approximately 500 GPM.
F. It is well known that a fire can extend beyond a building‟s fire protection system. A
flash fire, where too many heads open, can hinder the initial water supply‟s
effectiveness for a building fire protection system. An explosion can also disable a
system. However, when a fire protection system is present and properly utilized in
coordination with good fireground tactics, the overall operation can be enhanced and
made safer for all involved.
Page 18 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
TRUCK COMPANY OPERATIONS
I.
OPERATIONAL PHILOSOPHY
A. The driving philosophy behind the Truck Company on the Orlando Fire Department
is life safety, fire mitigation, and property conservation, which is realized through the
correct employment of various techniques and tactics. Certain operations must be
performed simultaneously with the fire attack to ensure a coordinated operation and a
favorable outcome on the fireground.
B. The standard four-man Truck Company will typically operate as two-man teams.
There will be an “Inside Team” and an “Outside Team”. Each incident will dictate
how those teams should function.
1. The Inside Team will consist of the Officer and the right jump seat man. They
will concentrate their efforts on forcing entry opposite of the fire for the attack
team, assisting with locating the fire, performing a primary search from the fire
back towards the entry, ventilating, determining extension and then opening
hidden spaces.
2. The Outside Team will consist of the driver and the left jump seat man. They will
concentrate their efforts on venting the main body of fire from outside of the
structure and working back toward the point of entry through the utilization of
Vent-Enter-Search (VES), securing utilities (particularly gas and electric), making
a second point of entry, roof ventilation, laddering the structure, and performing
aerial operations when required.
C. Entry into a structure can be secured through unlocked entry points such as a door or
a window and through the use of force, utilizing specific tools. When forcible entry
is required, the most expeditious and least damaging means should be used.
Personnel should always remember the age old axiom “try before you pry”. Many
times quick thinking, good judgment, and training can more efficiently overcome an
obstacle, as opposed to using brute force.
D. Search and rescue can be broken down into two categories: the primary search and
the secondary search. Both should be performed in an efficient manner that takes into
account the safety of the personnel. Time is the critical factor in the primary search
process, which should be extended quickly during the initial fire stages.
Thoroughness is the critical factor in the secondary search, which should be
completed by personnel not involved in the primary search and after initial fire
control operations are completed.
E. Ventilation is achieved horizontally or vertically through the use of natural or forced
means. Horizontal ventilation is generally attained through the use of natural
openings already engineered into the structure, such as windows or doors and is the
most manpower efficient means of ventilation. Prompt action is a necessity for
Page 19 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
vertical ventilation, opening directly above the fire, and utilizing natural openings
when possible such as skylights or ventilators. Should the need arise to forcefully
ventilate a structure vertically, there should be no hesitation to cut the roof close to
the fire and push the ceiling down below.
F. Securing utilities is the responsibility of the Outside Team and should be completed
to ensure the safety of crews working inside the structure. Electrical utilities can be
controlled through individual breakers, main disconnects, or shunt trips. Gas and
water utilities can be controlled at the in-line service valves.
G. Laddering a structure is especially important when working on upper floors in order
to obtain a secondary means of entry and egress. This function can be accomplished
through the use of ground ladders or aerial apparatus. It is imperative that personnel
be aware of their surroundings, including number of floors, overhead obstructions,
power lines, and ground conditions, as each situation will dictate adaptation.
Furthermore, it is the responsibility of the Truck Company to effectively operate
elevated master streams when required by Command.
H. Property conservation can be realized through the proper management of salvage and
overhaul. Salvage operations can successfully prevent primary and secondary fire
damage, and keep property loss to a minimum. Proper overhaul operations can
completely eliminate the threat of rekindles. Personnel should utilize thermal
imaging and open hidden spaces during the fire and after the fire, to ensure fire stop.
I. Truck Companies are charged with the extrication of victims from buildings,
machinery, and vehicles. The goal is to extricate victims as rapidly as possible
without further endangering the victim or personnel. It is important for personnel to
stay informed on new manufacturing technology that could either assist or hinder a
rescue operation. OFD‟s basic operational philosophy for the Truck Company is to
search (for fire and life), and to control the fire building in a way that assists entry,
fire attack, overhaul and salvage.
II.
TRUCK COMPANY RESPONSIBILITIES – RESIDENTIAL DWELLING
A. Ventilation Guidelines
1.
Where it will be adequate and safe, horizontal ventilation utilizing natural
openings (doors, windows, exhaust fans, etc.) is the fastest and most manpower
efficient means of ventilation. When ventilating windows, all glass, screens,
curtains, and blinds must be removed to provide maximum air exchange.
2.
The “Outside Team” should determine the location of the fire and begin outside
venting at the main body of the fire, working their way back around toward the
point of entry made by the fire attack team. This should be a coordinated effort
with the Engine and Truck Company. This will allow the fire to vent, reducing
Page 20 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
extension and drawing fresh air in behind the fire attack team, making the
interior conditions more tenable for Firefighters and possible victims. In
addition, the “Outside Team” should utilize VES when necessary to retrieve
possible victims from life threatening situations.
B. Venting for Life
1.
Consider that there are really two kinds of venting available in this situation:
venting for life and venting for fire. The two are distinctly different. In venting
for life, we give up a little time and building for the chance to get to the victims
within a four minute goal.
2.
Remember that an Engine is on the scene with a charged attack line seeking out
the fire. Although roof ventilation could be indicated, roof venting is seldom
required for fire conditions in private dwellings and at least two Firefighters may
be tied up getting to, and opening the roof. Instead, use these two Firefighters
for a two-sided approach to reaching trapped occupants.
3.
The two-sided approach is based on an “Inside Team” and an “Outside Team”.
Both teams are committed to a concept called VES (vent-entry-search).
Remember, this is a commitment. If the first entrance is untenable, try every
other approach.
4.
The Outside Team has the primary VES opportunity because they can easily
identify bedroom windows and go for them.
C. Controlling Electrical Utilities
1.
Justification – To establish a uniform procedure for controlling utilities during
emergency situations.
2.
Procedure – responsibility of the Outside Team
a. Depending upon the type of occupancy, utilities control will be accomplished
by the following methods:
1)
Individual breakers
2)
Electrical main disconnect
3)
Shunt trips
b. Do not remove meters.
Page 21 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
c. The removal of electrical meter is not an acceptable method of controlling
power. The utility that provides service to the structure should be notified if
assistance is needed.
D. Controlling Gas/Water Utilities
1.
Procedure:
a. Individual Service
1) Gas/Water utilities should be controlled at the in-line service valves first
by hand or utilizing appropriate hand tools.
b. System Service
1) Secondary emergency service valves, zone valves, or shutting off the
meter should be accomplished when controlling an entire system.
2) Exterior utility – control is the responsibility of the Outside Team.
E. Special Problems
1. Open and unenclosed stairway. This is the major weakness from a firefighting
and fire protection standpoint. The second Engine Company must protect the
interior stairwell for means of egress and potential fire spread vertically through
the chimney effect.
2. Lack of secondary means of egress from upper floors.
3. Bedrooms are usually located on upper floors and bedroom doors may be nonexistent, removed, poorly fitted, or left open. For an obvious two family dwelling
(separate entrances, mail boxes, etc.), assume bedrooms on both floors.
4. Interior access to attic spaces is usually difficult or non-existent. Where access is
provided, it may be via a very narrow stair (straight ladder in a closet), scuttle
opening over the stair, in a bedroom closet, or a pull-down type stair.
F. Life Hazard
1. A rapid build-up of heat and smoke in the confined areas of a private dwelling
aided by the normally open interior doors is an extreme threat to the occupants.
2. A coordinated effort by the “Inside” and “Outside Teams” to search for and
remove all endangered occupants must be the primary consideration of all Truck
Company operations (especially on upper floors).
Page 22 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
3. In many areas of the city, buildings that were originally constructed as one and
two family dwellings have been converted into multiple dwellings or rooming
houses without appropriate safeguards. Additional families and “roomers” are
sometimes found living in attic spaces.
G. Inside Team (Officer, Right Jump)
1. Inside Team shall make their entry to the building via an entrance on the first floor
level and move to areas of probable life occupancy.
Note: This may not always be the front or rear doors; it could be a first floor
window requiring the use of an “A” Frame or Attic Ladder.
H. Officer
1. Directly supervise the Inside Team. Determine the location of the fire, control
ventilation, and direct search and rescue.
2. Coordination of activities will be accomplished with portable radios. When
outside operation is not necessary, notify members to prevent unnecessary
window damage.
I. Forcible Entry-Man (Truck, Right Jump)
1. Force main entrance to building. This usually presents no problem in private
dwellings, since the door and lock assembly are generally of light construction.
2. Forcing the main entrance provides access to the interior stairs (most of the time),
for the protection and control of this vital area.
3. If the main stair would not be endangered and the Engine Company extinguishes
the fire more readily from the side entrance, then it too could be used.
4. Conduct a search of the main fire floor and ventilate as directed.
J. Additional Consideration of the Inside Team
1. Aggressive leadership by the Officer is the most important factor in conducting
the inside attack.
2. The dominant consideration of the “Inside Team” is search and rescue of those
occupants who have a chance of survival if immediately removed. Therefore, if
the Officer and members of the “Inside Team” are met at the front door by fire,
they will not wait to advance in behind the line. Rather, they will seek other
means of access into those rooms not yet involved in fire.
Page 23 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
3. The time of the incident plays a key role in search operations. During sleeping
hours, a heavy emphasis must be placed on the bedroom search. Limited time is
spent on living room, dining room, and kitchen areas. Concentration must be on
first floor bedrooms (if any).
4. Ventilation of lower floor windows should not jeopardize those members
operating into upper stories via outside portable ladders. Do not ventilate a
window below a ladder.
K. Outside Team (Engineer, Left Jump)
1. The Outside Team will make every possible attempt to reach and locate victims
trapped by fire and assist inside crews with tenability, through VES, etc.
L. Truck Engineer (Driver)
1. Roof operations are generally not feasible during initial fire operations in private
dwellings. Therefore, the Truck Engineer can be used to assist in the VES effort
and shall be in charge of all Outside Team activities.
2. Raise a portable ladder to a window of the upper level. If possible, ladders should
be placed on as many sides as possible.
3. Perform V.E.S. of upper floor room(s) via selected window.
4. A proper operation at this window to carry out VES requires the complete
removal of glass, window sash, curtains, blinds, etc.
5. V.E.S. will be carried out at other strategic windows as required.
M. Truck Left Jump
1.
Firefighter will act on orders of the Engineer, and will survey the building while
the Engineer is donning his gear.
2.
Ladder placement should be at the window sill for all VES operations.
3.
When the Engineer enters a window from a portable ladder to search, he will butt
the ladder and otherwise assist as required.
4.
The ladder should be placed at the sill level, if the victim removal is necessary.
The “butt man” shall call for assistance to butt the ladder and climb to a point
where he can receive the victim and descend. Depending upon the size and
weight of the victim, he may need backup while descending the ladder.
Page 24 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
5.
If it is possible to butt the ladder (by some physical source) the “butt man” may
climb the ladder to the window height to assist the team member who can then
vocally direct the inside member back to the window area (if this becomes
necessary due to an exceptionally heavy smoke condition). Similarly, once the
room has been entered, the “butt man” might perform additional outside
ventilation as long as he is alert to assist the other member upon his return to the
window.
N. Additional Considerations of the Outside Team
1. Under light smoke and heat conditions, a completely interior operation may be
feasible. Any other conditions, however, require the utilization of ladders to
upper sleeping areas, and provide the following advantages:
a. A two-sided approach to any potential area of life occupancy on upper floors.
b. Members on ladders working in relatively “clean” air until actual entry into
rooms.
c. Proper positioning of ladders, based on knowledgeable outside size-up, and
assures putting members into bedrooms on the upper level. (Inside Team
attempts to locate rooms, doors, etc. is often more difficult due to heat, smoke,
and limited visibility.)
d. Members entering rooms via ladder normally will not be more than ten feet
(average room) from the ladder. Chances of getting disoriented or lost are
lessened.
2. Since possible attic occupancy must be considered by the “Outside Team”, visible
indications that attic spaces or upper levels are being utilized for living purposes
are:
a. Adequate height (approximately seven feet)
b. Dormers in attic areas
c. Windows of fair size and normal appearance
d. Screens and/or storm windows
e. Curtains, drapes, venetian blinds, etc.
f. Air conditioners at this level
g. Bells, mailboxes
Page 25 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
h. Fire escapes
O. Advantages of the System
1. The “Inside/Outside” Team operation targeted to VES procedures has several
advantages. Bedrooms are searched immediately, and ventilation is provided.
2. This operation should not be ordered for a pot on the stove, as it is easy to
understand the damage that would occur. But, if a residential rescue is needed,
this procedure represents a truly maximum effort by a limited number of
personnel.
3. As more personnel and apparatus arrive, they can supplement the VES operation
and cover every bedroom until the building is clear. If this procedure is used,
rescues will be accomplished that otherwise would not be made.
III.
TRUCK COMPANY CONSIDERATIONS/COMMERCIAL BUILDINGS
A. Truck Company placement at a commercial building fire is a critical factor that can
affect the final outcome of the fire. Upon arrival at the scene, Tower apparatus must
take the time to ensure a proper spot on the building. It is extremely important for the
initial arriving Companies to leave room for the Truck Company to position in the
correct location.
B. The effective placement of Tower apparatus at a commercial building fire depends on
a set of important objectives.
1. Rescue: When victims are present, life safety must take precedence over tactical
placement. Place the Tower apparatus to rescue the most severely threatened
victims first, the largest number next, and lastly the remaining victims in the fire
area.
2. Most severe exposure: Major fires that have become defensive with no chance of
saving the building or rescuing victims may be fought by concentrating aerial
streams on the most severe exposures, especially when water is in short supply.
3. Fire attack: Tower Trucks should spot where the scrub area of the bucket and
master streams can reach the fire area and the unburned areas for fire cutoff, even
at ground level. Tower streams are most effective when the seat of the fire can be
reached with a large GPM flow.
4. Ventilation: Upper floor windows, gable ends, cocklofts and dormers, along with
other construction features, can often be reached by the well-spotted Truck
Company when ground ladders are out of reach. Roof quadrants that need to be
Page 26 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
reached by Truck Companies should also figure into the placement of the
apparatus.
C. Aerial and all apparatus placement at any commercial building fire should consider
the potential of a wall collapse on the apparatus before their placement on the scene.
D. A general minimum distance of 30 feet from the building should be considered,
unless specific placement and tactics are warranted. Tower Trucks should try and
spot the apparatus with the front end swung out away from the building at an
approximate angle of 15 degrees. This swing-out, when it can be accomplished, will
give the Tower boom better access to first floor windows and doors at street level, by
enabling the bucket master streams to be placed directly in these and other openings
for fire knockdown.
E. Tower operations are more effective when the bucket is utilized off the rear of the
apparatus and minimizes the potential for crushing the cab with the Tower‟s boom
while operating over the cab at lower elevations.
F. Placing Tower apparatus at the corners of a commercial building provides a view of
two sides of the building and increases the effectiveness of the Tower‟s scrub area.
Building corners are generally stronger areas of a building that are not as susceptible
to collapse. However, this tactical advantage can be nullified if the Tower cannot
reach victims or cannot cut off the fire. Building corners should be a consideration,
but not become the main objective when spotting aerial apparatus. Many obstacles
such as trees, civilian, and fire department parking (among many other factors) can
often limit or dictate apparatus placement.
G. The single most hazardous obstacle to the Tower apparatus is overhead power lines.
All Tower setups shall require that the Truck Company crew check and look for
power lines before spotting their apparatus. All Tower setups shall require a
minimum distance of 10 feet away from all electrical and other utility lines prior to
any operation. The Tower apparatus can be thought of as one big, grounded,
lightening rod that can cause death and serious injury if the Tower boom were to
come into contact with any electrical or utility system that are common to all
commercial buildings. Caution needs to be employed while operating near these
electrical systems due to the conduciveness of electricity through the overspray and
mist from fire department nozzles that are flowing water. NEVER operate Tower
master streams through electrical wire.
H. It is a good rule of thumb not to operate, set up, or train with the Tower when
lightening can be seen, even when it is some distance away. Emergency operation at
a fire or other emergency scene may be required, however, the Incident Commander
must use strict caution before committing any Truck Company during a thunderstorm.
Page 27 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
IV.
COMMERCIAL ROOF OPERATIONS
A. Conducting roof operations at a significant commercial building fire is a very
dangerous task. Good commercial roof operations begin with the building being
divided into four equal quadrants that are universally geographic and understood by
all operating Units.
B. This geographic quadrant system, as related to the building, ensures the proper
communication and coordination between Command and the Truck Company
assigned to ventilate the roof.
C. Upon arrival, Command shall determine which side of the building will become Side
Alpha as outlined in the Command Section.
1. Approaching the roof area
a. Check roof area for obvious signs of fire and structural damage from fire.
b. Determine the quadrant location of the fire.
c. Look for the building‟s natural openings and similar features.
d. NEVER place only one rail of the aerial on the parapet or the roofline, which
may result in ladder failure.
e. Spot the bucket perpendicular to the parapet or the roofline when possible.
2. Rooftop Operations
a. Sound the roof prior to exiting the bucket to ensure stability.
b. NEVER walk over an open roof area weakened by fire.
c. Follow the edge of the roof or parapet to reach the quadrant to be vented.
d. Approach the vent area slowly utilizing inspection cuts to determine the fire
location.
e. Upon locating the seat of the fire, move away approximately 10 feet and vent
over the stable area.
f. Coordinate the roof ventilation with interior Units and Command.
g. After ventilation opening is made, GET OFF THE ROOF!
Page 28 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
Note: Due to inherent dangers involved in conducting roof operations, it is imperative
that crews avoid performing vertical ventilation on structures that utilize truss
construction that is prone to early failure under fire conditions, (i.e. bow string
truss, light weight wood, light weight steel truss).
V.
NATURAL AND HORIZONTAL VENTILATION/COMMERCIAL
A. Natural and horizontal ventilation is thought of in many cases as second only to
directing streams on a fire. Proper ventilation has a direct bearing on the spread and
tenability of the fire. Significant commercial building fires should be vented at the
roof first.
B. Horizontal ventilation done prior to a natural vent or a good roof cut can cause rapid
spread and extreme intensification of the fire throughout the structure.
C. A coordinated effort between natural and horizontal ventilation will reduce
mushrooming and will improve visibility and tenability in the structure.
D. Under no circumstances should forced ventilation with power fans or other
mechanical devices be introduced until the fire has been knocked down and declared
under control.
E. The term “natural opening” refers to built in features such as skylights, ventilators,
stairwell shafts, etc. They should be utilized first, provided they are in the correct
area to be ventilated.
1. Truck Company crews should learn which natural openings vent what area. For
instance, skylights vent the building‟s main interior spaces, while turbine type
ventilators generally vent the attic space and cockloft area where large void
spaces can be found. Dome type ventilators, many times, vent only the heat
producing areas of a building, such as the kitchen and the laundry areas. Stairwell
skylight shafts should be ventilated quickly to control an interior means of egress
for both victims and Firefighters.
2. It is usually easier to open the building‟s natural features made of wood and
flashing, rather than making a cut through heavy roof decking. In order to have a
positive effect, the size of the natural opening will need to be sufficient enough to
move the volume of heat and smoke present.
F. Horizontal ventilation generally offers the most air movement throughout a building.
It should begin at the main body of the fire so as not to draw it to the unburned side
and in coordination with charged hoselines in place. Timing of horizontal ventilation
is critical to the overall success of the operation and should be done in conjunction
with vertical ventilation within the proper stage of the operation.
Page 29 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
VI.
FORCIBLE ENTRY/COMMERCIAL
A. Forcible entry at a commercial building fire begins at the preplan stage. It is
imperative that all Companies, in particular the Truck Company, identify and recon
those buildings that present a major forcible entry problem. Obstacles faced will vary
from occupancy, construction, and levels of security protecting the structure.
Supermarkets and strip centers usually have front entry doors of glass, with limited or
no windows and heavy steel doors in the rear. These observations made prior to
arrival should be added to all existing and future pre-fire plans. Forcible entry may
sometimes be avoided altogether when a building master key system is set up ahead
of time and properly utilized from a secured Knox Box. This can translate into speed
and energy reserved for where it may be needed later.
B. Initial entry is most often made through a doorway, yet a window is generally easier
to force than a door. Quick thinking and good judgment, (along with practiced skill),
can many times better overcome an obstacle rather than merely using brute force. For
instance, when a window is forced and a Firefighter enters, unlocking a door that may
be heavily re-enforced, such as a steel door (commonly found in the rear of
commercial stores) is more practical. This will enable the initial attack line to enter
the building through the doorway faster, using less energy.
1. Understanding what type of door is present and how it is locked and hung are
basic principles of forcible entry that can be applied at all fires.
2. Identifying commonalities that are associated with certain types of occupancies
can aid in the decisions of what tools and tactics need to be employed.
C. The age-old axiom, “try before you pry”, still applies. Victim rescue cannot be
totally dismissed at a commercial fire. Cleaning crews, employees working late, and
security guards can account for victims in what may seem like an unoccupied
building. Quick entry by the most expeditious means is justified at any working fire.
In summary, forcible entry at a commercial building fire will affect possible victims,
Firefighter safety, hoseline advancement, and the overall outcome of the fire.
VII.
UTILITY CONTROL/COMMERCIAL
A. Utilities in commercial properties pose several difficulties such as location, different
meters for each business, and the danger when attempting to shut off.
B. New buildings now have shunts for controlling power to the entire building.
C. Older commercial properties in the City have no shunts and require that fire
department personnel secure utilities by manual shutoff.
1. When attempting to shut off commercial power via pull down levers or breakers,
always shield the face area.
Page 30 of 31
TACTICAL PLANNING
2. Personnel should utilize manual pull arms or breakers for securing the power
source. NEVER REMOVE ANY COMMERCIAL METER
3. Utilize electrical shunts as a last priority.
Note: Shunted electrical power is sometimes not easily restored.
D. If you are unable to secure power, notify Command immediately for proper utility
company response.
E. Many commercial buildings have back-up generator power that will need to be shut
down to ensure complete electrical utility control.
Page 31 of 31
DIVIDER
4. TACTICAL OPERATIONS
HOUSE FIRES (1& 2 STORY), DUPLEX, TRIPLEX
I.
INTRODUCTION
One and two story, single and multiple family dwellings comprise a large percentage of
the structures that OFD will encounter on fire incidents. Many of these dwellings do not
possess the fire safety devices that are commonly found in a commercial building,
therefore, it is imperative that clear and effective standard operating procedures are
utilized to provide occupants with the greatest likelihood of survival and property
conservation.
II.
UNIT OBJECTIVES
A. First Engine
1. Size-up and make an accurate arrival report.
2. Officer should attempt to get a 360 degree view of the building.
3. Stretch appropriate hoseline (size/length) to the main body of fire.
Page 1 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
4. Fourth man will normally be the “control man” who assists with the hoseline
advancement. In cases where an Engine routinely arrives alone, the fourth man
may be required to force entry and do a primary vent of the fire room.
5. Make an inspection hole in ceiling upon entry, as warranted.
6. Initiate an aggressive interior attack.
7. Evaluate the extent of life safety hazards.
8. Ensure that a water supply is established.
B. Second Engine
1. Establish a water supply from the hydrant to the attack pumper. This will typically
be one 4-inch supply line. Large dwellings may require a 4-inch and 3-inch
supply line (3 inches to be supplied when hydrant is pumped).
2. Stretch a second hoseline to back up the first attack line and/or confine the fire.
3. Assist with occupant removal.
4. Complete specific tasks ordered by Command.
5. Take over tasks not performed when first-in crews recover victims and are
committed to medical aid.
C. Third Engine
1. Stage at a secondary water supply and remain uncommitted until directed by
Command.
2. Crew may be utilized to establish the suppression component of RIT.
3. Command may have this crew proactively stretch a hoseline to be pre-positioned
for use.
4. This Engine should consider approaching from the opposite direction of travel as
the first supply line.
D. First Truck Outside Team
1. Vent fire area.
2. Secure utilities – electric and gas.
Page 2 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
3. Check and report conditions at rear of fire building.
4. Gain secondary points of entry and egress.
5. Vent and search.
6. Remove occupants.
7. Render medical aid.
8. Provide lighting.
9. Provide mechanical ventilation.
10. Perform salvage and overhaul.
11. Ladder, if necessary.
E. First Truck Inside Team
1. Provide forcible entry.
2. Perform inside vent and search.
3. Remove occupants.
4. Render medical aid.
5. Provide access to concealed areas to expose hidden fire in walls, ceilings, soffits,
voids, etc.
6. Provide salvage and overhaul.
F. First Rescue
1. Acknowledge a two-out position if arriving before RIT is established.
2. Remain together as a team.
3. Force entry, vent fire area, control utilities, gain secondary egress and report rear
conditions until the establishment of a RIT.
4. Assume a “Ready Rescue” designation after establishment of the RIT.
Page 3 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
G. Heavy Rescue
1. Recon building and provide a report of the perimeter.
2. Assume proactive RIT (i.e., familiarization with operating interior Company
locations, building layout, confirmation of secondary egress and identification of
other hazards).
3. Confirm utilities have been controlled.
4. Ensure a secondary means of egress has been established.
5. Stage equipment and personnel near the Command Post or at strategic locations
around the perimeter of the fire building and remain a resource to Command
while acting as the RIT.
6. Command should consider utilizing as a Truck Company if arriving prior to any
other Truck Company.
H. First District
1. Incident Command
I. Second District
1. Safety Officer
Page 4 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
TOOL ASSIGNMENTS
ASSIGNMENT
OFFICER
DRIVER
RIGHT JUMP
LEFT JUMP
TOOLS
POSITION
Radio, 4‟ Hook Light,
Thermal Imager
Radio, 6‟ Hook
30” Halligan, Light
16‟ or 18‟ Ladder
Halligan, Flathead Axe,
6‟ Hook, Radio Light
Sledge, 6‟ Hook, Radio,
Light
16‟ or 18‟ Ladder
DRIVER
Radio, 6‟ Hook,
Sledge, Light
RIGHT SEAT
Radio, Axe, 6‟ Hook
30” Halligan, Light
Truck Company
Inside Team/
Door to fire
Outside Team/
Inside Team/
Door to fire
Outside Team/
Exterior of fire
Rescue Company
Outside Team/
Exterior of fire
Outside Team
Exterior of fire
Page 5 of 39
FIRST DUE
Supervise and assist, force entry,
search, vent, locate fire.
Open gable if fire is of any
consequence; if not, assist left jump.
Force entry, search, vent, locate fire.
Vent fire area first, secure utilities,
assist driver, gain secondary entry
to floor above fire.
Acknowledge two out, back side
report, force entry, vent, secure
utilities, secondary egress, Assume
“Ready Rescue” after RIT is
established.
Acknowledge two out, backside
report, force entry, vent, secure
utilities, secondary egress. Assume
“Ready Rescue” after RIT is
established.
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
GARDEN APARTMENT FIRES
I.
INTRODUCTION
A. Garden Apartments comprise a large portion of the dwellings in sections of the city.
This procedure will point out the construction features of these buildings, the special
problems they present under fire conditions, and will establish acceptable methods of
fire operations and recommended precautions that must be taken.
B. The term “garden apartment” includes all multi-family, low-rise combustible
dwellings of one to four stories, usually containing four to twelve or more units per
building. “Gardens” generally have poor access for incoming units, along with highdensity construction. This allows rapid building-to-building fire spread. The common
feature of all “gardens” is lightweight construction. A good generality is “the newer
the building, the lighter the construction.” In addition, fire stopping in the attic spaces
of most garden apartments is inadequate to control the spread of fire throughout.
Note: In areas of the SOP, it references the long/short end of the building. The long
end of the building can be defined as the largest remaining area from the fire to the
opposite end of the building. The short end of the building can be defined as smallest
area from the fire to the end of the building.
II.
UNIT OBJECTIVES
A. First Engine
1. Size up and make an accurate arrival report.
Page 6 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
2. Stretch appropriate hoseline (size/length).
3. Initiate aggressive interior attack, normally at the main entrance of the apartment
(this also protects the means of egress for other occupants).
4. Evaluate the extent of life safety hazards.
5. First arriving Engineer shall be prepared to supply the first arriving Tower, if
needed.
B. Second Engine
1. Lay a 4-inch and 3-inch supply line for attacking Engine (if possible, have
Engineer assume role of pumping Humat).
2. If defensive operations have been requested by Command, the Engineer of the
second Engine will assist with establishing supply lines from the first Engine to
the first Tower.
3. The top floor attic space, usually the next apartment over, on the “long” end of the
building, is normally the most severe exposure. This, along with other hidden
voids (floor spaces and walls) in that apartment, should be covered by the second
1-3/4 inch or greater attack line.
C. Third Engine
1. Prior to entering the complex, notify Command that you are the third Engine
standing by to pump the Humat or obtain a secondary water supply at Command‟s
direction. The crew can be assigned elsewhere, but the Engineer and the apparatus
should remain ready at this hydrant until assigned a different task by the Incident
Commander.
2. The top floor attic space, usually the next apartment over, on the “short” end of
the building, is normally the second most severe exposure. This, along with other
hidden voids (floor spaces and walls) in that apartment, should be covered by the
third 1-3/4 inch or greater attack line.
D. Fourth Engine
1. Prior to entering the complex, stage and notify Command that you are fourth
Engine ready to stand by the secondary hydrant at Command‟s direction.
Page 7 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
2. Upon request by Command, the fourth Engine shall lay a 4-inch and 3-inch
supply line to itself and/or the second Truck Company.
Due to the possible congestion of a typical apartment complex, all Engine
Company Officers should strongly consider conducting a reverse lay when
appropriate.
E. First Truck
1. Spot Truck in a position to cut off the “long” end of the building, or most serious
exposure.
2. Inside Team (Officer and Right Jump)
a. Utilize local alarm for evacuation if equipped.
b. Provide access, force entry door for attack team.
c. Search for occupants in tenable areas and secure an “all clear” for the fire
apartment.
d. Relay an “all clear” (four-minute goal).
e. Determine the location and the extent of the fire, and relay the findings to
Command.
f. Provide support for Engine Company operations (i.e., opening all walls,
ceilings, lighting, and vent as you go with hoselines in place).
3. Outside Team (Driver and Left Jump)
a. Check all exterior sides for victims and fire travel, and relay this information
to Command.
b. Perform a primary vent.
c. No roof operations (normally the apartment will vent itself). Advise
Command of the type of roof decking (i.e., tile, metal, shingle).
d. Give a backside report to Command.
e. The outside team shall ladder the front and the rear of the second and third
floors for secondary means of escape and VES. Perform VES of the most
endangered apartments, over the fire first. Statistics have shown that the
apartment above the fire has the highest loss of life experience, other than the
fire apartment itself. The sides may also be laddered for VES or escape.
Page 8 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
f. Secure an “all clear” on all apartments as they are searched.
g. Evacuate endangered apartments.
h. Determine if there is extension, and relay it to Command.
i. Control utilities by turning off switches on power panels and gas cut-offs.
F. Second Truck
1. Spot the Truck to cut off the “short” end of the building or the most serious
exposure.
2. Inside Team (Officer and Right Jump)
a. Conduct a primary search of the most endangered apartments. This will
typically be the apartment above the fire and then the uppermost apartments
on the highest floor. If the fire apartment is the uppermost apartment, the
adjacent apartments will be searched first and then continue down to the first
floor.
b. Open up the ceilings to the attic space on the long end of the building with the
second Engine Company, to assist in stopping the fire spread. Make all of the
necessary openings (drywall is cheap). A hoseline must be in place prior to
opening up. Start as close to fire area as possible.
c. Assist the Inside Team with evacuation and search of the remaining
apartments.
d. Check the adjacent apartments.
3. Outside Team (Driver and Left Jump)
a. Assist in remaining search and rescue to secure an “all clear.”
b. Open up for the third Engine at the short end attic space.
c. Open up the gable at the short end of the structure.
d. Assist with the remaining fire control.
e. Salvage and overhaul
Page 9 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
G. First Rescue
1. Acknowledge a two-out position if arriving before RIT is established.
2. Remain together as a team.
3. Give a backside report, force entry, vent fire area, control utilities, and gain
secondary egress until the establishment of a RIT.
4. Assume “Ready Rescue” designation after the establishment of the RIT.
H. Heavy Rescue
1. Spot apparatus in a strategic location and view the fire building.
2. Determine the location of fire, extent, and the type of occupancy involved.
3. Unless otherwise directed by Command, initiate proactive RIT duties and recon
the exterior of the fire building and adjacent occupancies.
4. Determine any special hazards associated with the fire building and adjacent
properties.
5. Determine alternate and additional means of egress.
6. Stage personnel and equipment in positions around the fire building to facilitate
RIT duties as directed by Command.
7. Provide resource as a primary rescue team for injured or incapacitated Firefighters
in the event of a Mayday or other emergency situation.
8. Command should consider utilizing as a Truck Company if arriving before the
first Truck Company.
I. Additional Units
1. Additional Companies, prior to entering the complex, shall stage and notify
Command of their arrival.
J. First District
1. Incident Commander
K. Second District
1. Safety Officer
Page 10 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
III.
HAZARDS OF THESE BUILDINGS
A. Life
1. The life hazard is great, due to the large number of occupants and the rapid way in
which the fire may spread. Loss of life may occur within the building as a result
of the occupant‟s incapacity to escape or the inaccessibility of normal means of
escape. Smoke will spread far beyond the immediate fire area, necessitating
checks in all units of the building, with priority given to the units above the fire.
B. Construction
1. The greatest danger in garden apartment fires is how fast they can go from the
typical kitchen or bedroom fire to a whole building involved and exposing others.
Always assume that the whole building is on fire, even if only one room or unit is
showing. We should proactively assume involvement of the whole building in
order to stay ahead of one of these situations.
2. Fire can spread very rapidly in hidden voids prior to detection. The garden
apartment is one of the types of buildings in which the 20-minute rule gives a
false sense of security. To quote Frank Brannigan, “all the fat has been removed
from these buildings.” The fire is quickly eating away at your working platforms,
such as ceilings and floors. The major defects in construction include the lack of
fire stopping, which creates large unchecked voids, a vast quantity of combustible
construction materials, and the likelihood of early collapse due to lightweight
construction. Fire can spread in various ways.
a. Vertically
1) First or second floor windows directly to attic via ventilated soffit
2) Plumbing and wiring shafts
3) Vent shafts
4) Fireplace enclosures
5) Window to window and balcony to balcony
6) Stairwells
7) Via siding
8) Interior and exterior walls and partitions
9) Behind stucco façade
Page 11 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
b. Horizontally
1) Entire building due to common cockloft
2) Common cornice or soffit
3) Between floors via floor cockloft
4) Flimsy walls between buildings present little or no stoppage to fire spread
5) Via wood and vinyl sidings
6) Windows and balconies
C. Collapse
1. The construction in these buildings is such that collapse is possible and imminent.
A fire of any consequence has already started attacking the structural integrity of
the building. Roofs and floors are dangerous working platforms. Continuous
safety evaluations must be made!
2. A partial collapse can be as hazardous as a full collapse. When working in or
around these buildings, you must be mindful of veneered surfaces, such as stucco
or brick. A few hundred pounds of concrete or brick falling will hurt you as much
as an entire building.
Page 12 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
TOOL ASSIGNMENTS
Assignment
Tools
Position
First Due
Truck Company
Officer
Light, Radio,
Inside
Supervise and assist forcible entry, search, vent, pull
Hook,
Team/Fire
ceilings, determine extension. Keep units above the
Thermal
Floor
fire and Command informed of conditions and
Imager
Right Jump
progress.
Light,
Inside
Force entry, search, vent, open concealed spaces,
Halligan,
Team/Fire
such as walls, ceilings, voids, etc., as needed to
Radio, Axe,
Floor
expose hidden fire.
6‟Hook
Left Jump
Driver
Light, Sledge, Outside
Outside vent, gain secondary entry, search above fire
6‟- 12‟ Hook,
Team/Floor
floor, utility control
Radio
above fire
Light, Radio,
Outside
Outside vent, gain secondary entry, search above fire
6‟ Hook,
Team/Floor
floor, utility control, determine need for fire cut off.
Halligan
above fire
Charged lines present. Do not place personnel on
roofs of lightweight truss construction. Keep
Command informed, open up attic at long end with
2nd Engine Company.
Rescue Company
Driver
Right Seat
Radio, Light,
Outside Team/
Acknowledge two-out, back side report, force entry,
6-12‟ Hook,
vent, secure utilities, secondary egress. Assume “Ready
Sledge
Rescue” after RIT established.
Halligan,
Outside Team
Acknowledge two-out, back side report, force entry,
Axe, Light,
vent, secure utilities, secondary egress. Assume
Radio, 6‟
“Ready Rescue” after RIT established.
Hook
Page 13 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
COMMERCIAL BUILDING FIRES
I.
INTRODUCTION
A. Commercial buildings present a wide range of uses, occupancies, and construction
types. They can include anything from a school, church, strip mall, or large open
warehouse (along with many other examples). Construction features will often dictate
different tactical approaches; such as buildings with a common cockloft, basement, or
roof features.
B. Commercial buildings will often pose obstacles that can hinder forcible entry, limit
access, and can easily overtax initial arriving Companies. Every area within the City
contains commercial buildings and it is very important that crews familiarize
themselves with these structures in their respective areas.
C. A specific SOP for each type of commercial building would be impractical and
confusing. However, with a general overview of the commercial structure, along with
targeted guidelines, an effective and organized approach can be brought to the
commercial building fire.
II.
UNIT OBJECTIVES
A. First Engine
1. Size up building and determine occupancy (time of day), construction type,
conditions found, exposures, location, and extend of the fire spread.
2. Determine the need for additional resources and call for as needed.
3. Spot apparatus in a strategic location (best advantage) to reach and cut off the fire.
Page 14 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
4. Leave room for Truck Company spotting and consider a possible collapse zone.
5. Determine the proper hoseline and placement to control the fire presented
(consider need for master streams and additional attack line support). Pull the
initial attack line and/or initiate master stream operations at the main body of the
fire.
6. Control stairways for egress.
7. Establish a continuous water supply from the second Engine Company.
8. The first arriving Engineer shall be prepared to supply the first arriving Tower, if
needed.
B. Second Engine
1. Lay one 4-inch and one 3-inch supply line to the initial arriving Engine Company
from the primary hydrant. Return to the hydrant and pump the humat. A reverse
lay should be considered where practical.
2. If defensive operations have been requested by Command, the second Engine will
assist with establishing supply lines from the first Engine to the first Tower.
3. Pull a secondary attack line off the first Engine Company to back up the initial
attack line and contain the fire.
4. In cases of commercial “strip malls or plazas,” tactical considerations should
address cutting off the fire and the protection of the long and short ends of the
building. In this case, the attic space on the long end of the building is normally
the most severe exposure and should be covered by the second attack line. The
second Engine shall pull a second 1-3/4 inch or greater attack line between fire
and long end of building, usually the next business over, to prevent extension in
hidden voids (attic, floor spaces, or walls).
C. Third Engine
1. Secure a secondary hydrant and lay one 4-inch and one 3-inch supply line into
itself. The apparatus shall spot in a strategic location near the fire department
connection that supplies the building‟s sprinkler and standpipe system, if the
building is so equipped. Two 3-inch lines shall be connected to the system and
Command notified, who will then make the decision to charge the system.
2. If defensive operations have been called by Command, the third Engine will assist
in establishing supply lines to the second arriving Truck Company.
Page 15 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
3. Coordinate further assignments with Command.
4. In cases of commercial “strip malls or plazas,” tactical considerations should
address cutting off the fire and protection of the long and short ends of the
building. In this case, the attic space on the short end of the building should be
covered by the third attack line. The third Engine shall pull a third 1-3/4 inch or
greater attack line between the fire and short end of the building, usually the next
business over to prevent extension in hidden voids (attic, floor spaces, or walls).
D. Fourth Engine
1. Dispatched on a second alarm.
2. Prior to entering the complex or committing to the scene, stage and notify
Command that you are the fourth Engine and will be standing by until directed by
Command.
3. The fourth Engine may be utilized as a RIT Engine, to pump the hydrant, to
deploy a ground hugger, or other tasks directed by Command.
E. First Truck
1. Size up the building and determine the occupancy, the construction type, the
conditions found, and the direction and the extent of the fire spread.
2. View the fire building and determine the appropriate area to spot the apparatus in
the front of the building or to the best advantage.
3. Spot the apparatus strategically in the best position for rescue, roof operations,
and/or offensive modes of attack.
4. In cases of commercial “strip malls or plazas,” tactical considerations should
address cutting off the fire and protection of the long and short ends of the
building. In this case, the first Truck should spot the apparatus in the front of the
building, or to its best advantage strategically for rescue, roof operations, and in
preparation to cut off the fire from extending in the long end of the building. This
would include being able to use the bucket nozzles at ground level to flow water
into the different areas of the building.
5. Set up the aerial and proceed to the roof area with Outside Team members who
will give a report on roof conditions to Command. Outside Team members shall
conduct roof operations, providing the area is stable, and coordinate the roof
ventilation with Command and interior units. The area should be vacated
immediately following the completion of all roof operations.
Page 16 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
6. Establish a primary means of egress, initiate VES, utilize forcible entry, remove
obstructions, and ladder upper areas as needed to provide egress.
7. Be responsible for the primary search. Locate and remove victims from the
structure.
8. Coordinate all Truck Company efforts with the interior crews and Command.
Report to Command the results of the primary search, along with conditions
found and progress made.
F. Second Truck
1. View the fire building and determine the appropriate area to spot the apparatus in
the rear of the building or opposite side of fire attack. Some commercial buildings
have limited access in the rear. Use caution when spotting apparatus.
2. Spot the apparatus strategically in the best position for rescue, roof operations,
and/or offensive/defensive modes of attack.
3. In cases of commercial “strip malls or plazas,” tactical considerations should
address cutting off the fire and protection of the long and short ends of the
building. In this case, the second Truck should spot the apparatus in the rear of the
building or to its best advantage strategically for rescue, roof operations, and in
preparation to cut off the fire from extending in the short end of the building. This
would include being able to use the bucket nozzles at ground level to flow water
into the different suites of the building.
4. Give a backside report to Command upon arrival of conditions found and actions
being taken. A secondary means of egress shall be established in the primary fire
building and adjacent occupancies.
5. Proceed to the roof area with the Outside Team after advising Command and
augment the first arriving Truck Company with roof operations. If additional
assistance is not needed on the roof area, the Outside Team shall augment Inside
Team operations.
6. Utilize forcible entry, remove obstructions and ladder upper areas as needed to
provide a means of egress.
7. Establish VES in all secondary areas of the fire building and adjacent
occupancies.
8. Coordinate ventilation and Truck Company operations with Command and
interior units.
Page 17 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
G. First Rescue
1. Acknowledge a two-out position if arriving before RIT is established.
2. Remain together as a team.
3. Give backside report, force entry, vent fire area, control utilities, and gain
secondary egress until establishment of a RIT.
4. Assume “Ready Rescue” designation after establishment of the RIT.
H. Heavy Rescue
1. Spot apparatus in a strategic location and view the fire building.
2. Determine the location of fire, extent, and the type of occupancy involved.
3. Unless otherwise directed by Command, initiate proactive RIT duties and recon
the exterior of the fire building and adjacent occupancies.
4. Determine any special hazards associated with the fire building and adjacent
properties.
5. Determine alternate and additional means of egress.
6. Stage personnel and equipment in positions around the fire building to facilitate
RIT duties as directed by Command.
7. Provide resource as a primary rescue team for injured or incapacitated Firefighters
in the event of a Mayday or other emergency situation.
8. Command should consider utilizing as a Truck Company if arriving before the
first Truck Company.
I. First District
1. Incident Commander
J. Second District
1. Safety Officer
Page 18 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
TOOL ASSIGNMENTS
Assignment
Tools
Position
First Due
Truck Company
Officer
Right Jump
Left Jump
Radio, Hook,
Inside
Supervise and assist forcible entry, perform primary
Thermal
team/door to
search, vent, locate fire.
Imager
fire
Halligan,
Inside
Force entry, perform primary search, vent, and locate
Radio, Axe,
team/door to
fire.
6‟Hook
fire
Sledge,
Outside
Assist driver in aerial setup. Load bucket with saws,
6‟Hook,
team/roof
hand tools. Perform primary vertical vent.
Radio, 6‟
Outside
Report condition of roof, exposures, volume of fire,
hook,
team/roof
and when roof cut begins. Perform primary vertical
Radio
Driver
Halligan
vent.
Rescue Company
Driver
6‟ Hook,
Rear of
Acknowledge two-out, back side report, force entry,
sledge, radio,
building,
vent, secure utilities, secondary egress. Assume “Ready
hand tools
outside team -
Rescue” after RIT established.
exterior of fire
Right Seat
Halligan, axe,
Rear of
Acknowledge two-out, back side report, force entry,
radio, 6‟
building,
vent, secure utilities, secondary egress. Assume “Ready
hook, hand
outside team –
Rescue” after RIT established.
tools
exterior of fire
Page 19 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
HIGHRISE FIRES
I.
INTRODUCTION
Highrise buildings account for some of the most complex structures that will be faced
when dealing with fire situations. The actions of the first arriving Companies will have a
great impact on the success or failure of this particular operation. The value of preplanning and company surveys cannot be overstated. However, when faced with the
prospect of an unknown fire situation, the following guidelines will provide the most
effective and efficient means to controlling and mitigating the incident.
II.
UNIT OBJECTIVES (All Units exercise a 200 foot safety perimeter around building)
A. First Engine
1. Size up building, determine occupancy (time of day) and conditions found.
2. Determine the need for additional resources and call for as needed.
3. First arriving Engineer will establish Lobby Control. Lobby Control
responsibilities include:
a. Identify Fire Command Room and give a fire panel report to Command with
regard to:
Page 20 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
1) Fire floor location and quadrant
2) Status of elevator(s)
3) Evacuation procedures implemented
4) Shut down HVAC (if readily available to Lobby Group area)
5) Obtain the building master/elevator keys from the Knox box (have attic
ladder ready for Knox Box access).
6) Activate the Fireman Feature on all elevators.
7) Give building master elevator keys to all initial and secondary arriving
Companies as available.
Note: utilize enunciator panel if Fire Command Room is remotely located.
4. Company Officer and Firefighters
a. Identify stairwells (evacuation/attack). Report the geographic/quadrant
location of stairwells to Command.
b. Determine the status of the elevators. Check the elevator shaft for fire
impingement.
c. Form the initial attack team with the first Truck Company.
d. Proceed with highrise hose packs, appliance/tool bag and other assigned
highrise equipment to two floors below the fire floor utilizing designated
elevator in fireman feature mode. Do not crowd or overload the elevator(s).
e. Establish a Resource area and place extra air cylinders there.
f. Proceed to the fire floor via the attack stairwell.
g. Report to Command prior to leaving the Lobby Area:
1) The designated elevator the initial attack team is using.
2) The floor number the initial attack team is proceeding to.
h. Upon arrival at the fire floor:
1) Report correct fire floor location and quadrant to Command.
Page 21 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
2) Report heat and smoke conditions on fire floor.
3) Report life hazard on the fire floor and initiate a primary search.
4) Select the best standpipe outlet for fire attack and stretch/operate attack
line to the best advantage until the secondary backup line arrives. Due to
HVAC and Stack Effect, smoke can permeate the entire building and
cause confusion as to the specific fire floor.
B. Second Engine
1. Engineer
a. Establish water supply. Lay into the building‟s sprinkler/standpipe system and
advise Command.
b. Try to spot the pumper with the pump panel away from building, at the corner,
if possible, to keep out of the way of falling debris and glass.
c. A minimum of two 3-inch discharge lines shall be used to make the
connection to the FDC.
d. Give a report of building‟s exterior.
2. Lieutenant: Assume “Building Control.”
a. Find the Building Engineer and become the liaison to the Building Engineer.
b. Check Fire Control Room/main fire alarm panel (often this is not near the
lobby) and give report to Command.
c. Check the fire pump.
d. Determine the status of elevator(s) and report it to Command.
e. Shut down HVAC initially. Determine if the HVAC system can be used to
remove smoke and supply fresh air to the affected areas and advise Command.
f. Perform visual reconnaissance of the exterior of the building to look for
persons in distress and give a backside report of the building to Command.
g. Coordinate activities with Lobby Control Group to ensure all building
functions are under OFD Control.
Page 22 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
3. Firefighters: After the determination has been made by Command to operate in
either an Elevator or Stairway Mode, the Firefighters will become elevator
operators or assist in stairwell support.
a. Elevator operators will get elevator keys and operate elevators to shuttle other
Firefighters and equipment to two floors below the fire. They will remain in
their elevator and perform this task for the duration of the alarm.
b. Stairwell support to assist with equipment moves.
C. Third Engine
1. Report to Lobby Control and obtain the building master and elevator keys.
2. The third arriving Engine Company Officer shall determine as much information
as possible with regard to:
a. Fire floor – quadrant location and extent of the fire
b. Evacuation procedures implemented
c. Identify attack/evacuation stairwells
d. Status of elevators – check elevator shaft way for the impingement
3. Proceed with highrise hose packs, appliance/tool bag, and other assigned highrise
equipment to two floors below the fire floor, utilizing designated elevator in the
Fireman Feature mode. In the absence of an elevator operator, return elevator to
lobby area if only two or less elevator cars are present. Do not crowd or overload
the elevator(s).
4. Report to Command prior to leaving Lobby Area.
a. Designated elevator third Engine Company is using.
b. Floor third Engine Company is proceeding to.
5. Upon arrival at floor number.
a. Report arrival and floor number to Command.
b. Locate the electrical room and control power to the floor area affected by fire.
c. Provide communication between the standpipe outlet and first Engine
Company nozzle utilizing third Engine Company‟s Engineer at the standpipe
outlet.
Page 23 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
d. Provide a secondary attack line to back up the primary attack line.
e. Assist in the evacuation and provide support where needed.
D. Fourth Engine
1. Report to Lobby Control and obtain the building master and elevator keys.
2. The fourth Engine Company Officer shall determine as much information as
possible with regard to:
a. Floor above fire floor, fire quadrant location, and extent of the fire
b. Evacuation procedures implemented
c. Identify attack/evacuation stairwells
d. Status of elevators: check elevator shaftway for fire impingement.
3. Proceed with highrise hose packs, appliance/tool bag and other assigned highrise
equipment to two floors below the fire floor, utilizing designated elevator in the
Fireman Feature mode. In the absence of an elevator operator, return elevator to
lobby area if only two or less elevator cars are present. Do not crowd or overload
elevators.
4. Proceed to the floor above the fire floor via the attack stairwell.
a. Stage extra air cylinders on the floor where working
5. Report to Command prior to leaving Lobby Area:
a. Designated elevator fourth Engine Company is using
b. Floor fourth Engine Company is proceeding to
6. Upon arrival at the floor above the fire floor:
a. Recon floor above fire floor and report correct floor number, fire and smoke
conditions, along with fire spread.
b. Conduct a primary search of the floor above the fire floor and determine the
need for evacuation and report it to Command.
c. Determine the need for attack line placement and implement as needed.
Page 24 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
E. First Truck Company
1. Report to Lobby Control and obtain the building master and elevator keys.
2. The first arriving Truck Company Officer shall determine as much
information as possible with regard to:
a. Fire floor, quadrant location, and extent of fire
b. Evacuation procedures implemented
c. Identify attack/evacuation stairwells
d. Identify stairwell, roof access and which stairwells are pressurized.
3. Determine the status of elevator(s). Check the elevator shaft for fire
impingement and smoke.
4. Designate one elevator for the first attack team and utilize the Fireman
Feature.
5. Form the initial attack team with the first Engine.
6. Proceed to two floors below the fire floor, utilizing designated elevator in the
Fireman Feature mode.
7. Place extra air cylinders in Resource.
8. Proceed to fire floor via the attack stairwell.
9. Report to Command prior to leaving Lobby Area:
a.
Designated elevator first Truck Company is using
b.
Floor first Truck Company is proceeding to
10. Upon arrival at the fire floor, the first Truck Company shall report to
Command:
a. The correct fire floor number and quadrant location of the fire
b. The fire and smoke conditions, along with fire spread
c. The need for evacuation and additional manpower and equipment
Page 25 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
11. The first Truck Company on the fire floor shall conduct a primary search of
the fire area, along with adjacent spaces, and report the findings to Command.
12. The first Truck Company on the fire floor shall assist the first Engine
Company with forcible entry, ventilation, opening ceilings and walls, removal
of obstructions, and evacuation.
F. Second Truck Company
1.
Report to Lobby Control and obtain building master and elevator keys. The
second Truck Company should obtain any special keys needed in addition to the
building master (i.e., roof hatch, elevator penthouse keys, etc.).
2.
The second arriving Truck Company Officer shall determine as much
information as possible with regard to:
a. Fire floor, quadrant location, and extent of fire.
b. Identify attack/evacuation stairwells, roof access stairwell, and which
stairwells are pressurized.
c. Status of elevators: Check the elevator shaft way for fire impingement and
smoke.
d. Any evacuation procedures implemented.
3. Designate one elevator for second Truck Company and utilize the Fireman
Feature.
4. Proceed to two floors below the fire floor, utilizing designated elevator in the
Fireman Feature mode.
5. Go to the floor above the fire, uppermost floors and roof area via the attack
stairwell.
a. Second Truck Company shall take their air cylinders to the uppermost floors.
6. Report to Command prior to leaving Lobby Area:
a. Designated elevator second Truck Company is using.
b. Floor number second Truck Company is proceeding to.
Note: In the absence of an elevator operator, all secondary Units should
consider returning their elevator back to the Lobby area if only two or less
Page 26 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
elevator cars are present to facilitate incoming Companies in reaching the
upper floors.
7. Upon arrival at the floor above the fire, the second arriving Truck Company
Officer shall perform a quick recon of the floor and report to Command.
a. The correct floor number and quadrant location
b. The fire and smoke conditions, along with fire spread
c. The need for evacuation
8. Upon completion of the quick recon, the second Truck Company shall proceed to
the roof area/uppermost floors, and assume the duties of the Roof Team.
a. Proceed to the roof area and uppermost floors via the attack stairwell and
stage extra air cylinders in an area to their best advantage.
b. Ventilate stairwells at roof area, elevator penthouse, and other natural
openings afforded by the building to help reduce mushrooming of smoke on
upper floors.
c. Determine the need for evacuation of the roof area and the upper floors and
report it to Command.
d. Report the correct location of the Roof Team and the fire/smoke conditions to
Command.
9. Upon completion of roof/upper floor assignments, the Roof Team shall work
down toward the floor above to join the fourth Engine.
a. Initiate primary search. Determine the need for evacuation and report to
Command after each floor is searched.
b. Determine the fire/smoke conditions and the fire spread on each floor and
report it to Command.
c. Give correct floor location to Command at each report.
10. After the fourth Engine and the Roof Team unite on the floor above, the second
Truck Company Officer shall give a PAR to Command for personnel accounted
for.
a. Command shall acknowledge the PAR of the Roof Team and the fourth
Engine and give directions to the best advantage.
Page 27 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
G. First Rescue Company
1. Report to Lobby Control and obtain the building master and elevator keys.
a. Leave the stretcher in the Lobby Area with Lobby Control.
2. Proceed to two floors below the fire floor utilizing designated elevator in the
Fireman Feature mode with the stair chair and ALS medical equipment.
3. Establish Ready Rescue
4. Report to Command prior to leaving lobby area:
a. Designated elevator the first Rescue Company is using
b. Floor number first Rescue is proceeding to
H. Heavy Rescue Company (unless otherwise ordered by Command)
1. Report to Lobby control and obtain the building master and elevator keys.
2. Determine the fire floor location and quadrant.
3. Determine the evacuation procedures implemented.
4. Identify the attack/evacuation stairwell.
5. Identify the special hazards or the special rescue situations.
6. Determine the status of elevators: Check the elevator shaft way for fire
impingement and smoke and report to Command;
a. Designated elevator Heavy Rescue is using
b. Floor Heavy Rescue is proceeding to
7. Proceed to two floors below the fire floor, utilizing the designated elevator in the
Fireman Feature mode.
8. Proceed to one floor below the fire floor via the attack stairwell.
9. Upon arrival at the floor below the fire floor:
a. Report the correct floor number and the location to Command.
Page 28 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
b. Place extra air cylinders on the floor below the fire or to the best advantage.
c. Ascertain the building floor layout.
d. Stage equipment and tools to the best advantage.
e. Assume RIT duties.
f. Provide resource for Command.
I. Third and Greater Alarm Company Units will establish Staging, unless otherwise
directed by Command.
J. First arriving District Chief: Command responsibilities
1. Position to the best advantage.
2. Objectives:
a. Report on-scene status and assume Command.
b. Confirm Lobby Control.
c. Determine the location and the extent of the fire.
d. Evaluate the potential life hazards.
e. Need for additional alarms
f. Assess initial operations.
g. Evaluate building systems (i.e., fire pump, sprinkler system, elevators,
HVAC).
3. Actions:
a. Via radio, assume Command.
b. Via radio, contact all operating units and obtain intelligence, reference to
objectives.
c. Establish water supply.
d. Establish 200 foot safety perimeter when needed.
Page 29 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
e. Order building engineer to report to the Lobby Group.
f. Obtain the building blueprints from the building engineer.
g. Establish Groups: fire floor, resource, treatment, rehab, support, staging,
building control, etc.
h. When relieved by the Assistant Chief, the first-due District Commander will
assume Fire Floor Division or Support or operate to the best advantage as
directed by Command.
K. Second arriving District Chief
1. Assume Safety
III.
ORGANIZATION FOR WORKING FIRES
A. The major elements which need to be considered in most working highrise situations
are:
1. Staging: Staging will be utilized after the initial attack operations have been
supported by equipment and manpower. Apparatus parked in close proximity to
the building, by Companies assigned to the interior, should be moved to the
Staging area as time permits. When equipment from apparatus in Staging is
needed inside, the rig should be brought to a convenient area and parked as
designated.
2. Lobby Control: The Lobby Control Group is responsible for the control of the
elevator and stairway access, for the operation of alarm panels, and the
communications system. This group maintains a log of all personnel going up to
the fire area. The apparatus operator of the first-in Engine shall become Lobby
Control Group.
3. Resource Group: the Resource Group should be established in a convenient
location providing good access to the fire floor area (normally two floors below).
This group provides a supply of personnel and equipment to support firefighting
operations.
4. Fire Floor: Companies assigned to the fire floor are primarily concerned with
search, rescue, and fire attack.
5. Floor Above: Units on the floor above will evaluate the safety of the occupants
and determine if evacuation or the need to defend in place will be used. They will
also check for extension in the upward direction.
Page 30 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
6. Floor Below: The floor below must be checked for any possibility of fire
extension and for property conservation needs. Salvage is usually the most
significant activity on the floor below.
7. Evacuation Team: The need for evacuation may or may not be a concern of
Command. Depending on the extent of the fire, Command may opt to have
occupants remain in their rooms, particularly in compartmented, fire resistant
buildings. This is known as “Defend in Place.” Occupants must be reassured of
their safety by staying in their rooms. When evacuating upper floors, one stairway
must be kept clear for evacuation purposes. The evacuation stairway must be kept
free of smoke (this may be accomplished by means of pressurization using a
ventilation fan at ground level). Occupants in the immediate fire area should be
evacuated as quickly as possible to the third floor below the fire floor.
8. Treatment Group: A Treatment Group should always be considered by Command
at highrise fires. The Treatment Group may be located on the same floor as
Resource.
9. Rehab Group – A Rehab Group should always be considered by Command at
high rise fires. Command should consider putting this group on the same floor as
the Resource group. In most situations, this location will be two floors below the
fire floor.
10. Roof Team: Second arriving Truck Company that ventilates the roof area and the
uppermost floors to prevent mushrooming. They also provide the primary search
for the uppermost floors.
11. Building Control Group: The Building Control Group is responsible for
establishing a water supply to the building. It is also responsible for controlling
the HVAC systems, checking the fire pump and sprinkler system, and verifying
the main alarm panel when remotely located. Location is determined by
Command, with consideration given to the Fire Control Room when remotely
located. This group is flexible to the needs of Command and works in support of
Lobby control by controlling the building‟s internal functions. Consideration
should be given by Command to establish designated elevator operators with
manpower from this group when needed.
IV.
SIZE-UP UPON ARRIVAL
A. A substantial time lag occurs in fires on upper floors of highrise buildings between
arrival of the fire department and the time when a handline is placed into operation.
Fire conditions can be expected to worsen during this period.
B. Highrise buildings are tightly constructed. Any indication of fire or smoke through
the exterior skin is a good indication of a serious fire that may overtax the initial
Page 31 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
assignment. In this case, a greater alarm should be requested promptly. Any
indication of an interior fire may also require the need for a third alarm.
C. The time of day has a great bearing on life hazard, but many of these buildings have
substantial night operations. Maintenance and security personnel must always be
anticipated and accounted for after business hours.
V.
COMMAND AND CONTROL OPERATIONS IN HIGHRISE BUILDINGS
A. Fire in highrise buildings present severe problems for Command. The complexity of
these buildings with multiple stairways, multiple elevators, and large floor areas
provide problems concerning the location of units and the strategy required to control
the event.
B. Command must control these logistical concerns:
1. Stairways
a. In structuring firefighting operations, at least one stairway should be kept
clear to provide access to, or escape from, floors above the fire. This will
require communicating which stairwell is being used for firefighting access
and/or ventilation and which is being kept clear for evacuations.
b. Almost all stairways have vent hatches or roof access at the top to allow
venting of trapped smoke to escape. A ventilation fan introducing fresh air at
the bottom of the stairwell will usually help to clear smoke trapped in the shaft
of the stairway. Consideration should be given for the Air Truck to set up a
large ventilation fan at the bottom of the stairway. However, newer buildings
with pressurized stairwells usually do not require OFD mechanical ventilation.
C. Air Handling systems
1. Some air handling systems are designed for smoke removal and fresh air supply.
Regardless of the type of system, it should be shut down until the fire is
stabilized and the method of smoke removal is decided upon.
D. Fire Floor Support
1. Command will need to provide for a continuous supply of air cylinders and other
equipment to the Resource Group. A determination shall be made by Command
as to operate in either the Elevator Mode or the Stairwell Mode.
a. Elevator Mode: equipment and manpower are moved to the Resource Group
by personnel designated to operate elevators in the Fireman Feature Mode.
Page 32 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
b. Stairwell Mode: Equipment and manpower are moved to the Resource Group
via the Attack stairwell utilizing personnel who station themselves at every
other floor and remove their bunker gear. They shall travel down two flights
of stairs to obtain needed equipment and carry it back up two flights and stop
when they reach the level where their gear is placed.
2. Elevators that are not compromised or in imminent danger should be utilized
when available.
E. Alarm and Communications System
1. Consider using remotely located elevators if shaftways or the elevator penthouse
is threatened in the immediate fire area.
2. Do not use elevators that are not equipped with the Fireman Feature.
3. Utilization of building elevators is the most expedient and less manpowerintensive way to provide resources to the fire floor.
F. Alarm and Communications System
1. Fire alarm and one or two-way voice communications systems provide a method
of sounding alarms or making announcements on individual floors selectively or
to the whole building. These systems may prove beneficial in making
announcements when Command decides to defend in place.
G. Additional Air Cylinders.
1. All initial and secondary Attack Team members, with the exception of the Ready
Rescue, shall carry one extra air cylinder. These extra air cylinders shall be
carried in the double cylinder carrying harness for safety. Upon their arrival at
two floors below the fire floor, they shall stage their extra air cylinders in the
Resource Area near the attack stairwell. Exceptions: Second Tower takes air
cylinders to the uppermost floor, fourth Engine takes air cylinders to their
operating floor, Heavy Rescue takes air cylinders to the floor below the fire.
H. PAS Tags
1. All arriving Companies that are assigned an interior assignment shall report to
Lobby Control with their Company‟s Unit ID tag, where they will be collected by
the Lobby Control Group and retained for accountability.
VI.
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
A. Understanding Building Fire Pumps and PRVs (Pressure Reducing Valves)
Page 33 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
1. If OFD needs to pump the system in a highrise building, it will have to match the
building‟s pump pressure and possibly exceed it. Either the building‟s pump or
OFD‟s pumper does the job. They do not work together.
2. If the building‟s pump fails and the building is equipped with pressure-reducing
valves (PRVs) that are not field adjustable, the fire department pumper will have
to pump into the system as though the fire were on the roof, the highest pressure.
A building‟s fire pump does not have the capability of knowing which floor the
fire is on, therefore, the building pump is designed to pump the entire system.
Because of the high pump pressures created on the lower floors due to the
“dummy” pump, there needs to be a way to reduce the pressure on the lower
floors to provide the appropriate pressure to the lower floor outlets. This is done
through a PRV. The PRV is designed to compensate for the higher pump pressure
on the lower floors to a manageable pressure.
3. The key to understanding PRVs is to remember it is adjusted to provide the usable
pressure for a specific floor based on the inlet pressure of the valve. What makes
this significant to OFD‟s pump operators is if the Engine pressure of the fire
department pumper were to be calculated based on the fire floor elevation alone,
without considering the restriction placed by the PRV, the result would be an
inadequate outlet pressure on the fire floor. Again, the value is designed to give
the proper outlet pressure based on the building‟s “dummy” pump pre-determined
pressure.
4. An exception to this rule applies to PRVs that can be adjusted or circumvented in
the field. If the PRV encountered is the type that a Firefighter can adjust, steps
should be taken by the firefighter to allow the valve to be opened fully. If the
valve is opened to its full range, this information should be transmitted to
Command and the apparatus operator, so the pressure calculation can be figured
appropriately. The apparatus operator does not have to pressurize the system the
same way the building‟s pump does because the flow restriction has been
eliminated.
5. Members should use extreme caution when working from standpipe systems with
PRVs. The Firefighter has no indication as to the setting of the PRV. It could be
possible that a PRV with the wrong setting was installed. If the PRV is set too
low, no amount of pumping will overcome it, because it will do what it is
designed to do (reduce the pressure). It is imperative that attack crews utilize the
in-line pressure gauge to determine the appropriate pressure. Command must be
notified immediately, and an alternate attack plan should be made if the PRV is
set too low. This could include stretching supply hose up the stairwell.
B. Wind-Driven Fires
Page 34 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
1. Fires in highrise and other large structures are capable of becoming wind-driven.
Smoke and heat spreading through the corridors and the stairs of a building can
limit building occupant‟s ability to escape and can limit firefighter‟s ability to
rescue them. Changes in the building‟s ventilation or the presence of an external
wind can increase the energy release of the fire. This can also increase the spread
of fire gases throughout the building. An exterior report of fire being blown back
into the building reveals that a wind-driven fire is occurring. If the fire is
pulsating back and forth from exterior venting to being blown back into the
building, plan for a wind-driven fire.
2. Command should respond to the report of a wind-driven fire ensuring the
establishment of positive pressure ventilation of the attack and evacuation
stairwells. Pressurization of the stairwells should keep smoke and fire gases to the
fire floor. It is not expected that this pressurization will combat the wind-driven
event and reverse the flow of fire and gases. The main objective is to keep the
stairwells charged with fresh air to help occupant‟s escape and firefighting
activities. If needed, crews may need to deploy multiple fans to achieve the
desired pressurization of the building or stairwell. This may be achieved by
combining multiple fans at the lobby level or placing fans several floors apart.
C. Hybrid Buildings
1. Some buildings exceed the traditional height of garden apartments and are not
generally considered highrises. These types of buildings usually lack a main lobby
that accesses most stairwells and an elevator bank. They are typically three to six
stories and utilize a mix of construction types (masonry, steel, wood frame). They
usually contain sprinkler and standpipe systems and may or may not have a fire
pump. The floor configurations are mostly compartmentalized. Because most of
these buildings have been constructed under newer codes, vertical fire stopping is
generally present and they typically lack a common cockloft.
2. The first Engine Officer must quickly determine whether attack lines will be
deployed from the Engine or from the building‟s standpipe system. The fire may
be on the first floor facing the street or on the sixth floor interior hallway. The
first Engine Officer has the responsibility to determine the appropriate size attack
line and from what source it will be deployed (the Engine or the building system).
That decision will dictate the actions of the subsequent arriving Companies.
D. Room of Refuge.
1. When advancing on the fire floor, crews should designate a room of refuge on the
same side of the hallway as the fire. Upon finding the fire, the Truck Company
should ensure the next door back toward the attack stairwell is forced open. If
crews are forced to retreat, getting to the stairwell should be the first priority. If
there is not sufficient time to make a stairwell, this room of refuge will already be
available.
Page 35 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
COMMAND OVERVIEW
COMMAND
MEDICAL
OPS
OPEROPERATI
ONS
FIRE OPS
SUPPORT OPS
FIRE FLOOR
LOBBY
CONTROL
TRIAGE
FLOOR ABOVE
FIRE FLOOR
SUPPORT
TREATMENT
FLOOR
BELOW
RESOURCE
TRANSPORT
ROOF AREA
STAGING
EVACUATION
REHAB
Page 36 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
Quick Reference Sheet
1. Residential (single and multiple story) Duplex/Triplex:
Dispatch: 3 Engines, 1 Truck, 1 Rescue, 1 Heavy Rescue, and 2 Districts.
First Engine – attack line.
Second Engine – water supply, second attack line, assist with occupant removal
Third Engine – standby second hydrant to bring 4 inch/3 inch supply line to itself for RIT or
exposure line
First Rescue – acknowledge two-out position, vent, back side report, control utilities,
secondary egress, assume “Ready Rescue” after RIT established
First Tower
“In” – force entry, inside vent and search, remove occupants, open voids and hidden
space.
“Out” – control utilities, rear conditions, VES, ladders
Heavy Rescue – Recon perimeter, protective RIT
2. Garden Apartment (multi-family, low-rise, one to three stories, four to twelve units):
Dispatch: 3 Engines, 2 Trucks, 1 Rescue, 1 Heavy Rescue, 2 Districts
First Engine – attack line
Second Engine – lay water supply 4 inch/3 inch, second attack line to long end (attic space)
Third Engine – standby hydrant to pump humat, third attack line to short end (attic space)
Fourth Engine – stage at second water source, on request lay 4 inch/3 inch to itself or second
Tower
First Rescue – acknowledge two-out position, vent, backside report, control utilities,
secondary egress. Assume “ready rescue” after RIT established.
First Tower
“In” – force entry, primary search, secure all clear, vent as you go, open voids and hidden
spaces.
“Out” – Truck to cut off long end (no roof ops), check exterior for victims/fire, VES, ladder,
utilities
Page 37 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
Heavy Rescue – RIT or may, if assigned, work as Truck Company
Second Tower
“In” – search most endangered apartment (above fire and then uppermost apartments) Open
attic long end with the second Engine Company.
“Out” – open attic on the short end, assist remaining search, open gable on the short end,
salvage/overhaul.
3. Commercial
Dispatch: 3 Engines, 2 Trucks, 1 Rescue, 1 Heavy Rescue, 2 Districts
First Engine – attack line or master stream
Second Engine – water supply 4 inch/3 inch to first Engine, second attack line, return to
hydrant and pump humat
Third Engine – lay second water source 4 inch/3 inch to itself, lay lines to FDC and advise
Command, Supply
First Rescue – acknowledge two-out position, vent, backside report, control utilities,
secondary egress, assume “Ready Rescue” after RIT established.
First Tower – front aerial, roof conditions, VES, primary egress, remove obstructions, ladder.
Second Tower – rear aerial and backside report, assist with roof ops, VES, secondary egress,
ladders.
Heavy Rescue – recon exterior, RIT
4. Highrise (safety perimeter 200 feet)
Dispatch: 4 Engines, 2 Trucks, 1 Rescue, 1 Heavy Rescue, Air Truck, 2 Districts, 1 Assistant
Chief
First Engine – lobby control, fire floor location, determine elevator and if evacuation
implemented, ID stairwells, spare air, attack line (lobby control: Knox Box, elevator access,
activate Fireman Feature, master keys for second Engine)
Second Engine – water supply, two 3 inch lines into FDC, report exterior conditions,
determine elevator status, operate elevators (assume Building Control Group: check fire
pump, sprinkler, alarm, shut down HVAC and elevator systems)
Third Engine – lobby control, fire floor location, identify attack/evacuation stairwells, spare
air, Engineer will provide communication between the standpipe and first Engine Company
nozzle.
Page 38 of 39
TACTICAL OPERATIONS
Fourth Engine – floor above fire, determine elevator and evacuation conditions, spare air,
recon and primary search, attack line.
First Rescue – establish “Ready Rescue”(two floors below)
First Tower – lobby control, fire floor location, determine elevator and if evacuation
implemented, ID stairwells, spare air, primary search(lobby control, Knox Box, elevator
access, activate Fireman Feature)
Second Tower – floor above the fire, VES of fire floor, spare air to uppermost floor, vent
stairwell, elevator penthouse, and natural openings, search/conditions, proceed down towards
floor above fire (work with fourth Engine), then report a PAR.
Heavy Rescue – floor below fire with spare air, RIT.
*All Units, with the exception of the Ready Rescue, will report to Resource (two floors below
fire) with spare air, (Exceptions: second Tower take air cylinders to the uppermost floor, fourth
Engine takes air cylinders to their operating floor, Heavy Rescue takes air cylinders to the floor
below the fire.) All Units will proceed to their assignments via the attack stairwell after reaching
the Resource Area level.
Page 39 of 39
DIVIDER
5. SAFETY PROCEDURES
INCIDENT SAFETY
I.
POLICY
The Orlando Fire Department will make safety its highest priority. This includes the
understanding that safety begins before shift and never ends. Safety factors should be
considered in the emergency, non-emergency, and training settings. OFD adopts the
practice of being aggressively safe in all operations.
II.
INCIDENT SAFETY OFFICER
The purpose is to establish an Incident Safety Officer (ISO) and establish his
responsibilities and authority. The establishment of an ISO does not relieve the Incident
Commander of the ultimate responsibility for the safety of all Crews working at the
incident.
A. Overview
The Orlando Fire Department recognizes the need to hold the safety of its personnel
in the highest regard. The establishment of an ISO on any emergency, non-emergency
or training event that exposes or has the potential to expose personnel to an IDLH
environment will be required. The establishment of an ISO does not remove the
concern of personnel safety from any member of OFD. Each Company Officer will
be responsible for the safety of their Crew and others working around them at all
times. The recognition of the need to be aggressively safe will permit the Department
to remain safely aggressive in all operations.
B. Assignment
1. The second arriving District Chief at all incidents will be assigned as the ISO by
Command. The radio designation will be “Safety.”
2. If the Incident Commander feels that there is an immediate need for an ISO to be
established prior to the arrival of the next District Chief, he may elect to assign a
Company Officer to fill that role until the District Chief arrives.
3. Due to the necessity of maintaining city-wide coverage and unit availability
concerns, the Assistant Chief will not assume the role of the ISO.
4. The ISO will be mobile throughout the incident, however, must have knowledge
of the following:
a. Command Post
Page 1 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
b. RIT location
c. Ready Rescue location
d. Entry/Location of interior crews
e. Objectives/goals( face to face with Command)
C. Application
1. The ISO will have the authority to cause immediate correction or termination of
any situation or action that creates or has the propensity to create an immediate
threat to personnel operating at any emergency scene.
2. If the ISO on an emergency scene or training event determines that an immediate
hazard exists that would put personnel in harms‟ way, he will alter, suspend, or
terminate the activity, and immediately inform Command of the hazard and the
corrective actions taken.
3. The ISO is recognized and understood to have the authority to alter or suspend
any Command assignment or direction that would place personnel safety in
jeopardy due to the identification of an immediate hazard.
4. The ISO will be involved in the post incident critique in order to review the safety
factors in the emergency incident.
5. For incidents that are deemed complex, either due to geographical or operational
concerns, the IC or ISO should consider establishing an additional Safety Group
to assist the overall Command structure with accountability and personnel safety.
Chief Officers will be given primary consideration when the decision to establish
an additional Safety Group is made. If operational concerns dictate that there is a
Company Officer with technical expertise that would be better able to provide a
safety perspective (e.g., special ops rescues), then Command should consider
establishing the Safety Group with this Company Officer in charge. These
additional Safety Divisions/Groups will be designated according to their function
or geographic location (e.g., Safety Group, Fire Floor Safety Division).
6. As a Command Officer, the ISO, from a safety perspective, shall coordinate the
tactical and strategic planning operations with the IC to ensure that concerns for
overall scene safety is implemented.
7. The Company Officer will be responsible for ensuring proper conditioning and
use of their assigned Crews PPE. This will minimize the ISO‟s concerns for
monitoring the PPE of personnel, and instead focus on overall scene safety.
Page 2 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
III.
FIREGROUND SAFETY
A. Interior Firefighting Operations should be abandoned when the structure becomes
unsafe to operate within. When such conditions become untenable: evacuate, regroup,
and redeploy.
B. The primary concern when a hazard becomes apparent is the welfare of personnel. In
an effort to protect personnel who may suffer the adverse effects of hazards such as
structural collapse, explosion, backdraft, etc., a structured method of area evacuation
must be utilized. This will provide for the rapid/effective notification of those
personnel involved, and will be able to accurately account for those personnel.
C. Special consideration will need to be given in regards to abandoned/boarded-up
buildings. OFD will not commit Units to interior operations unless there are obvious
signs of potential occupants (e.g., bikes, vehicles, boards removed prior to arrival), or
the fire appears to be in the incipient phase.
D. Priority Traffic
1. The notification of the need for “Priority Traffic” will be announced by
Communications, and followed with a steady tone.
2. The following will be cases where “Priority Traffic” will be used:
a. Transition from an Offensive to a Defensive Operation
b. Hazards, e.g., power lines down, bars on windows, gas leak, dogs, etc.
c. When calling for a PAR
d. During helicopter approach and departure operations
E. The “Priority Traffic” announcement is designated to provide immediate notification
for all incident personnel of a notable hazard that is either about to occur, or has
occurred.
F. The use of Priority Traffic should be initiated if the hazard appears to be imminent.
G. Any member has the authority to utilize the Priority Traffic announcement when it is
felt that a notable danger to personnel is apparent.
H. When an imminent hazard has been realized, the Priority Traffic process should be
initiated. Usually, either a Company or Division/Group Officer will be the initiator.
The initiator should describe the apparent hazard and order a positive response,
usually to evacuate a particular area, according to the scope of the hazard.
Page 3 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
I. In situations requiring a shift from an offensive to a defensive operational strategy,
Command must develop a corresponding operational plan and must communicate that
plan to all operating Units. Upon receiving a Priority Traffic message, the dispatcher
shall sound an alert-one tone and repeat the message on the Incident TAC. When
going from an offensive to a defensive operation, all personnel are to evacuate, and
Command will conduct a PAR after the change in operations.
J. Emergency Traffic
1. Mayday and emergency evacuation will be the ONLY two situations where
Emergency traffic will be utilized.
a. The notification of a Mayday will be announced by Communications as
“Emergency Traffic”, and followed with a Steady Tone.
b. The notification of an Emergency Evacuation will be announced by
Communications also as “Emergency Traffic”, but followed with a Warble
Tone.
K. The method of evacuation selected will vary depending on the following
circumstances:
1. Imminence of the hazard
2. Type and extent of hazard
3. Perception of the area affected by the hazard
L. In situations that require immediate evacuation, Communications will activate a
warble tone, initiate Emergency Traffic, and an Emergency Evacuation Message will
be initiated to notify personnel of a situation, e.g., building collapse, that will require
an emergency evacuation. Apparatus operators that are near their apparatus shall
sound ten short blasts on their air horns to alert those who may not have heard the
Emergency Traffic message.
M. Upon receipt of the Emergency Evacuation Message, Company Officers shall
promptly exit with their personnel to a safe location, where the Company Officer will
account for all Crew members. Shortly after the evacuation order, Group Officers
shall begin the process of accounting for all evacuated Crews. When all affected
Crews and Crew members are accounted for, and a PAR is attained, the evacuation
process is complete. At this time, a more specific determination as to the
reality/extent of the hazard can be made and efforts initiated to redeploy/redirect
attack forces.
Page 4 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
N. Hazards noted of a “less than critical nature” should usually be handled by
consultation of Command, Division/Group Officers, Company Officers or outside
agency authorities. These Officers or specialists should make a determination as to
the nature and possible effect of the suspected hazard and notify Command so that
Command can make a more knowledgeable decision as to the proper course of action.
O. Fireground Boundaries
Many of the standard safety requirements are considered to always be in effect at the
incident. This requires that everyone involved understand where the boundaries of the
incident are located. For safety purposes, the fireground is defined by an imaginary
line that encloses the space where the fire situation creates a potential hazard to
personnel. Unless otherwise designated by Command, the fireground will be that area
within the perimeter of those vehicles actually operating at the incident scene.
P. Entering the Fireground
All personnel (including Command personnel) crossing the fireground perimeter shall
wear full protective gear to include: boots, bunker coat, Nomex hood, helmet, gloves,
and SCBA. Command may choose to lower the level of acceptable personal
protection based upon the incident.
Q. Accountability
1. Unless dictated by SOPs, Units shall confer with Command for an assignment
prior to beginning to work at the incident. This is for accountability purposes.
Command is ultimately responsible for all personnel at the incident; therefore, no
personnel should enter or begin work without Command assigning them.
2. All Units making entry into a structure involving an IDHL environment will
notify Command of their Unit ID, location of entry, total number of crew
members and actions taken (e.g., “T11 outside, entering Side Alpha, Quadrant
Alpha, second floor window with 2, VES). This procedure will strengthen the
ability of Command and the Communications Division to maintain an account of
all operating Crews on the interior of the structure.
IV.
TACTICAL POSITIONING
A. Positioning of operating Companies can severely affect the safety/survival of such
Companies. Personnel must use caution when placed in the following positions:
1. Above the fire (floors/roofs)
2. Where fire can move in behind them
3. When involved with opposing fire streams
Page 5 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
4. Combining interior and exterior attack
5. Where Division Officers cannot control position/retreat
6. With limited access: one-way in/out
7. Operating under involved roof structures
8. In areas where a backdraft potential exists
9. Collapse zones
10. Blast areas
11. Scenes of violence (e.g., riots, hostage situations, demonstrations)
B. The safety of firefighting personnel represents the major reason for an effective and
well-timed offensive/defensive decision and the associated “write-off” by Command.
When the rescue of savable victims has been completed, Command must ask, “Is the
risk to my personnel worth the property I can save”?
C. When operating in a Defensive Mode, operating positions should be as far from the
involved area as possible and still remain effective. Position and operate from behind
barriers if available (e.g., fences, walls).
D. The intent is for personnel to utilize safe positioning when available, in an effort to
safeguard against sudden hazardous developments, such as a backdraft explosion or a
structural collapse.
E. Be aggressive when operating in an Offensive Mode. An aggressive and effective
interior attack directed toward knocking down the fire eliminates most eventual safety
problems.
F. Due to the inherent hazards of the immediate fire or incident scene, efforts will be
made by Command to limit the number of personnel on the fireground to those
assigned to a necessary function. All personnel shall be assigned to a task or group.
After completing an assignment and no other assignment is available in that Group,
Crews should be assigned to Resource, Staging, or the Rehabilitation Group until
such time as they can be either reassigned back to an Operating Group or released to
an in-service status. Crews shall not assign themselves tasks at the incident.
Freelancing will not be tolerated.
G. The intent of this procedure is to minimize fireground confusion/congestion and more
importantly, to limit the number of personnel exposed to incident hazards to only
those necessary to successfully control the operation. Individual crews shall be
Page 6 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
restricted from wandering about the incident or congregating in non-functional
groups. If personnel are not assigned to a Division/Group, or have a necessary staff
function to perform, they should stay off the fireground.
H. In extremely hazardous situations (large quantities of flammable liquids, LP gas,
hazardous materials, etc.), Command will engage only an absolute minimum number
of personnel within the fireground perimeter. Portable unmanned master streams will
be utilized wherever possible.
I. Ground Crews must be notified and evacuated from interior positions before Tower
nozzles go into operation.
J. Do not operate exterior streams, whether handlines, master streams or tower nozzles,
into an area where interior Crews are operating. This procedure is intended to prevent
injuries to personnel due to stream blast and the driving of fire and/or heavy heat and
smoke into interior Crews.
K. When laddering a roof, the ladder selected shall be one that will extend two to three
foot above the roofline. This shall be done in an effort to provide personnel operating
from the roof with a visible means of egress. If possible, when laddering buildings
under fire conditions, place ladders near building corners and firewalls, as these areas
are generally more stable in the event of structural failure.
L. When operating either above or below ground level, establish at least two separate
escape routes where possible (e.g., stairways, ladders, exits,) preferably at opposite
ends of the building or separated by a considerable distance.
V.
STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY
A. Upon initial size-up and/or reports from Units operating, Command must determine
the following:
1. If the fire is a room/contents fire, e.g., pot on the stove, couch, mattress, etc., and
does not involve the structural components of the building.
2. If the fire is more involved and has affected the structural components of the
building.
B. Structural Collapse
1. Structural collapse is a major cause of serious injuries and death to Firefighters.
For this reason, the possibility of structural collapse should be a major
consideration in the development of any tactical plan.
Page 7 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
2. Structural collapse is always possible when a building is subject to fire conditions.
In fact, if fire is allowed to affect a structure long enough, some structural failure
is inevitable.
3. Regardless of age and exterior appearance of the building, there is always the
possibility that a principle structural supporting member is being seriously
affected by heat and may collapse suddenly, inflicting serious injury to
firefighters.
4. In a typical building involved in fire, the roof is the most likely candidate for
failure, however, failure of the roof may very likely trigger a collapse of one or
more wall sections, which may exert outward pressure against both the bearing
and non-bearing walls. In multi-story buildings or buildings with a basement, the
floor section above the fire may collapse if supporting members are directly
exposed to heat and flames.
5. Knowledge of various types of building construction can be invaluable to the Fire
Officer from a safety standpoint, as certain types of construction can be expected
to fail sooner than others. An example of this would be light-weight truss and bar
joist roof construction, which under fire conditions can be expected to fail after
minimal exposure.
C. Warning Signs:
1. Cracks in exterior walls
2. Bulges in exterior walls
3. Sounds of structural movement (creaking, growling, snapping, etc.)
4. Smoke or water leading through walls
5. Flexible movement of any floor or roof where Firefighters walk
6. Interior/exterior bearing walls or columns: leaning, twisting, or flexing
D. The following construction features or conditions have been known to fail
prematurely or to contribute to early failure when affected by fire
1. Large, open, unsupported areas: supermarkets, warehouses, etc.
2. Large signs/marquees, which may pull away from weakened walls
3. Cantilevered canopies, which usually depend on the roof for support and may
collapse as the roof fails
Page 8 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
4. Ornamental or secondary front or sidewalls, which may pull away and collapse
5. Buildings with light-weight truss, bar joist, or bowstring truss roofs
6. Buildings supported by unprotected metal (beams, columns, etc.)
7. Buildings containing one or more of the above features must be constantly
evaluated for collapse potential. These evaluations should be of major
consideration in determining the tactical mode (i.e., offensive/defensive).
Structures usually collapse without warning, but sometimes there are signs that may
warn on scene crews. These signs shall be communicated to Safety and action will be
taken by Command to avert any imminent hazard.
E. It is a principle Command responsibility to continually evaluate and determine if the
fire building is tenable for interior operations. This on-going evaluation of
structural/fire conditions requires the input of Company Officers advising their
Divisions/Groups, and then the Divisions/Groups advising Command of the
conditions in their area of operation.
F. Structures of other than fire protected/heavy timber construction are not designed to
with stand the affects of fire, and can be expected to fail. Command should initiate a
careful evaluation of structural conditions and should be fully prepared to withdraw
interior crews and redirect to a defensive position.
G. If structural failure of a building or section of a building appears likely, a perimeter
must be established a safe distance from the area. All personnel must remain outside
this perimeter.
Page 9 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
Page 10 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
Page 11 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
APPARATUS PLACEMENT
I.
INTRODUCTION
A. It shall be the policy of the Orlando Fire Department to position apparatus and other
emergency vehicles at an incident on any street, road, highway, toll road, or
expressway in a manner that best protects the incident scene and the work area. Such
positioning shall afford protection to fire department personnel, ambulance personnel,
injured vehicle occupants/patients, law enforcement officers, and tow/recovery
operators from the hazards of being in or near moving traffic.
B. All responders should understand and appreciate the high risk that personnel are
exposed to when operating in or near moving vehicle traffic. Personnel should always
operate within a protected environment at any vehicle-related roadway incident, using
the appropriate PPE (e.g., safety vests).
C. The tendency to drive apparatus as close to the fire as possible may result in
positioning of rigs that is dangerous. The placement of all apparatus on the fireground
should be a reflection of one of the following:
1. A standard operational procedure for first arriving Companies
2. A prearranged staging procedure
3. A direct order from Command
4. A conscious decision on the part of the Officer assigned to the apparatus based on
existing or predictable conditions
D. Effective apparatus placement must begin with the arrival of the first Units. The
placement of the initial arriving Engine, Truck, and Rescue should be based upon
initial size-up and general conditions upon arrival. First arriving Companies should
place themselves to maximum advantage and go to work.
E. When the Truck is not needed for upper level access or rescue, spot apparatus in a
position that would provide an effective position for Tower nozzle operation if the
fire goes to a defensive mode. Truck Officers must consider extent and location of
fire, most dangerous direction of spread, confinement, exposure conditions, overhead
obstructions, and structural conditions in spotting apparatus. The Truck should be
spotted where the platform can be raised and used effectively without repositioning.
F. Spot the Command vehicle in a manner that will allow maximum visibility of the fire
building and surrounding areas. The Command vehicle position should be easy and
logical to find and should not restrict the movement of other apparatus.
Page 12 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
G. Rescue units should be spotted in a safe position that will provide the most effective
treatment of fire victims and firefighting personnel, while not blocking movement of
other apparatus or interfering with firefighting operations. Rescue Units should be
placed to allow a quick and unobstructed departure.
H. Additional Units called to the scene (e.g., an extra Engine and Truck Company)
should hold positions, stage a minimum of one block short of the immediate fire area,
and remain uncommitted until ordered into action by Command or unless dictated by
the SOPs. Company Officers should select standby positions that allow the maximum
of tactical options, build on the initial plan, and allow for expansion of the operation.
I. Command must maintain awareness that access to the scene increases the tactical
options and that the immediate fire area can quickly become congested with
apparatus. Apparatus on the fireground fall into two categories.
1. Apparatus that is working
2. Apparatus that is parked (out of the way)
J. Command and all operating Units should attempt to maintain an access lane down the
center of the street whenever possible.
K. Think of fire apparatus as an expensive exposure. Position working apparatus in a
manner that considers the extent and location of the fire and a pessimistic evaluation
of fire spread and building failure. Anticipate the heat which may be released with
structural collapse. Apparatus should generally be positioned at least 30 feet away
from involved buildings, even with nothing showing. Greater distances are indicated
in many situations.
L. Beware of putting fire apparatus in places where it cannot be repositioned easily and
quickly, particularly operating positions with only one way in and out (e.g., yards,
alleys, driveways). If the apparatus becomes endangered, operate lines to protect it
while you reposition.
M. Beware of overheard power lines when positioning apparatus. Do not park where
power lines may fall. It is dysfunctional to move a rig several times throughout the
progress of a fire.
N. Initial arriving pumpers should be placed in “key” positions. These positions should
offer maximum access to the fire area and be supplied with large diameter pumped
supply lines as quickly as possible. Subsequent arriving Companies can operate
hoselines from this apparatus.
O. Key tactical positions should be identified and Engines placed in those locations with
a strong water supply. The water supply should be a minimum of one large diameter
Page 13 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
hose from an Engine on a hydrant. The forward Engine can distribute this water
supply to a variety of handlines, master streams, or other devices.
P. Hydrants located close to the fire area should be regarded as “key” hydrants.
Page 14 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
TWO-IN/TWO-OUT
I.
INTRODUCTION
To establish standard guidelines and procedures that will serve to provide a safe working
environment for all employees and to reduce the risk of injury or death as a result of
department operations at emergency incidents. To operate safely and as effectively on
emergency scenes as possible, the Orlando Fire Department has established the following
procedures, which shall be adhered to by all personnel.
II.
DEFINITIONS
A. IDLH Atmosphere: An atmospheric concentration of any toxic, corrosive or
asphyxiate substance that poses an immediate threat to life. It can cause irreversible
or delayed adverse health effects and could interfere with an individual‟s ability to
escape from a dangerous atmosphere. This occurs most frequently prior to OFD
arrival.
B. Two-out: Two Firefighters outside the structure able to respond, should interior crews
need help. Two-out shall be replaced by a RIT Unit or RIT Team.
C. Rapid Intervention Team (RIT): A specifically designated team designed to provide
personnel for the rescue of emergency service members operating at emergency
incidents if the need arises (e.g., Mayday situations).
D. Incipient Fire: A fire in the initial or beginning stage, which can be controlled or
extinguished by portable fire extinguishers. However, it is the policy of OFD to
deploy a 1-3/4 inch handline, or larger, any time there is a fire inside a structure.
Though the incipient fire may actually be controlled by a smaller line or portable
extinguisher, a 1-3/4” handline shall be used in most cases.
III.
PROCEDURES
A. The first arriving Company shall determine if the incident involves an IDLH
atmosphere. It is the standard operating procedure for personnel to operate using the
buddy system when entering an IDLH atmosphere.
B. In fire situations, it will be necessary for the initial Incident Commander (first
arriving Company Officer) to determine if the fire is in the incipient stage. A team of
two Firefighters may take action according to standard operation procedures to
extinguish an incipient fire without the establishment of the initial two-out.
C. If the presence of an IDLH atmosphere has been determined and there are less than
four Firefighters on the scene, the Companies shall wait until at least four Firefighters
are assembled on the scene before initiating operations within the IDLH atmosphere.
Two Firefighters may begin operating within the IDLH atmosphere as long as two
Page 15 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
additional Firefighters (properly equipped) are outside the IDLH atmosphere to serve
as the initial two-out. One member may be assigned other tasks and/or functions so
long as these tasks and/or functions can be abandoned, without placing any personnel
at additional risk, if rescue or assistance is needed.
D. Members operating in IDLH atmospheres must use SCBA and work in teams of two
or more. They must also maintain voice or visual contact with each other at all times.
Portable radios and/or safety rope tethering are not acceptable as replacements for
voice or visual contact. Radios can (and should) be used for fireground
communications, including communications between interior and exterior teams.
They cannot, however, be the sole tool for accounting for one‟s partner during
interior operations. Team members must be in close proximity to each other to
provide assistance in case of an emergency.
E. Until four Firefighters are assembled, operations outside of the IDLH atmosphere
shall take place in accordance with standard operation procedures. Such operations
include, but are not limited to: initial size-up, establishment of water supply, exterior
fire attack, establishment of a hot zone, utility control, ventilation, placement of
ladders, forcible entry, exposure protection, and any other exterior operations deemed
appropriate by the Incident Commander.
F. A dedicated RIT shall be established and positioned immediately outside the IDLH
atmosphere. This crew shall be fully outfitted with protective clothing and an SCBA
with the air mask in a ready position to don, as well as a portable radio and other
required rescue equipment. Crew members will be dedicated to perform rescue.
Where possible, it is recommended that a charged hoseline be dedicated for the RIT
operation.
G. If the incident is in a high or mid-rise structure, or in a large facility such as a
warehouse or other areas with multiple IDLH atmospheres, the Incident Commander
should consider upgrading the RIT to provide rapid response anywhere in the
structure. Consideration should be given for each remote access point on any large
facility. The Incident Commander will be responsible for determining the number of
teams needed based on the specifics of the incident.
H. If a Firefighter becomes trapped, disabled, or otherwise in need of assistance, he
should announce this, utilizing the term “Mayday, Mayday, Mayday” as specified in
the SOPs.
I. Should the Incident Commander order a building evacuation, a PAR shall be
conducted (as outlined in the SOPs, Personnel Accountability system) immediately
after the building has been evacuated. The RIT shall remain in place for immediate
activation should a Firefighter or Crew fail to report during the PAR.
Page 16 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
IV.
EXCEPTIONS
A. If upon arrival at a fire emergency, members find a fire in its incipient stage,
extinguishment of such a fire shall be permitted with less than four persons on the
scene. Extinguishment of outside fires (such as dumpsters, brush, or automobiles)
shall be permitted with less than four persons, even if SCBA is being worn.
B. If upon arrival at the scene, members find an imminent life-threatening situation or
probable life-threatening situation, where immediate action may prevent the loss of
life or serious injury, such action shall be permitted with less than four persons on the
scene, when there is a probability of persons inside. The Incident Commander shall
evaluate the situation, considering the occupancy, time of day, day of week, reports
from persons on the scene and signs that persons may be inside the structure. Entry
may be considered if signs indicate a probable victim rescue.
C. If members are going to initiate actions that would involve entering an IDLH
atmosphere, because of a probable or imminent life-threatening situation where
immediate action may prevent the loss of life or serious injury, and personnel are not
on the scene to establish an initial two-out, the members should carefully evaluate the
level of risk that they would be exposed to by taking such actions. In all cases, a
minimum of two people shall form the entry team.
D. If it is determined that the situation warrants immediate intervention and four people
are not on the scene, the Company Officer shall notify Communications of the intent
to enter the IDLH atmosphere prior to the availability of a two-out. This can be
achieved via the four-part arrival report. Communications shall then notify all
responding Companies of this action and receive acknowledgement from the
responding District/Assistant Commanders that the transmission was received.
E. Should the Incident Commander on the scene deviate from this guideline, the actions
taken shall be documented on the fire incident report and forwarded through the
Chain of Command to the Fire Chief via a Special Incident Report. The narrative of
this report shall be written by the Incident Commander and he will outline the
reasons, rationale, justification, and end result of the deviation from the standard
operating procedure. All information in the report shall be of enough depth to provide
a comprehensive understanding of the actions taken.
Page 17 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
PERSONNEL ACCOUNTABILITY SYSTEM (PAS)
I.
POLICY
It is the policy of the Orlando Fire Department that the Personnel Accountability System
(PAS) be utilized at all major operations or when deemed necessary by the Incident
Commander.
II.
PERSONNEL ACCOUNTABILITY SYSTEM (PAS)
A. Accountability procedures enhance the safety of Firefighters operating on emergency
incidents by providing the Incident Commander with a system to track the number of
personnel and their areas of operation.
B. The PAS tag is a plastic nametag issued to each member. The PAS tag is considered
an issued item of personal protective equipment.
C. PAS nametags shall be color-coded as follows: white for Chief Officers, red for
Company Officers, and yellow for Firefighters and Engineers.
D. The Unit ID Tag is a flexible velcro swath, with the Unit designation and velcro strips
designed to hold the PAS tag of each assigned member. The Unit ID Tag shall be
affixed inside the cab of all fire apparatus.
E. The Unit ID/Accountability Board will be used to contain the Unit ID Tags from all
fire units operating at an emergency incident. All Units arriving on the scene will
place their Unit ID Tag on this board of the first arriving Engine or Truck Company.
The exception will be on highrise incidents, where all crews will bring their Unit ID
Tag directly to Lobby Control.
F. The Command Board is a large board used to track unit function and location, which
is carried on every Command vehicle.
G. At the beginning of each shift or when the person reports for duty, the PAS tag shall
be affixed to the Unit ID Tag by each member.
H. Company Officers shall be responsible to ensure that the Unit ID Tag accurately
reflects the currently assigned personnel.
I. Each member, when no longer assigned to the Company, shall remove the PAS
nametag from the Unit ID Tag.
Page 18 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
III.
ACTIVATING THE PAS (USAGE)
A. The first arriving Engine or Truck Company at a fire alarm will utilize their Unit
ID/Accountability Board as a collection site for all arriving Units. All Units will,
upon arrival at the scene, and prior to commencing with any operations, place their
Unit ID Tag appropriately on the Unit ID/Accountability Board of the first arriving
Engine or Truck Company.
B. A designee of the Incident Commander or the assigned Safety Officer will collect the
Unit ID/Accountability Board and bring it to the Command Post.
C. Units assigned to staging will send their Unit ID Tag to the Command Post.
D. The Incident Commander shall ensure that the Command Board tracks all Unit
movements, so that it accurately reflects the current location or function of each unit.
IV.
TACTICAL BENCHMARK
A. A Personal Accountability Report (PAR) is a roll call of Companies at an incident.
For a Company Officer, a “PAR” is a positive account for all members of the
Company. For a Group Officer, a “PAR” is a positive account for all members
assigned to that Group.
B. A PAR will be required for the following situations:
1. Mayday report
2. Sudden hazardous event (flashover, backdraft, collapse)
3. Change from offensive to defensive operation
4. 20 minutes into the operation at a major fire
5. Upon report of “Fire Under Control”
6. Upon termination of any hazardous operation
C. All Units reporting a PAR will identify their assignment, number of personnel and
location (i.e. “E10 is PAR with 2, 2nd floor, Quadrant Bravo”).
V.
RETURNING UNITS TO SERVICE
A. When Units are returned to service, the Company Officer of each Unit shall report to
the Command Post and collect their Unit‟s ID Tags. Additionally, the Officer of the
Page 19 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
first arriving Engine or Truck Company will collect their Unit ID/Accountability
Board.
B. Unit Officers will ensure that all nametags for their Unit are accounted for and return
the Unit ID Tag to the cab of their Unit.
VI.
SHIFT END
A. At the end of the work shift or any time the member removes his gear from the Unit
of the assignment, he will personally remove the assigned PAS tag from the Unit ID
Tag and velcro it to his helmet.
Page 20 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
Page 21 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
MAYDAY COMMUNICATIONS
I.
INTRODUCTION
The nature of firefighting places the Firefighter at risk of becoming lost or trapped. The
toxic environment provides only a narrow window of survivability, and the rescue of a
lost or trapped Firefighter is especially time sensitive. Mayday Communication will be
used by Firefighters to report their status as being in trouble and needing rescue.
II.
“MAYDAY” RADIO MESSAGE
A. The term Mayday will be reserved ONLY to report missing, trapped, or Firefighters
in distress.
B. Any report of Mayday will receive Emergency radio traffic, followed by the Alert 1
Tone (Steady Tone).
C. The term “Priority Traffic” will continue to be used to report all other emergencies
(e.g., downed power lines, fireground hazards).
III.
MISSING FIREFIGHTER
A. When a Firefighter identifies that he or a member of his team is lost, trapped,
disoriented, or injured, and in need of assistance, he shall transmit a verbal message
on the tactical channel to Command and state “Mayday, Mayday, Mayday,”
Firefighters should not delay this announcement of their emergency.
B. Notification should occur as soon as the Firefighter THINKS he is in trouble. The
Firefighter in distress should:
1. Declare the emergency on the tactical channel, “Mayday, Mayday, Mayday.”
2. Provide the following information:
a. L: location
b. U: unit number
c. N: name
d. A: assignment (i.e., T-7 inside team)
e. R: resources needed
C. Activate the emergency button on a portable radio and stay on the tactical channel.
Page 22 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
D. Activate PASS device intermittently (10-20 seconds), allowing for radio
communications.
E. Stay calm and conserve air. Attempt to locate exterior doors or windows.
F. Lost or trapped Firefighters shall remain together.
G. If possible, follow hoseline or lifeline out.
H. Position flashlight toward the ceiling.
I. Attempt to make tapping noises with tools.
J. Assume a horizontal position on the floor to maximize the sound effects of PASS.
K. Communicate your location and surroundings to assist in rescue efforts.
IV.
INDIVIDUAL RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Due to the nature of the emergency involving a downed Firefighter, the stress level
will be higher than normal. It is imperative that all personnel operating on the
emergency scene remain calm and maintain their professionalism throughout the
crisis. Personnel shall:
1. Follow the directions of their superiors.
2. Continue with assignments unless otherwise directed.
3. Listen carefully to radio transmissions.
V.
COMMUNICATION‟S RESPONSIBILITY
A. Upon receipt of a Mayday communication on an emergency scene, Communications
shall:
1. Notify Command of the Mayday call (if not already aware) and the channel the
Firefighter calling the Mayday is using. Do not have a distressed Firefighter
change TACs.
2. Sound the distinctive Emergency Tone and announce “Mayday, Mayday,
Mayday, Emergency Traffic Only” (repeat x 1), Alert 1 Tone (Steady Tone).
3. Upgrade the RIT to a RIT assignment for the emergency scene, unless otherwise
advised by Command.
Page 23 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
4. Immediately notify Command of radio emergency button activation and treat as a
Mayday event until proven otherwise. Provide all pertinent information known
about the Unit I.D. and attempt to contact the Firefighter.
5. Monitor all tactical radio channels for the possibility of a downed Firefighter
coming up on another TAC.
6. If the missing Firefighter comes up on a channel other than the fireground TAC,
the dispatcher will maintain communications with him on that channel, and relay
it to Command. It is essential that once communication has been established, it
should not be lost.
7. At the conclusion of the emergency traffic situation, the Incident Commander
shall transmit an “All Clear-Resume Radio Traffic” and Communications will
sound the Emergency Tone and repeat “Mayday All Clear – Resume Radio
Traffic.
B. Other Communications Duties
1. Dispatch additional alarm
2. Dispatch additional District Chief
3. Dispatch additional RIT
4. Deputy Chief group page
5. Notification to OCFRD Communication Center
VI.
COMMAND CONSIDERATIONS
A. Command must maintain an awareness of the location of Firefighters working on the
fireground.
B. If a Firefighter cannot be located either through a Personnel Accountability Report
(PAR) or any other time a Firefighter is missing, a Mayday must be announced.
C. The Incident Commander must ALWAYS assume that the missing Firefighter is lost
in the building until the member is accounted for.
D. Command shall respond to a Mayday by implementing a Rescue Plan for the
firefighters. The plan should include:
1. Upon receipt of a Mayday, Command shall initiate “Emergency Traffic” and
advise all personnel that radio traffic must cease.
Page 24 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
2. Only radio traffic pertinent to the Mayday shall be permitted on the tactical
channel (TAC). Depending on the complexity of the operation, Command should
strongly consider switching the firefighting operation to another TAC. If
Command decides to establish a Rescue Group, the Incident Safety Officer will
be designated as Command of the Rescue Group and will remain on the current
TAC. Firefighting Command and Operations will then move to another TAC to
continue suppression and confinement for the rescue. Both Commanders will
maintain face-to-face contact for the duration of the incident.
3. Immediately conduct a PAR for all interior crews (utilizing Group Officers when
possible).
4. Commit the Rapid Intervention Crew (RIT) to the most appropriate location to
initiate a rescue. Call for and establish a RIT (more than one Unit).
5. Do not abandon the firefighting positions; provide reinforcement. Efforts should
be made to keep the fire out of the rescue area and provide appropriate ventilation
and lighting.
6. Immediately request additional alarms (there should be no hesitation).
7. Expand the Command structure rapidly. Request additional on-duty Chief
Officers and initiate a call-back of off-duty Chief Officers, as needed.
8. Establish a Rescue Group and assign an ISO Chief Officer as soon as possible.
9. Establish a Safety Group Officer.
10. Establish a Treatment/Medical Group.
11. Call for additional resources as needed (e.g., Technical Rescue Team).
12. Consider family support measures: CISM, Chaplain, etc.
Page 25 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
Page 26 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
RAPID INTERVENTION TEAM
I.
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of rapid intervention is to be immediately available for rescue of a member
or team who becomes trapped in an emergency incident, and to provide the means of
emergency egress. This guideline is intended to increase safety for members operating at
hazardous emergency incidents by ensuring the presence of a dedicated Company or team
for rescue of members.
II.
ARRIVAL
The first arriving Chief Officer will evaluate the need for a RIT and continue, cancel or
reinforce the RIT based upon his analysis of the dangers to which members may be
exposed given the conditions/situation at the incident scene.
III.
POSITIONS
A. The RIT Unit Officer shall, upon arrival, verify that the Incident Commander is aware
of the Unit‟s presence and designation as RIT. The RIT shall then position itself to
the best tactical advantage point to accomplish the task.
B. At a highrise fire or other large-scale operation, the Incident Commander may stage
RIT at other tactically advantageous positions (e.g. floor below the fire floor,
perimeters).
C. As the incident expands in size, complexity, or in unusual operations, RIT may be
positioned at additional locations as determined by the Incident Commander.
IV.
DUTIES
A. The RIT unit shall be dedicated to Units operating at a scene. The RIT unit will act in
a proactive manner and will safe the building for fire operations without committing
to the interior unless ordered.
B. If assigned by a Superior Officer to other than RIT duties, the RIT Unit Officer shall
REMIND the superior of the RIT designation, and if reassigned, Command must be
notified.
C. The RIT Unit shall be ready to take immediate action as directed by the Incident
Commander.
D. The RIT Officer shall review the building features, floor plan and preplans. The RIT
Officer should be familiar with what Units are operating, and their locations in the
building.
Page 27 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
E. The RIT Unit shall perform an exterior size-up, considering building construction and
fire conditions, ensure utilities are controlled, note entry points, egress points, and
location of interior crews, and evaluate signs of potential building collapse.
F. The RIT Unit shall remove any obstacles which would impede a rapid egress or entry
such as security bars, locked doors, and other security devices. It is not RIT‟s
responsibility to provide ventilation functions.
G. The RIT unit shall assess the need for and place additional ground ladders to upper
floors for egress and entry.
H. The RIT shall ensure a secondary means of egress for operating crews.
I. The Engineer should be prepared to raise, position, reposition and/or operate any
available Tower Truck, if needed.
J. The RIT Unit shall maintain a state of constant readiness to react rapidly to changing
incident conditions.
K. Radio transmissions shall be monitored for any indication of members in distress.
V.
TOOLS/EQUIPMENT
A. The RIT shall be fully equipped with the appropriate protective clothing, protective
equipment, SCBA, and any specialized rescue equipment that might be needed given
the specifics of the operations in which Companies are engaged.
B. The RIT Unit shall determine the availability and location of Tower and portable
ladders, portable lights, extrication tools and/or other tools and equipment which
might be needed to perform rescue duties. At a minimum, RIT members shall be
equipped with the following, which can be staged outside the building:
1. Officer: hook, thermal imager, search rope
2. Engineer: 6‟ hook, halligan, K-12 with carbide tip or chainsaw, depending on
construction
3. Left Jump: 6‟ hook, sledge, K-12 with composite blade and portable ground
ladder for structures more than one floor
4. Right Jump: 6‟ hook, flathead axe, halligan, RIT pak
5. Central Jump (Heavy Rescue, if available): halligan, axe, chainsaw
Page 28 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
6. The RIT shall also consider additional tools for specialized operations such as the
slice pack, oxy/acetylene torch, the hydraulic unit, sawzalls, and the dispatch of
the TRT Support Unit in the event of a collapse situation.
VI.
REPORTS
A. Any time a RIT is activated by Command, the following information shall be
captured in the Special Incident Report. Copies of this report will be forwarded to the
Safety/Training Officer, and the Fire Rescue Operations Bureau Commander.
1. RIT Designation Company and Officer in Charge (OIC)
2. RIT Activation Time
3. Was activation a Mayday or alert from other source (e.g., Safety Officer)
4. Crew in need of assistance
5. Nature of assistance
6. RIT actions
7. Additional assistance needed for manpower tools/equipment or crew tasks
8. Other tools/equipment not available at this time, but necessary
9. Additional training and information required
10. Problems encountered (Communications, Acts or Omissions, Training,
Tools/Equipment)
VII.
COMMUNICATIONS
A. Communications shall notify the assigned Unit that they are assigned as the RIT Unit.
B. Communications shall notify the Incident Commander of the identity of the
responding RIT Unit, and receive acknowledgement of it from the Incident
Commander.
C. RIT shall be dispatched with the initial alarm (e.g., first alarm assignment: 3 Engines,
2 Trucks, Heavy Rescue, Rescue, and 2 District Commanders). Heavy Rescue
designated RIT unless otherwise ordered by Command.
D. If the Heavy Rescue is unavailable, Communications shall add a second Truck
Company for RIT to the initial dispatch.
Page 29 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
VIII.
COMMAND CONSIDERATIONS
A. The Incident Commander will ensure that safety and accountability functions are
appropriately provided for and shall assign the second District Chief as the Safety
Officer. Should a Mayday situation arise, the Safety Officer shall become the Rescue
Group.
B. The Incident Commander shall evaluate the situation and the risks to the operating
teams and shall provide a RIT appropriate with the needs of the situation.
C. The Incident Commander should consider assigning an Engine Company to the RIT
when the situation warrants, for protection via hoselines.
D. The RIT Unit shall not be used to provide relief for operating Units until the fire has
been declared “out” and all personnel accounted for. The Incident Commander should
anticipate this need and have units other than the RIT unit available for this purpose.
Consideration for RIT should continue even during overhaul stage, as collapse could
be a hidden danger.
E. The Incident Commander shall leave the Mayday operation on the original radio TAC
for RIT operations. The Incident Commander will request another TAC for
suppression operations and move all units not involved with the Mayday. The
Incident Commander will maintain control of suppression operations on this new
TAC with the Safety Officer taking control of the Mayday operations. The IC and the
Safety Officer should be face to face during this time to maintain coordination of the
fireground.
Page 30 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
EMERGENCY INCIDENT REHABILITATION
I.
PURPOSE
To ensure that the physical and mental conditions of members operating at the scene of
an emergency or a training exercise does not deteriorate to a point that affects the safety
of each Firefighter or that jeopardizes the safety and integrity of the operation.
II.
SCOPE
This procedure shall apply to all emergency operations and training exercises where
strenuous physical activity or exposure to heat or cold exists.
III.
PHYSIOLOGICAL CONSIDERATIONS
A. One liter per hour of water loss is common during strenuous activity.
B. Firefighting protective clothing reduces the ability to maintain thermo-regulation by:
1. Increasing core temperatures
2. Increasing the risk of heat-related emergencies
C. High intensity activity, heat stress, and dehydration all reduce the rate of gastric
emptying.
D. Even mild dehydration will affect simple motor skills.
E. Thirst is an indication of poor hydration levels.
F. Lack of hydration will cause persistent tachycardia and headaches.
G. Urine output is important. Changes in color, odor and lack of, are all important signs
of hydration problems.
H. The gastric intestinal system can only employ 1 to 1.5 liters of fluid per hour. Care
should be taken not to ingest more than that amount. Members should also take care
in not ingesting extreme cold beverages, caffeine, carbonated beverages, and alcohol.
IV.
RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The Incident Commander shall consider the circumstances of each incident and make
adequate provisions early in the incident for the rest and rehabilitation of all
personnel operating at the scene.
Page 31 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
1. The establishment of Rehab is critical during the summertime months of high heat
and humidity.
2. The provisions shall include medical evaluation, treatment, monitoring, food
conditions, and evaluation of the other environmental parameters of the incident.
3. The rehabilitation shall include the provision of Emergency Medical Services
(EMS) at the Basic Life Support (BLS) level or higher.
B. Supervisors
1. All supervisors shall maintain an awareness of the condition of all personnel
operating within their span of control and ensure that adequate steps are taken to
provide for each Firefighter‟s health and safety.
2. Company Officers must recognize the level of fatigue in each member of their
Crew. It is the responsibility of the Company Officer to remove any member of
their Crew that may be exhibiting signs of fatigue to prevent possible further
injury. If one member of the Crew is in need of rehab, the Company Officer will
remove the whole Crew and reporting to Rehab. Crews should be sent to Rehab as
a whole unit and not individually. This will allow Command to be aware of exact
staffing and accountability during the incident.
3. The Command structure shall be utilized to request relief and reassignment of
fatigued Crews.
C. Personnel
1. During periods of hot weather, personnel shall be encouraged to drink water and
activity beverages throughout the workday.
2. During any emergency incident or training evolution, all personnel shall advise
their supervisor when they believe that their level of fatigue or exposure to heat or
cold is approaching a level that could affect themselves, their Crew, or the
operation in which they are involved.
3. Personnel shall also remain aware of the health and safety of other members of
their Crew.
V.
ESTABLISHMENT OF REHABILITATION GROUP
A. Responsibility
1. The Incident Commander will establish a Rehabilitation Group when conditions
indicate that rest and rehabilitation are needed for personnel operating at an
Page 32 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
incident scene. The Lead Instructor is responsible for establishing a Rehab Group
during training evolutions (if needed).
2. A Supervisor will be placed in charge of the Group and shall be known as the
Rehab Officer.
3. The Rehab Officer will typically report to Command (or designee) in the
framework of the Incident Management System.
B. Location
1. The location for the Rehab Area will normally be designated by the Incident
Commander.
2. If a specific location has not been designated, the Rehab Officer shall select an
appropriate location based on the site characteristics and designations below.
C. Site Characteristics
1. It should be a location that will provide physical rest by allowing the body to
recuperate from the demands and hazards of the emergency operation or training
evolution.
2. It should be far enough away from the scene that personnel may safety remove
their turnout gear and SCBA and be afforded mental rest from the stress and
pressure of the emergency operation or training evolution.
3. It should provide suitable protection from prevailing environmental conditions.
a. During hot weather, it should be in a cool, shaded area
b. During cold weather, it should be in a warm, dry area
4. It should enable personnel to be free of exhaust fumes from apparatus, vehicles,
or equipment (including those involved in the Rehabilitation Group operations).
5. It should be large enough to accommodate multiple Crews, based on the size of
the incident.
6. It should be easily accessible by EMS Units.
7. It should allow prompt reentry back into the emergency operation upon complete
recuperation.
Page 33 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
8. Command should consider the Rehab Group near the Air Truck Operations. This
will allow Crews to drop off depleted bottles prior to entering Rehab, and pick up
recharged bottles upon release from Rehab.
D. Site Designations
1. A nearby garage, building lobby, or other structure
2. Several floors below a fire in a highrise building
3. A school bus or municipal bus
4. Fire apparatus, ambulance, or other emergency vehicles at the scene or called to
the scene
5. An open area in which a Rehab Area can be created using tarps, fans, etc.
E. Resources
1. The Rehab Officer shall secure all necessary resources required to adequately
staff and supply the Rehab Area.
2. The supplies should include items listed below:
a. Fluids: water, activity beverage, oral electrolyte solutions, and ice.
b. Food: soup, broth, or stew in hot/cold cups (during long, extended operations).
c. Medical: blood pressure cuffs, stethoscopes, oxygen administration devices,
cardiac monitors, intravenous solutions, and thermometers.
d. Other: awnings, fans, tarp, smoke ejectors, heaters, dry clothing, extra
equipment, floodlights, blankets and towels, traffic cones, and fireline tape (to
identify the entrance and exit of the Rehab Area).
VI.
GUIDELINES
A. Rehab Group Establishment
1. Rehabilitation should be considered by Staff Officers during the initial planning
stages of an emergency response.
2. The climate or environmental conditions of the emergency scene should not be
the sole justification for establishing a Rehab Area.
Page 34 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
3. Any activity/incident that is large in size, long in duration, and/or labor intensive
will rapidly deplete the energy and strength of personnel and therefore merits
consideration for rehabilitation.
4. Climate or environmental conditions that indicate the need to establish a Rehab
Area are: a heat stress index above 90 o F or wind-chill index below 10o F. A heat
index over 90o F is almost is almost a daily occurrence in the summer-time
months.
B. Hydration
1. A critical factor in the prevention of heat injury is the maintenance of water and
electrolytes.
a. Water must be replaced during exercise periods and at emergency incidents.
b. During heat stress, personnel should consume at least 1 to 1-1/2 quarts of
water per hour.
c. The rehydration solution should be a 50/50 mixture of water and a
commercially prepared activity beverage and administered at about 40o F.
d. Rehydration is important even during cold weather operations, where despite
the outside temperature, heat stress may occur during firefighting or other
strenuous activity when protective equipment is worn.
e. Alcohol and caffeine beverages should be avoided before and during heat
stress because both interfere with the body‟s water conservation mechanisms.
f. Carbonated beverages should also be avoided.
C. Nourishment
1. The department shall provide food at the scene of an extended incident when
Units are engaged for two or more hours.
a. A cup of soup, broth, or stew is highly recommended because it is digested
much faster than sandwiches and fast food products.
b. In addition, foods such as apples, oranges, and bananas provide supplemental
forms of energy replacement.
c. Fatty and/or salty foods should be avoided.
Page 35 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
D. Rest
1. The “two air bottle rule”, 30-minute work time, is recommended as an acceptable
level prior to mandatory rehabilitation.
2. Personnel shall rehydrate (at least 8 ounces) while SCBA cylinders are being
changed.
3. Firefighters having worked for two full 30-minute rated bottles, or 30 to 45
minutes of continuous work in full turnout gear, shall be immediately placed in
the Rehab Area for rest and evaluation. During summer months, this time may be
reduced based on the daily temperature and humidity factors.
4. In all cases, the objective evaluation of a Firefighter‟s fatigue level shall be the
criteria for rehab time.
5. Firefighters in rehab should remove turnout clothing and allow the body to
naturally cool itself.
6. Rest shall not be less than 10 minutes and may exceed an hour, as determined by
the Rehab Officer.
7. Fresh Crews, or Crews released from the Rehab Group, shall be available in the
Staging Area to ensure that fatigued personnel are not required to return to duty
before they are rested, evaluated, and released by the Rehab Officer.
E. Recovery
1. Personnel in the Rehab Area should maintain a high level of hydration.
2. Personnel should not be moved from a hot environment directly into an air
conditioned area because the body‟s cooling system can shut down in response to
the external cooling.
a. An air-conditioned environment is acceptable after a cool-down period at
ambient temperature with sufficient air movement.
3. Certain drugs impair the body‟s ability to sweat and extreme caution must be
exercised if the firefighter has taken antihistamines, such as “Actifed” or
“Benadryl,” or has taken diuretics or stimulants.
F. Medical Evaluation
1. Command should assign a Rehab Crew as early in the operation as is necessary.
Be aware that if Firefighters are in need of treatment, additional personnel might
have to be assigned to support the Rehab Group.
Page 36 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
2. Upon entry into Rehab, the assigned Rehab Crew shall record the following:
a. Crew I.D./member name
b. Baseline vitals consisting of pulse, B/P and temp
c. Time entering Rehab
3. Rehab Group Crews should be aware of the possible need of immediate treatment
and possible transport of personnel who exhibit the following signs:
a. Signs of heat stroke
b. Temperatures greater than 100o F
c. Pulse greater than 150 at any time
d. Pulse greater than 140 after cool-down period
e. Systolic B/P greater than 200 at any time
f. Diastolic B/P greater than 120 at any time
g. Chest pains
h. Shortness of breath
i. Altered mental status
Note: Personnel with protracted nausea, or who have already vomited, will likely
require IV rehydration and should be transported to a hospital for medical
evaluation.
4. After a rest period, Crews shall reevaluate vital signs, examine personnel, and
make proper Crew disposition (return to duty, continued rehab, medical treatment,
or transport to medical facility).
a. Continued rehabilitation should consist of additional monitoring of vital signs,
providing rest, and providing fluids for rehydration.
b. Medical treatment for personnel whose signs and/or symptoms indicate
potential problems should be provided in accordance with Orange County
Practice Parameters.
Page 37 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
c. EMS personnel shall be assertive in an effort to find potential medical
problems early.
5. Heart Rate and Temperature – The heart rate should be measured for 30 seconds
as early as possible in the rest period.
a. If a Firefighter‟s heart rate exceeds 110 beats per minute, a tympanic
temperature should be taken.
b. If a Firefighter‟s temperature exceeds 100.6o F, the Firefighter should not be
permitted to wear protective equipment.
c. If it is below 100oF and the heart rate remains above 110 beats per minute,
rehab time should be increased.
d. If the heart rate is less than 110 beats per minute, the chance of heat stress is
negligible.
6. Documentation – All medical evaluations shall be recorded on the Rehab Form,
along with the personnel‟s name and complaints. Each entry on the form should
be signed, dated, and timed by the Rehab Officer or his designee.
G. Accountability
1. Personnel assigned to the Rehab Group shall enter and exit the Rehab Area as a
Crew.
a. The Crew designation, number of Crew members, and the times of entry to
and exit from the Rehab Area shall be documented by the Rehab Officer or
his/her designee on the Company check-In/Out Sheet. Crews shall not leave
the Rehab Area until authorized to do so by the Rehab Officer. The Rehab
Officer shall notify Command of any personnel who have not rotated though
the Rehab Area.
b. All completed forms shall be included in the incident documentation.
Page 38 of 40
SAFETY PROCEDURES
Rehab Group – Company Check-In/Out Sheet
Crews Operating on the Scene: ____________________
Alarm # ______________
Unit #
# Persons
Time In
Page 39 of 40
Time Out
SAFETY PROCEDURES
Rehab Group – Vital Signs Worksheet
Name
Unit
Time
B/P
Resp.
Page 40 of 40
Temp.
Taken By
Complaints
Transport
where?
DIVIDER
6. SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
BRUSH/WILDLAND FIRES
I.
OVERVIEW
This plan is intended to serve as an operational guide when woods or dry vegetation fires
are encountered. All normal OFD standard operating procedures are in effect for brush
firefighting as amended by this plan.
II.
TACTICAL PRIORITIES
A. Tactical priorities will vary as fire situations are encountered.
B. Wildland/urban interface usually encompasses three types of environments.
1. Isolated areas of wildland within an urban area called “buffers.”
2. Structures on small, medium, or even larger lots that are bordered by wildland on
broad, front-type entrances.
3. Structures scattered over large wildland areas.
C. The three tactical priorities are as follows:
1. Reconnaissance: A careful and complete survey of the area involved will be the
top priority of the first arriving Unit. The only exceptions should be for small fires
where the entire area can be observed from one location, situations that require
immediate action (as in a rescue), or when an exposure is severely threatened.
2. Exposure Protection: Protecting exposures and other improvements from the fire
becomes a high priority, even at the risk of adding extra acreage to the size of the
fire.
3. Confinement of Perimeter: The heads of the fire should be given the highest
priority in order to efficiently control the fire spread. A direct application fire
stream, with Units operating in the burn area, is the fastest control evolution
available to stop the fire spread (direct attack). Many situations will not support
this method and Command may elect to use natural and man-made barriers to stop
the forward progress of the fire (indirect attack). Where geographical, weather,
and exposure conditions permit, the initial attempt at controlling the fire should be
the indirect method. Special consideration must be given to the availability of
resources for patrolling the perimeter.
Page 1 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
III.
DIVISION OF FORESTRY
A. The Division of Forestry (DOF) has the same goal in mind as the fire department:
locate, confine, and extinguish. However, DOF‟s tactics are a little different. Just as
OFD has certain tools and training to accomplish these tasks, they do also. A
coordinated effort between agencies will make the operation go much smoother and
faster.
B. Forestry will plow a wide path that will enable our Units to patrol a fire much more
easily, while reducing the possibility of damage to our Units. Depending on the
terrain, these lines are not always suitable for Woods Truck access.
C. A backfire can be set to reduce the possibility of fire jumping the plow line. Backfires
will normally be handled by DOF or by OFD personnel with DOF‟s involvement. DO
NOT EXTINGUISH THE BACKFIRE!
D. When encountering an area where a backfire has been set, notify Command.
E. Follow the plow line and extinguish any spot fires that have jumped the line. When
the backfire is complete, totally extinguish all hot spots within ten feet of the fireline.
Add more distance if it is windy.
F. An acre is 208 feet by 208 feet, or about the size of a football field. It will take the
same amount of water to extinguish one acre of a medium-growth wooded area as a
2-1/2 story house fire.
G. Many times, manpower and equipment can be more efficiently utilized by
surrounding an area and waiting for the fire to burn to a barrier, rather than by going
into the woods and extinguishing it.
H. The DOF is a valuable resource that can save countless hours of work for OFD
personnel.
IV.
STANDARD COMPANY OPERATIONS
A. Standard Company Operations assign basic fireground functions and activities to the
various Companies, based upon the capability and characteristics of each type of
Unit. Standard Company Operations on brush fires vary greatly from other types of
incidents.
Page 2 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
B. The following items represent the standard operating procedure that will normally
be performed by Companies on brush fire incidents:
1. Woods Truck
a. Operate off-road, from the burned area, to directly apply fire streams.
b. Reconnaissance
c. Rescue and evacuation
d. Lighting and control of backfires
e. Exposure protection
f. Fireline and spot-fire patrol
g. Overhaul (mop-up)
2. Engine Company
a. Rescue and evacuation
b. Exposure Protection
c. Water supply for Woods Trucks
d. Overhaul of accessible areas
3. Tankers
a. Water supply for Woods Trucks
b. Exposure protection
c. Overhaul in accessible areas
d. Water supply and shuttle for muck fires
C. Due to the ever-changing nature of a brush fire, the key concept in standard
company operations is mobility. Engine Companies and Tankers should not be
committed in such a manner as to become inflexible to rapid reassignment of
duties or location.
Page 3 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
D. If possible, at the Officer‟s discretion, responding Woods Trucks should be
manned with an additional Firefighter from an Engine or a Tower Truck.
V.
UNIT POSITIONING
A. Initial Response
1. The first Woods Truck to arrive on the scene will locate the access to the area
and begin reconnaissance and attack, if warranted. This Unit should advise
later arriving Units of access points to use.
2. The first Engine on the scene will locate on an improved road, at the head of
the fire and assume position to the best advantage for structural protection.
3. The first Tanker on the scene (if not required for structural protection) shall
locate at a point easily accessible to a Woods Truck, such as an intersection
towards the head of the fire, or an area that has burned up to a road, leaving
clear access for the Woods Truck.
4. Any additional Units shall stage in their direction of travel, upwind, one block
from the scene, until assigned by Command.
5. Air assets can be instrumental in reconnaissance, attack, and exposure
protection. There are times (due to accessibility problems) that air
reconnaissance is the only true means to get a real picture of what a fire is
doing.
VI.
LOCAL AIR ASSETS
A. DOF (water drop, reconnaissance)
B. Local news helicopters can be called in to help when no other air assets are
available.
C. If availability of access points to a fire area is in question, OPD or OCSO Ranch
and Grove Units should be contacted, as they usually have an excellent
knowledge of wildlands in their area.
D. On large-scale incidents where water supply is a greater consideration, Command
should consider the use of private water trucks from construction companies and
heavy equipment supply companies for water supply.
E. OIA Fire Department also has Crash Trucks that can be utilized in water supply
and firefighting operations.
Page 4 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
VII.
STAGING PROCEDURES
Procedures remain the same as for other incidents. If possible, Staging should be done in
an area already burned off by the fire, or in a grassy field that can be control-burned off
by one or two Units before staging is implemented.
VIII.
FIREGROUND FACTORS
A. The following factors have a critical effect on the burning characteristics of a brush
fire and on the effectiveness of control efforts.
1. Weather
a. Relative humidity
b. Wind-speed and direction
c. Temperature
d. Cumulative and long-range drying
2. Fuel
a. Type
b. Size
c. Arrangement
3. Equipment available
a. It is essential that DOF Units be requested as early as possible. During peak
fire periods, DOF Units may be committed or have extended response times
due to the large geographical areas that they cover.
b. The County should be notified as soon as possible, to properly coordinate
resources and tactics when there are fires that are spreading out of city
boundaries.
Page 5 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
4. Access and natural or man-made barriers
a. Rivers, lakes, swamps
b. Fences, canals, ditches
c. Muck, dried lakebeds
d. Heavy or dense forest
e. Soft sand
IX.
PRE-FIRE PLANNING
A. Just as in structural firefighting, pre-fire planning can be invaluable in attacking
wildland fires.
1. In areas that have repeated fires from season to season
2. In high fire load wooded areas
B. Units should gain knowledge of who owns the property and their uses. If possible,
make contact to ascertain:
1. Gates and access
2. Structures in the area
3. Possible livestock in the area
4. Contact numbers for emergency egress
5. Knowledge of various hidden hazards:
a. Power lines (above or below ground)
b. Ditches, dikes, holes
c. Chemical or hazardous material storage areas (existing or abandoned)
d. Dumping areas (refuse, tires, illegal dumping)
Page 6 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
X.
TACTICS AND STRATEGY
A. Brush fires often present a large area of rapidly spreading fire with numerous and
complex exposure problems. The basic brush fire philosophy will be to control
the fire by the use of natural boundaries. Where exposures are, or may soon be
threatened, or when a small fire can be quickly extinguished by one Woods
Truck, a direct attack may be warranted.
B. There are two basic methods of attacking a brush fire: the Direct Attack and the
Indirect Attack. In many situations, a combination of the two, applied to different
areas of the fire, has proven most successful in providing effective control.
C. Command must quickly develop a firefighting plan, and this plan must remain
flexible throughout the incident.
D. The following is a list of size-up considerations that affect the strategy and tactics
considered:
1. Location, direction, and speed of fire heads, wind direction, and speed
2. Exposures and improvements involved or threatened
3. Burning conditions, weather, time of day, and previous experience in the
general area
4. Fuel: size, type, and arrangement
5. Barriers available to support backfire, natural or man-made
6. Accessibility into the fire area
7. Spot fires, frequency and distance from the main fire
8. Equipment available
9. Water supply, tankers, hydrant or drafting
10. Mechanic response
11. On scene refueling
12. When operating in unburned areas, always maintain an escape plan.
13. When cutting wire fences, keep the post between yourself and cut, as the wire
may recoil when tension is released.
Page 7 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
14. If it becomes necessary to cut a fence, make every effort to repair it. Notify
Command and be very careful not to let any livestock escape.
15. Full protective clothing must be worn while working with winch cables. When
tension is applied to winch cables, maintain a safe distance or stand behind the
apparatus.
XI.
EQUIPMENT
A. Vehicles should not be left unattended in dry grass or other flammable vegetation.
On large operations it may be necessary to burn off an area for staging.
B. If a vehicle is left unattended near a fire area, windows are to be rolled up and
keys are to be left in the ignition. This applies to staff and support vehicles, as
well as operations.
C. While operating off-road, maintain a constant awareness of soil composition or
conditions that would hamper mobility. Be careful of changes in type, size, and
color of vegetation (as it may indicate a change of soil composition). Use a person
foot to precede the Unit when soil is questionable.
D. When entering off-road areas, switch to four-wheel drive prior to departing the
hard surface of the roadway.
E. Vehicles with a winch should be parked near questionable areas to more readily
facilitate removal of Units should they become stuck.
F. Personnel will not operate on the exterior of any Woods Truck while in motion.
G. Woods Trucks shall not be used to push over or plow through trees and heavy
brush.
H. When working a fire with a Woods Truck, the driver should be aware of available
water levels in the tank. Depending on the location in the fire area, try to have
enough water in the tank to protect the vehicle and Crew in case you are cut off,
or have a flare-up and need to escape.
XII.
OVERHAUL
A. Overhaul should start as soon as manpower is available, Don‟t wait until the fire
is completely contained unless it is absolutely necessary. Overhaul must be
thorough. If there is a large fire area, overhaul at least 100 yards into the main
burn from the perimeter. Use water as often as possible to mop up. Dirt also
works well.
Page 8 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
B. Remember that perimeter fire control only contains the fire. It is not out until
every ember is cool. Embers can be blown over the perimeter and quickly start
spot fires.
C. When in doubt that a fire is out, Command shall implement the utilization of
sprinklers supplied by reserve hose. Command shall leave the sprinklers in place
until the fire is completely out.
D. When supplying the sprinklers with muck pump, a natural water source should be
sought first (i.e., lakes and canals).
E. A hydrant water supply should be considered a secondary means when supplying
sprinklers.
XIII.
SAFETY
A. Always provide for an escape route. Try to have at least two routes of egress,
should one become blocked by fire or smoke conditions.
B. Do not allow firefighting personnel to become exhausted. Proper rotation of
personnel to Rehab is essential.
C. Provide drinking water. Hydration is critical during and after strenuous, high heat
conditions.
D. Wear protective clothing. When available, the lightweight woodland firefighting
gear should be worn, except during structural firefighting duties.
E. Use hand tools correctly.
F. Remember, fire can burn against the wind.
G. Keep equipment and personnel in good condition.
XIV. APPARATUS PLACEMENT
A. Never place equipment in front of a brush fire.
B. If apparatus is parked in a brush area, remember that the exhaust system can start
a fire below the Truck.
C. Provide protection for the engineer in case the wind direction changes.
D. Beware of getting stuck.
Page 9 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
E. Know the limitations of the apparatus in rough terrain.
F. Be alert to the possibility of puncturing the tires.
XV.
COMMUNICATIONS
A. The Communications Center shall dispatch to grass, brush, and forest fires a
standard alarm assignment of:
1. One Woods Truck and one Engine
2. This standard assignment may be changed by the Assistant Chief, on a daily
basis, as conditions warrant, by adding an Engine, Tanker, or Woods Truck to
the initial response.
3. Upon receipt of a brush fire alarm, after Units have been dispatched,
Communications shall cross-reference the reported location against known
burn permits and advise responding Units of possible controlled burns in the
area.
4. Communications should give the Units responding the wind direction and
speed, along with the fire index on the second dispatch if possible.
5. Communications should check with the surrounding fire departments to find
out if they are working any fires in adjacent areas, and their equipment/units
involved. Command should be notified of this information as soon as possible.
XVI. COMMAND CONSIDERATIONS
A. Upon arrival, the Incident Commander shall provide the following information in
the initial radio report:
1. Size (an estimate, given in acres or fraction of acres)
2. General size of vegetation (light, medium, or heavy rough)
3. Rate of spread (expressed as slow, moderate or rapid)
4. Command shall strongly consider the request of a Division of Forestry Unit to
respond if the fire requires two or more Woods Trucks to control.
5. Access routes into the area for incoming Units
B. On major incidents, establish a Command Post as soon as possible. Command
will need to set up Geographic Divisions, a Reconnaissance Group, and Resource
Page 10 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
Group to coordinate move-ups and call-backs as soon as possible on large,
complex fires. Staging should be utilized by Command as needed.
C. Command should plot and update the fire size, location, and progress as often as
possible using maps or aerial photographs and information from the
Reconnaissance Group.
D. Command shall determine the location of tankers and other sources of water
supply, and notify all Units at the incident of their location.
E. As an incident grows, the Command Post may expand in size; therefore, the
location selected should be capable of accommodating additional personnel.
F. Whenever possible, the location for the Command Post should be chosen with a
nearby suitable site for helicopters to land.
Page 11 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
AIRCRAFT RESCUE FIREFIGHTING (ARFF) PROCEDURES
I.
OBJECTIVE
A. Provide rapid deployment of units for effective control of an aircraft emergency.
B. Provide for the life safety of aircraft occupants and the surrounding area.
II.
DEFINITIONS
A. Crash 6: 1990 Oshkosh: Holds 1585 gallons of water and 205 gallons of AFFF.
Enough foam for three tanks of water.
B. OEA Operations: Ground support with radio designation 1419. Available 24 hours a
day and will assist OFD as an escort.
C. Runway: Area where aircraft take off and land. Runways are numbered on the ends
and numbers correspond with compass directions. Lines marking runways are painted
white.
D. Taxiways: Used by aircraft to get to and from parking and the runway. Not as wide as
runways and have letters instead of numbers for names. Lines marking taxiways are
painted yellow.
E. Apron – Aircraft parking (sometimes called ramps)
F. Alert I – Minor aircraft emergency (minor oil leak, etc.)
1. Crash Unit only
G. Alert II- Major aircraft emergency that could affect a safe landing (Engine fire, faulty
landing gear, no hydraulic pressure, etc.)
1. Crash Unit, 2 Engines, 1 Truck, 1 Rescue, 1 District Chief
2. C-6 and E-6 or T-6 proceed to standby location and other Units stage at
appropriate gate
H. Alert III – Aircraft crash or imminent. Fire involving aircraft not in flight
1. Crash Unit, 2 Engines, 1 Truck, 1 Rescue, Heavy Rescue, Foam Truck, 1 District
Chief
Page 12 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
III.
OEA INFORMATION
A. All communications between OEA Tower and OFD will be made using OEA
ground control radios on frequency 121.4 unless OEA assigns another frequency.
Frequency 118.7 will be monitored between 2300 and 0600 hours due to Tower
being closed.
B. Frequency 118.7 is monitored by OIA and is used as a talk around between the
pilots to communicate their approaches for landing. If the runway is not being
used and there are no communications over 118.7 for 15 minutes, the runway
lights will turn off.
C. When the 118.7 frequency is keyed up by aircraft: 1419, C-6, E-6, or T-6, the
runway lights will turn back on.
D. If communications fail between OFD Units (C-6, E-6, T-6) and the tower during
tower hours, the following designated light system will be used by the Tower:
IV.
1. Flashing GREEN:
You have clearance.
2. Flashing RED:
Stop, do not proceed.
3. Flashing RED:
Clear the runway.
4. Flashing WHITE:
Return to Station or starting point.
5. Alternating RED & GREEN
Use extreme caution.
APPROACH
A. Utilize wind and terrain (uphill, upwind when possible).
B. Approach private/commercial aircraft from front or rear; avoid wings and fuel
tanks.
C. Military aircraft should be approached from a 45-degree angle to the fuselage due
to probability of both forward and rear firing ordinances.
Page 13 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
V.
POSITION
A. Place apparatus in most effective position; close enough for turret operations and
rapid mass application.
1. Crash-6:
Foam operation for fire/fuel tank
2. First Engine:
Handline foam operation/rescue
3. Second Engine:
Water supply
4. First Truck:
Extrication/rescue
5. First Rescue:
Medical
6. Heavy Rescue:
Assist first Truck
B. Attack and control
1. Utilize Crash-6
2. Protect fuselage (mass application).
3. Establish and maintain rescue/evacuation path to the fuselage.
4. Cover spill area with AFFF.
5. Pull backup lines to protect from flashback.
6. With heavy involvement, do not attempt complete extinguishment until rescue
is complete.
7. Use AFFF wisely to protect occupant environment.
Note: When aircraft fuselage is engulfed in flames, 90 seconds is about all you
have to make a knockdown and rescue before fuselage burns through and
conditions are impossible for occupants to survive.
Page 14 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
C. Extrication
1. During rescue operations, use in order:
a. Normal exits
b. Emergency exits
c. Cut-in areas
d. Utilize at least two-man rescue teams.
e. Transport occupants to a safe area.
f. Stay clear of props, jet intakes, and exhaust.
g. Wear full protective gear and PBA.
h. Familiarize yourself with all OEA aircraft and transient type aircraft.
i. Coordinated team efforts are imperative for successful aircraft rescue.
D. Extinguishment.
1. Ordinarily, complete extinguishment is not attempted until rescue operation is
completed due to:
a. Manpower constraints
b. Undetermined length of time needed for rescue; conservation of agent is
vital
Note: There are times when the situation will justify complete
extinguishment and rescue at the same time.
E. Overhaul
1. Thorough inspection of entire aircraft and surrounding area
2. Protect from flashback
Page 15 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
3. Important items to be checked:
a. Battery terminals disconnected and secured
b. Hot spots cooled down
c. Fuel spills and fuel vapors
d. Use care to avoid disturbing evidence that may aid crash investigation
team in determining cause of accident.
Note: Teamwork is important in all firefighting activities, but in crash
firefighting and rescue, where time is a definite factor, the degree of success
depends entirely upon teamwork. The coordinated efforts of a well-trained
aircraft Rescue Firefighting Team are the best bets of saving lives.
VI.
TYPES OF CRASH SCENES ENCOUNTERED
A. High Impact
1. Structural breakup of the aircraft – survivors highly unlikely due to impact
trauma
2. Explosion and intense fire – probable
Example: Nose dive crash results in a large crater containing fuselage and
engine fuel. Survivors are not likely. Crater may be as deep as 20 feet. Foam
seal should be placed over wreckage.
B. Low Impact
1. Lower speed, lower angle
2. High walk away rate, many non-fatal injuries if fire doesn‟t block escape
3. High probability of fuel spill and fire
4. Rescue of occupants – prime consideration
5. Cuts wide swath, expect exposure fires and casualties
Page 16 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
C. Water Crash
1. Fuel on surface of water – blanket with foam if possible.
2. Wreckage may be floating due to trapped air pockets.
3. If entry is to be made into aircraft, enter below water line.
4. Be aware of the hazards of chemical burns from fuel in water.
5. Use slow approach by boat due to probability of victims in water.
6. Flight recorders – if found, they should be placed in same water as found in.
D. Cartwheel Crash
1. Expect scattered victims.
E. Hot Brakes
1. Peak temperature on brakes will not be reached until 10-15 minutes after
aircraft has stopped.
2. Hot brakes will normally cool down by themselves without use of any
extinguishing agent.
3. If approach is to be made, approach from front or rear, AVOID SIDES OF
WHEEL.
4. Use “Thermometer gun” to check brake temperature.
5. A fan may be used to cool brakes, place at front or rear, blowing air between
wheel and brake caliber.
6. Most large aircraft have fusible links on the wheels that melt at about 350
degrees, releasing air pressure. At this point, the risk of wheel explosion is
negated.
Page 17 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
F. Wheel Fire
1. Remember that rapid cooling of the wheel may cause explosive wheel failure.
2. Keep personnel and equipment away from line of detonation (300 feet or
more).
3. Attack from front or rear.
4. Use dry chemical or halon type extinguishers. DO NOT USE CO2!
5. Fine water spray may be used in short bursts.
6. Solid streams used as a last resort.
7. Hydraulic systems fires
a. Approach upwind.
b. Use SCBA – at high temps Skydrol decomposes and will cause severe eye
and respiratory tract irritation.
c. Dry chemical and halon extinguishers effective
VII.
AVIATION FUEL
A. Two basic types: AVGAS (high octane gasoline) and JET A or JP1 (kerosene
grade):
1. AVGAS: High octane gasoline, 100-145 octane; flashpoint at 50 degrees
Fahrenheit; flammability limits from 1% to 7%; flame spread 700 to 800 feet
per minute; auto ignition occurs between 825 to 960 degrees Fahrenheit
2. JET A or JP1: Kerosene grade fuel; flashpoint at 95 to 145 degrees
Fahrenheit; flammability limits just under 1% to 5%; auto ignition
temperature range from 440 to 475 Fahrenheit; flame spread rate less than 100
feet per minute; overall the safest aviation fuel
Note: Jet fuels are of a lower volatility than AVGAS under normal conditions.
However, in an aircraft crash and fire, the impact will cause the fuel to
atomize; the fuel mist will then ignite readily and propagate rapid-fire spread.
Page 18 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
VIII.
AIRCRAFT FAMILIARIZATION
A. Familiarize personnel with the following OEA aircraft:
1. Battery locations and disconnect
2. Onboard fire system controls
3. Fluid transfer shutoffs
4. Oil tank locations
5. Hydraulic tanks and lines
6. Emergency hatch operation
7. Ignition switches
8. Cut-in areas
9. Hazmat locations
10. Dangerous cargo
11. Auxiliary power unit location
IX.
PROCEDURE FOR CRASH INVOLVING NUCLEAR WEAPONS
A. The possibility of a nuclear explosion from the detonation of a nuclear weapon
involved in a crash and fire is practically non-existent due to safeguards built into
these weapon systems. However, you should be aware that most nuclear weapons
contain conventional type explosive charges for initial detonation.
B. Rescue occupants/attack fire (remember risk versus gain – Officer must decide
whether it would be more prudent to withdraw).
C. Notify military authorities (ordinance disposal team) and FAA.
D. Have Hazmat Team respond (be prepared to set up decontamination area).
E. Clear area of all non-essential personnel 2000 feet or more.
F. Evacuate downwind area.
G. Avoid smoke – personnel exposed need to report to decontamination team.
Page 19 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
H. Secure area (OPD).
I. Follow advice of special teams.
J. Do not attempt cleanup of accident.
Note: For more information on nuclear weapons involved in crashes, refer to IFSTA
206).
X.
CRASH-6 RESPONSE OFF AIRPORT PROPERTY
In the event an aircraft crashes on approach or after take-off, Crash-6 will respond to the
incident if within one mile of OEA. If it is more than one mile from OEA, it will be a
Command consideration as to the response of Crash-6.
XI.
OEA GATES
Gate
Location
Used By:
E-1
Humphries Ave.
Engine-4 and Station #6
E-2
Rickenbacker Dr.
Station #6
E-3
Calvin Ave. and Concord St
Station #6
E-4
East of Showalter
Station #6
E-5
West of Showalter
Station #6
E-8
North of OSCO Hanger
Station #6
E-9
Amelia & Maguire
Station #1
E-10
Amelia
N/A
E-11
Robinson & Maguire
Station #1 and #11
E-14
Tower
Station #6
Page 20 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
XII.
AIRPORT LIGHTING SYSTEM
A. BLUE:
Taxiway and ramps: about 100 feet to 200 feet apart
B. WHITE:
Active runway: 200 feet apart
C. GREEN:
Threshold lights at ends of runway
D. RED:
Marks obstructions: such as building construction areas
E. AMBER:
Marks departure ends of runway: spaced 200 feet apart
Page 21 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
Page 22 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
Page 23 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
LARGE VEHICLE FIRES – HIGH SPEED ROADWAYS
I.
EXPRESSWAYS
A. Expressway incidents are most likely to include vehicle fires and/or accidents with
injuries. Major potential also exists for multiple injury situations, fires,
flammable/hazardous liquid spills, or hazardous materials incidents.
B. This plan provides specific guidelines and procedures to be used in handling incidents
occurring on the expressway system. Unless specifically superseded by this plan, all
other OFD procedures shall be used in operations occurring on expressways.
C. Expressway is defined in this section as: Interstate-4, East-West Expressway/408 and
Beltway Connectors, Beeline/528, State Roads 435/Kirkman road, Highway
436/Semoran Blvd., 417/Greenway, and the Florida Turnpike.
II.
DISPATCH INFORMATION
A. When dispatching an incident on the Expressway, the Communications Center will
provide the following information:
1. Type of incident
2. Location
3. Direction of travel
a. If direction is unknown or if information indicates difficulty can be expected
in reaching or locating the scene, the Communications Center may dispatch a
second Engine Company in the opposite direction from the first.
4. Traffic conditions, if known
III.
RESPONSE
A. The following assignments will normally be dispatched on Expressway incidents:
1. Accident with injuries: 1 Engine, 1 Rescue.
2. Single vehicle fire (including small trucks and SUVs): 1 Engine and 1 Tower
Company for high speed roadways.
3. Trucks larger than pickups and vans (including motor homes): First Alarm, 2
Engines, 1 Tower Company, 1 Heavy Rescue and 1 District Chief.
Page 24 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
4. Hazardous materials incident, flammable liquids, etc. – Full First Alarm, E-101
and HM-1.
IV.
COMPANY OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The Company Officer on a responding Unit is responsible for redirecting other
Companies or having Communications dispatch additional Companies if it becomes
apparent that the first Company will be unable to reach the incident due to traffic
congestion. It is the responsibility of the first Unit to provide specific directions
regarding approach and direction for other Companies when problems are
encountered.
B. The first Unit arriving on the scene of a multiple Unit incident will give an initial
report. The initial report should include:
1. Unit identification
2. Brief description of situation and action taken
3. Traffic conditions:
a. Stopped
b. One lane open
c. All lanes open
C. A follow-up report should indicate:
1. Injuries/number of patients ALS or BLS
2. Number of transport Units needed
3. Extrication needed
4. Evacuation
5. Hazardous materials spill
6. Call for additional help and/or alarms
D. Liaison with OFD‟s Freeway Management Representative
1. It will be the responsibility of the first due Company Officer to report to
Communications, who will in turn notify OFD‟s representative on the Tri-county
Freeway Taskforce when:
Page 25 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
a. Any portion of any Expressway is closed for 30 minutes or more for any
reason.
b. Whenever there is a complete closure of all lanes in any one direction,
regardless of the duration.
c. Attempts should be made to open a closed section of an Expressway as soon
as possible. This could include the removal of the accident vehicles, or the
removal of the hazardous materials to the median or the shoulder area,
whenever necessary.
V.
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
A. Some typical problems that must be considered:
1. Early call for additional manpower to handle lines that may have to be extended
long distances, over many obstacles
2. Relay pumping probabilities
3. Special equipment needs (tankers, foam, sand, wreckers, etc.)
4. Early call for traffic control
5. Sewer (when dealing with spilled products)
6. Peak traffic hours
7. Access to the Expressway (ladders, on/off ramps, etc.)
8. Liquid transfer equipment
B. Drainage
1. In cases of flammable liquid or hazardous substance spills on the Expressway,
particular attention must be paid to drainage. Contact Bureau of Streets and
Drainage for assistance.
C. Crossing the Median
1. Caution shall be used in crossing the median. Cross only at dry, solid, location,
cross at an angle to the median, beware of oncoming traffic. It is better to go to
the next exit, get off, and then re-enter the Expressway headed in the proper
direction, than to get stuck.
Page 26 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
VI.
APPARATUS PLACEMENT
A. Place apparatus between you and the oncoming traffic. Employ rear lights, flares,
reflectors, or cones. Traffic control and warning devices should be left to OPD
whenever possible. The use of front warning lights tends to confuse oncoming traffic.
Communicate with OPD whenever flammable liquid leaks and spills, etc., are present
with regard to using flares.
B. Leave a person (usually the Engineer) to watch the traffic and set up warning devices.
Parking brakes are to be set, and the apparatus set with the wheels at an angle to the
side.
C. Consider parking above or below (on access road) if the traffic conditions are such
that entry is impossible or difficult.
D. Where the Expressway is elevated, a ladder is effective to gain access and to effect
evacuation from above.
E. Only the apparatus that is absolutely necessary shall be taken onto the Expressway.
F. Position apparatus safely, directly behind the accident scene, to protect Crews
working. Ensure that all lanes being used by crews are protected with properly placed
apparatus.
G. Do your job as rapidly as possible, and then clear the traffic lanes.
H. A Truck Company spotted on the access road will usually provide the best method of
advancing a line to an elevated section of the Expressway.
I. In sections of depressed roadway, it is faster to have a Company above “drop” a line
than to have one advanced up the slope.
J. Several sections of the Expressway have no access roads and will require laying hose
for long distances from on-ramps, if a supply line is needed. Relay pumping and
tankers should be considered in these cases.
VII.
HIGHWAY STANDPIPE CONNECTIONS
A. There are numerous dry standpipes located on SR 408 and I-4.
B. The connections vary from a pedestal, wall mount, built into the earthen overpass and
manhole/subsurface locations.
C. All standpipe locations are identified with blue reflective hydrant road markers.
D. Unit Objectives
Page 27 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
1. First Engine
a. Size-up and make an accurate arrival report to include the type of hazard
involved and the size and type of vehicle (e.g., tractor trailer, fuel tanker, etc.).
b. If a water supply is needed and the proximity to a highway standpipe is
favorable, request a second Engine if not previously committed, to provide the
appropriate water supply to the FDC.
c. Remove the cap at the standpipe discharge and allow the supply Engine to
flush the pipe to ensure that no foreign objects are in the way.
d. After the line is flushed, a 4-inch supply line will be utilized to begin attack
operations.
2. Second Engine
a. Confirm the correct standpipe location with the first Engine.
b. Establish the supply line with the standpipe connection and await direction
from the first Engine to flush the standpipe.
c. After flushing the standpipe, briefly delay supply until the first Engine directs
to begin the operation.
d. Due to the proximity of most hydrants to the FDC, the second Engine will
typically be able to establish the water supply and pump the Humat if
necessary.
e. In cases when the hydrant supply is a great distance from the FDC and/or
greater supply pressures are required, a third Engine may be utilized to lay the
supply line and pump the Humat to the second Engine.
f. The length and elevation of each standpipe is unique; therefore, pump
pressures will vary. However, the recommendation for the supply Engines will
be to begin pumping the system at 150 PSI for elevated locations.
VIII.
COMMAND CONSIDERATIONS
A. Command will need to confirm the identity of the attack (first Engine) and the supply
(second Engine) and the appropriate standpipe locations to ensure a smooth operation.
B. Consider the addition of a third Engine to pump the hydrant or assist with the supply
line if distance or pump pressure dictate it.
C. Command Post Location
Page 28 of 29
SPECIALTY FIREFIGHTING
1. The Command Post location should be carefully chosen for major incidents to
provide access and a good view of the scene.
2. The access road or an overpass provides a view of the scene for incidents on
depressed roadway sections.
D. Liaison with OPD
1. Command will establish liaison with OPD at the scene as quickly as possible. In
serious incidents, an Officer with a portable radio shall be designated to
specifically handle OPD Liaison Group.
2. The primary responsibilities of the liaison with OPD include: traffic control,
directing the approach of resources needed at the scene, and crowd control. OPD
can also provide some resources from the State Highway Department and heavy
wreckers.
3. OPD will shut down the Expressway completely when OFD Command feels the
situation requires this action.
Page 29 of 29
DIVIDER
7. SPECIAL OPERATIONS/HAZMAT
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
I.
INTRODUCTION
A. To establish guidelines for the evaluation and safe handling of Hazardous Materials
incidents.
B. Hazards involved may include toxicity, flammability, radiological hazards,
corrosives, explosives, health hazards, chemical reactions, oxygen deficiency, and
combinations of factors.
C. The goals are to:
1. Isolate/Deny Entry
2. Identify
3. Emergency Decontamination
4. Mitigation/Stabilization (Hazardous Materials Team Goal)
II.
POLICY
A. It shall be the policy of the Orlando Fire Department to follow these procedures in the
handling of Hazardous Material incidents and to ensure the safety of the personnel
and citizens.
B. Definitions
Page 1 of 23
SPECIAL OPERATIONS/HAZMAT
1. Training Levels
a. Awareness Level: Discover/Notifies
b. Operations Level: Respond Defensively. OFD personnel are trained to this
level.
c. Technician Level: Offensive operation to mitigate hazard. OFD Hazardous
Materials Team trained to this level.
d. Specialist Level: Support for technician level. Trained above the technician
level and specialize in a particular field, i.e., WMD, railcars.
e. Incident Command: District Chief and above will assume Command
responsibilities.
C. Zone Identification
1. Hazard Zones:
a. Hot Zone: Area where hazardous material is located.
b. Warm Zone: Transition area between the Hot and Cold Zones.
c. Cold Zone: Area beyond the range of potential contamination.
d. Evacuation Area (Isolation Perimeter): Line between the general public and
outside edge of the cold zone. Designated crowd control line surrounding the
hazard.
D. Identification and Reference
1. Placards: Diamond-shaped signs (10-3/4 inches each side) that generally must be
affixed to each side and end of vehicles carrying hazardous materials.
2. Labels: Four-inch diamond-shaped that are affixed to non-bulk packages of
hazardous materials.
3. NFPA 704: Marking system for fixed site facility to indicate the dangers
associated with various hazardous materials handled at a location.
4. Emergency Response Guidebook (ERG): Reference book available to assist in
identifying hazardous materials. There is an ERG on each OFD apparatus.
Page 2 of 23
SPECIAL OPERATIONS/HAZMAT
5. Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS): Facilities are required to keep this
information for all hazardous materials handled and stored at the facility. MSDS
can provide information on the physical and chemical properties of the material,
the hazard associated, and the basic directions for response action.
6. Florida Field Operations Guide (FOG) Manual
III.
PROCEDURE
A. Upon arrival of first OFD Unit:
1. Size up the situation.
a. The first Unit must avoid committing itself to a dangerous situation.
b. When approaching, slow down or stop to assess any visible activity taking
place.
c. Evaluate the effects of the wind, topography and location of the situation.
d. A hazardous materials incident requires a more cautious and deliberate size-up
than most fire situations.
e. Avoid premature commitment of Companies and personnel to potentially
hazardous locations.
f. In many cases, evaluation by hazardous materials team members before
committing is the safest approach.
B. Operations Level Companies
1. Operations trained Companies may only provide DEFENSIVE type of activities
at the scene of Hazmat emergencies. These include, but are not limited to:
a. Identify the chemical – Proper identification of material involved is essential
to decide on safe tactics to handle any hazardous materials incident. Use:
1) Placards
2) Labels
3) Container shapes and size
4) Type of occupancy
5) MSDS sheets
Page 3 of 23
SPECIAL OPERATIONS/HAZMAT
6) ERG – if an unknown, use Guide 111
7) Shipping papers
-
Truck: “Bill of Lading” and is kept in the cab within reach of the
driver
-
Railroad: “Waybill” and is carried by the conductor in the caboose or
engine
-
Aircraft: “Air bill” and is kept by the pilot
2. All information gathered shall be transmitted to the Hazmat Officer by radio. This
should include the following:
a. Name of material involved
b. Four-digit UN number
c. Quantity
d. Type of release (explosive, leaking valve, broken bag, etc.)
e. Color of vapor or material
f. Whether the material is fuming or not
g. The reaction with surrounding material
h. Ask personnel on the scene (plant management, responsible party, driver, etc),
if they have information, and have them report to the Command Post.
i. Any other information that may be pertinent (a series of numbers and letters
may be valuable to trained personnel).
3. Do not assume. Lack of a recognizable sign does not mean that there are no
hazards.
4. Determine hazard and evacuation zones.
a. If persons are in immediate danger, begin evacuation immediately.
b. Ensure that no one enters the hazard zone until the product is identified and
the danger evaluated.
Page 4 of 23
SPECIAL OPERATIONS/HAZMAT
c. Any member, who is exposed prior to recognition of the hazardous material,
should be isolated until proper information is available.
d. Large-scale operations, refer to Police Liaison SOP.
5. Cooling containers
a. Use adequate water supply.
b. Use unmanned streams if deemed a great danger.
c. Operate from upwind and uphill.
d. Use natural barriers to protect personnel.
e. Apply heavy streams to vapor space.
Note: the objective is to cool containers and not extinguish any vented gases.
6. Provide a foam blanket on fuels or other hydrocarbons to eliminate flammable
vapor production.
7. Remove ignition sources.
a. Start downwind
b. Eliminate all sources of heat, spark, and friction.
8. Call for additional resources.
a. When the need is anticipated.
b. The actions taken by Command in the first few minutes of an incident affects
the outcome more than any other single factor.
9. Decontamination
C. Technical Level
1. Technician trained Companies (Hazmat Team) may provide OFFENSIVE
measures within the hazard zone.
a. Remove uninvolved materials.
- Move individual containers.
- Move tank cars away from flame.
- Cool containers before moving.
Page 5 of 23
SPECIAL OPERATIONS/HAZMAT
b. Close valves.
- Place plug in openings.
- Place container in an upright position.
- Use water spray to approach leak.
c. Apply dilution or neutralizing agent.
- Dilute water-soluble liquids.
- Flush corrosives to reduce danger.
- Use spray streams to absorb vapors.
- Use water with caution on some materials.
d. Other advanced procedures as determined by Command.
e. E101‟s Officer will be considered the Hazmat Officer and the responding
Hazmat Tower‟s Officer will be considered the Safety Officer.
IV.
SUSPECTED CLANDESTINE LABS
A. Initial arriving Units at a suspected clandestine lab will contact E101‟s Officer and
OPD to determine the appropriate actions necessary to establish a perimeter and/or
control run-off. Some indicators that a meth lab is present are as follows:
1. Unusually strong odors, blacked out windows, excessive trash containing
antifreeze containers, lantern fuel cans, red chemically stained coffee filters, drain
cleaner and duct tape, etc.
B. In the absence of any rescue situations and after confirmation of the lab by E101‟s
Officer, the scene will immediately be turned over to OPD for their investigation and
processing.
V.
COMMAND CONSIDERATIONS
A. Based on the initial size-up, information available, and recommendations from the
Hazmat Officer, Command will formulate an action plan to deal with the situation.
B. Command must focus on confinement, containment, and/or control of the materials in
such a way as to save lives and prevent unnecessary exposure of on-scene or nearby
personnel (including citizens, Firefighters, law enforcement and EMS) to the adverse
effects of the involved materials. Objectives must also provide for the protection of
uninvolved property and the environment.
C. There will be times when there is an immediate life hazard that may have to be dealt
with. In such cases, the best available protective clothing must be used along with
positive pressure masks. Before attempting rescue, evaluate the risk and
Page 6 of 23
SPECIAL OPERATIONS/HAZMAT
compounding of the problem by exposing improperly equipped members. While
some risks may be justified, it must be weighed against the expected results.
Page 7 of 23
SPECIAL OPERATIONS/HAZMAT
NATURAL GAS/PROPANE
I.
INTRODUCTION
A. Orlando Fire Department Units may encounter natural gas in a variety of situations.
Each will present a different set of problems and hazards. The following guidelines
will be applicable in the majority of situations, but do not replace good judgment and
experience in dealing with any particular incident.
B. Natural gas is much lighter than air and will usually dissipate rapidly in the outside
environment. Inside buildings, however, it tends to pocket, particularly in attics and
dead space. The flammable limits are approximately 5% to 15% in the air. Natural
gas itself is non-toxic; however, it displaces oxygen and can result in asphyxiation if
in a confined space. Flammable gas ranges can only be determined by a combustible
gas instrument (CGI). There are CGIs on several Units throughout the city.
Note: If the leak is in a confined space and has displaced the oxygen, the CGI will not
give an accurate reading until the oxygen is in a normal range.
C. Burning natural gas should not normally be extinguished, since this would change the
situation from a visible to invisible hazard with explosive potential. Fires should be
controlled by stopping the flow.
D. Approach to the incident should be from upwind. Utilize wind speed/direction from
dispatch and observe any on-scene indicators (trees, flags and any other items that
may show direction).
II.
INCIDENTS WHERE AN EXPLOSION HAS OCCURRED
A. Units arriving at a scene of a structural explosion must consider natural gas as a
possible cause. Underground leaks may permit gas to travel considerable distances
before entering a structure through the foundation, around pipes or through void
spaces. In these circumstances, the cause of the explosion may be difficult to
determine.
1. Until it can be determined that the area is safe from the danger of further
explosions, evacuate all civilians and keep the number of OFD and gas company
personnel in the area to the minimum number necessary to stabilize the situation.
2. Don‟t rely on gas odor. Use a CGI to check all suspected areas. The gas company
and several OFD Units carry CGIs.
3. Check areas systematically using a CGI. Start outside of the area of the explosion
and move into the area until readings indicate a detectable concentration. Map the
readings for the affected area and pass it on to Command and Hazmat.
Page 8 of 23
SPECIAL OPERATIONS/HAZMAT
4. If the gas concentration is encountered inside, adjacent to, or underneath any
building, secure all possible sources of ignition in the affected area. Cut electricity
from outside the affected area to avoid arcing. Ventilate buildings where gas is
found with explosion-proof blowers only. Never enter inside when CGI is
alarming for LEL. Ventilate first and wait for Hazmat.
5. The use of ground probes is essential to evaluate potential underground leaks. The
gas company or Hazmat will do these.
6. Command shall provide for effective interaction between gas company personnel
and the fire department. The Hazmat Officer should be the liaison with the gas
company.
7. Command must ensure the safety and stability of the structure. If further collapse
is possible, the Heavy Rescue with whatever other resources necessary should
provide shoring, cribbing or other means of stabilizing the structure. Code
Enforcement should be notified.
III.
INCIDENT INVOLVING A GAS LEAK WITH NO FIRE OR EXPLOSION
A. Calls for “gas leak”, gas odor”, “broken gas line” and similar situations may range
from minor to a potentially major incident. All these should be approached as
potentially dangerous situations.
B. With gas company personnel on the scene of an incident, it shall be standard
procedure for the first due Unit to provide effective interaction between agencies
until the arrival of the Hazmat Officer. The gas company and/or the first arriving
OFD Unit with a CGI shall obtain a sufficient number of gas concentration readings
for Command to evaluate the hazard and take appropriate action. (With these
readings, a proper isolation perimeter can be established.)
C. In all cases, OFD Units shall take whatever actions are necessary to provide for life
safety and property conservation.
D. A minimum number of personnel should be allowed to enter the area (Hazmat team
members and/or the gas company) to size-up the situation while other units stage in a
location out of the potentially dangerous zone.
E. Provide standby protection with a charged 1-3/4 inch handline (fog nozzle) and a dry
chemical extinguisher. Crews shall be in full protective equipment and SCBA.
Crews should position themselves upwind.
Note: Don’t flush the hydrant or bleed lines near the hole that the gas is leaking
from and prevent it from traveling downhill towards the hole.
Page 9 of 23
SPECIAL OPERATIONS/HAZMAT
F. Evacuate any civilians in the area of escaping gas.
G. Attempt to locate the source of the gas and any shutoff devices available to isolate
and control the leak, i.e. water heater, stove, dryer, etc.
H. In gas leak situations within a building, where the source of the leak is unknown or
uncontrolled, the gas supply shall be shut off at the meter. Command shall ensure the
meter is locked off until repairs are complete. The gas company or Hazmat will have
locks for the meters.
I. If there are any indications of gas accumulating within a building, evacuate civilians
from the structure and control ignition sources. Check the areas with a CGI.
Ventilate using explosion proof blowers, if necessary.
J. If the gas leak is outside, the gas will normally rise and dissipate rapidly depending
on the size of the leak. This can be confirmed with a CGI and perimeters can be
established.
Note: If next to a highrise, the gas will travel up and possibly to an ignition source.
IV.
PERSONNEL SAFETY
A. All personnel working in the vicinity of a known or suspected gas leak shall wear full
protective clothing with SCBA (this includes gas company personnel). Personnel
working in a suspected ignitable atmosphere shall be backed up by a manned
protective handline. The number of exposed personnel will be kept to an absolute
minimum.
V.
PROPANE EMERGENCIES
A. Propane emergencies will be handled similar to natural gas emergencies. The big
difference with propane is that it is heavier than air (approximately 1-1/2 times), so
propane will not rise, but will remain low. Since it will remain low, it will travel to
potential ignition sources. The flammable limits for propane are approximately 2.5%
to 9.5%.
B. Propane and natural gas have a similar odorant added to them and it is difficult to tell
the difference by smell. It is critical that the gas be identified for tactical
considerations.
C. Propane can be dispersed with hose streams, if necessary, to prevent it from traveling
toward an ignition source.
Page 10 of 23
SPECIAL OPERATIONS/HAZMAT
VI.
COMMAND CONSIDERATIONS
A. Based on the initial size-up, information available, and recommendations from the
Hazmat Officer, Command will formulate an action plan to deal with the situation.
B. Command must focus on confinement, containment, and/or control of the gas in such
a way as to save lives and prevent explosions or fire.
Page 11 of 23
SPECIAL OPERATIONS/HAZMAT
RADIOLOGICAL RESPONSE
I.
INTRODUCTION
A. This procedure is designed to provide basic operational guidelines for managing a
radiological incident. A radiological incident encompasses a situation where
radiological survey instrument readings indicate levels that are above background
level (City of Orlando area normal background is 0.01mR/hr to 0.05mr/hr) from a
legitimate radiological source and the source has not been released from its container.
A second survey instrument to establish the situation as a “radiological incident” must
confirm initial reading instruments.
B. Radiological incidents may involve above-background readings from:
1. Occupancies and locations:
a. Medical facilities – radiation therapy (cancer treatment),
radiopharmaceuticals, medical waste, blood irradiators.
b. Research facilities and testing laboratories (water and wastewater labs, soils
and materials testing labs, etc.)
c. Industry sites – radiography, food irradiators, construction sites.
2. Containers/packages
a. Containers used to ship or store radioactive materials may emit an allowable
amount of radiation as identified in the Transport Index and Shipping
Manifest.
3. Recipients of medical procedures involving nuclear medicine.
a. Instrument may alarm if it is near someone who has undergone a medical
treatment involving radiation, such as a thallium-201 stress test or cancer
treatment.
4. Building materials and equipment
a. Granite
b. Tile
c. Radiological metering equipment
Page 12 of 23
SPECIAL OPERATIONS/HAZMAT
5. Commercial items
a. Smoke detectors
b. Moisture density gauges
C. A radiological emergency encompasses a situation where radiological instrument
readings indicate levels above background levels from a source that is out of its
container, either accidentally or intentionally. Fire department responsibilities during
radiological emergencies include: rescue, treatment, fire control/extinguishment,
control of contamination spread, and alerting responsible experts/agencies. Actual
clean-up and overhaul operations will not normally be a fire department
responsibility, although OFD will be responsible for seeing that such operations are
completed. Shippers and/or manufacturers of radiological materials will normally be
responsible for clean-up operations, using trained clean-up personnel and equipment.
1. An accidental radiological emergency involves a legitimate source of radiation
that has been released from its protective container. Examples include the
following:
a. Release at a medical facility, research facility, or construction site
b. Release during transport
c. Breach in package
d. Inappropriate packaging for the material
e. Readings above Transport Index
f. A package containing radiological material that is involved in a fire
g. Orphan source – An orphan source is an abandoned radiological source where
ownership is not known or available and there is no criminal intent.
2. Examples of intentional radiological emergencies would include the following:
a. Radiological dispersion device (RDD)
1) Explosions (dirty bomb)
2) Mechanical sprayers
3) Aerial delivery
Page 13 of 23
SPECIAL OPERATIONS/HAZMAT
4) Intentional breach
b. Radiological Exposure Devices (RED)
1) Secretly hidden point source
c. Radiological material involved in an intentionally set fire
d. Elevated radiological meter readings at multiple locations (indicating a spill or
dispersal of a radiological source)
II.
PROCEDURE
A. At the scene, Command must consider both direct radiation exposure and
contamination. If there is no life hazard, rescue situation or fire, there is no reason to
risk exposure of fire department personnel. First arriving Units should secure a
perimeter, evaluate the situation and wait for the arrival of the Hazardous Materials
Team.
B. If the immediate commitment of personnel is necessary, an isolation perimeter shall
be implemented to minimize the exposure and contain the spread of contamination.
C. The entry of personnel shall be limited to the absolute minimum number and time
required for the urgent situation. These personnel will use full protective clothing and
SCBA. Follow the self-protection concept of “Time-Distance-Shielding.”
D. Any commitment of personnel to the isolation perimeter, after any lifesaving
measures, shall include at least one survey instrument per team to monitor radiation
hazard levels. Dosimeters shall be issued to all personnel operating at the scene.
E. Hazard Zone tape shall be stretched to define an area where readings of 2mR/hr are
detectable. This must take into account potential downwind spread of contamination.
Hazardous Materials Team personnel will determine readings and define the isolation
perimeter.
F. A Decontamination Area must be established within the perimeter of the Hot Zone,
adjacent to the entrance/exit point. Qualified personnel must check all personnel and
equipment leaving the Hot Zone for radioactive contamination. All persons or items
must go to the Decontamination Area before leaving the Hot Zone.
G. When a radiological incident is confirmed, the Hazmat Officer will notify:
1. Department of Health – Bureau of Radiation Control
2. Orange County Environmental Protection Division
Page 14 of 23
SPECIAL OPERATIONS/HAZMAT
3. State Warning Point
III.
TACTICAL CONSIDERATIONS
A. Incidents with fire:
1. Initiate tactical firefighting operations.
2. Always approach from upwind.
3. Do not ventilate.
4. Minimize the use of water.
5. Control water run-off impound for disposal.
6. Minimize exposure of personnel.
7. Use full protective clothing with SCBA.
B. Rescue/EMS Incidents:
1. Remove patients quickly.
2. Treat patients for medical problems/injuries.
3. Alert hospitals to prepare for contaminated patients.
4. Use full protective clothing and SCBA.
5. Decontaminate vehicles used to transport once the event is over.
C. Considerations for an Intentional Radiation Release:
1. The presence of secondary threats (meant to harm emergency responders)
2. The presence of a multi-hazard release (combined radiological and chemical
device, radiological and explosive device)
3. Request additional OPD officers.
4. Consider a more secure area for the Command Post/staging area/safe refuge area.
5. Crime scene preservation
6. Specialized resources and subject matter experts applicable to the treat
Page 15 of 23
SPECIAL OPERATIONS/HAZMAT
7. Sheltering in place versus evacuation
IV.
TREATMENT OF CONTAMINATED PATIENTS
A. Do not delay field treatment of injuries. Radiological contamination itself is not a
medical emergency. Treatment of contaminated patients should proceed with the
following precautions:
1. All contaminated patients should be placed in one Treatment Area, separate from
non-contaminated patients, within the Hot Zone perimeter, but beyond the 2mR/hr
exposure distance.
2. All treatment personnel should use full PPE and SCBA.
3. A mask or other airway filtering means should be used on the patient to limit
inhalation/ingestion of airborne contamination.
4. Bandage all open wounds as quickly as possible to prevent wound contamination.
5. Removed clothing, watches and wallets must be placed in plastic bags or other
appropriate containers. They should be sealed and properly identified.
6. A clean plastic bag or other clothing should be placed over the patient‟s scalp hair
to minimize the spread of contamination. Do not cover face.
7. Much of the contamination on a patient‟s skin can be removed by wiping with a
moist cloth or tape (put in plastic bag afterwards).
8. Hot spots of contamination on the patient‟s body that cannot be removed by
wiping, etc., should be marked with ink or tape.
9. Before transporting, all contaminated patients must be wrapped in blankets or
sheets to completely cover them in order to limit the spread of contamination.
Only the face should be left exposed.
10. Hospitals and Rescues must be alerted early and before patient transportation is
initiated so they can prepare to receive radioactive contaminated patients.
11. All contaminated patients should be sent to a single hospital or as few as possible.
Once contaminated, these hospitals could be out-of-service for some time.
12. When there are large numbers of contaminated patients, place as many patients as
possible in each Rescue to minimize contamination spread to other Rescues.
Page 16 of 23
SPECIAL OPERATIONS/HAZMAT
13. Use of contaminated Rescues for contaminated patient transport should be
considered. If all available Rescues become contaminated, these vehicles can be
out-of-service for long periods of time until they can be decontaminated.
14. Before personnel can be released from the scene, they must be checked for
contamination and decontaminated. All equipment used in patient treatment must
also be checked and decontaminated. This evaluation will be conducted in the
Decontamination Area.
Note: Handle patients who may be contaminated with caution. Contact with a
contaminated patient and/or their bodily fluids may result in the spread of
radioactive contamination or exposure.
V.
COMMAND CONSIDERATIONS
A. Based on the initial size-up, information available, and recommendations from the
Hazmat Officer, Command will formulate an action plan to deal with the situation.
B. Command must focus on confinement, containment, and/or control of the materials in
such a way as to save lives and prevent unnecessary exposure of on-scene or nearby
personnel (including citizens, Firefighters, law enforcement and EMS) to the adverse
effects of the involved materials. Objectives must also provide for the protection of
uninvolved property and the environment.
C. There will be times when there is an immediate life hazard that may have to be dealt
with. In such cases, the best available protective clothing must be used along with
positive pressure masks. Before attempting rescue, evaluate the risk and
compounding of the problem by exposing improperly equipped members. While
some risks may be justified, it must be weighed against the expected results.
Page 17 of 23
SPECIAL OPERATIONS/HAZMAT
FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS
I.
INTRODUCTION
A. Flammable liquids present particular problems for fire protection, health, safety, and
environmental protection. The frequency of encounters with flammable liquids makes
them a particular concern for the fire department.
B. The main operational problems with flammable liquids are fire extinguishment,
ignition prevention, and disposal of spills. All three of these may be involved in the
same incident.
II.
TACTICAL CONSIDERATIONS
A. Extinguishment
1. The principle agent for flammable liquid firefighting is AFFF/AR foam. This
agent is carried on all Engine Companies and the Foam Trailer. The eduction rate
is 1-3%. Initial attack on any hydrocarbon based flammable liquid fire should be
made an initial rate of 1%.
2. The extinguishing action of Class B Foam is based on its ability to rapidly cover
the flammable liquid surface with a film. This film prevents the escape of
flammable vapors, but may have difficulty sealing against hot metal surfaces. The
application of Class B foam should be gentle to avoid breaking the seal and
agitating the liquid below.
3. Fires involving a large area of burning flammable liquids may exceed the ability
of one handline to extinguish. It may be more important for Command to wait
until two or three Engines are in position with charged lines before initiating a
coordinated attack. Water streams should be used to cool and protect exposures
during the interim.
B. Spills
1. Flammable liquid spills include spills without fire and any fuel remaining after a
fire has been extinguished. In both of these cases, the liquid must be protected to
prevent ignition until it can be picked up or removed. All personnel working
around spills must wear full protective clothing to afford protection in case of
possible ignition. SCBA must be used in vapor areas. Vapor areas can only be
found through the use of combustible gas indicators carried by the Hazardous
Materials Team and several Units throughout the city.
2. Spills of hydrocarbons and other flammable materials usually require notification
of other departments such as the State Warning Point, Orange County
Page 18 of 23
SPECIAL OPERATIONS/HAZMAT
Environmental Protection Division, and Streets and Drainage. Contact the Hazmat
Office for guidance.
a. Cover small spills (<10 gallons) immediately with absorbent to seal vapors
and contain the spill. With large spills, attempt to contain the spill and
consider the use of foam for vapor suppression.
b. Control ignition sources in the area of the spill. Extinguish pilot lights, flares,
open flames, and prohibit smoking. Position vehicles to prevent contact of
vapor with running engines or exhaust. Disconnect electrical power from a
remote location to prevent arc-caused ignition.
c. Do not permit the flammable liquid to run off into storm drains, sewers or
drainage systems. Dam the runoff and cover the spill with foam (if needed)
pending disposal or containment by the Hazmat Team. Consider the use of
charged hoselines, or dirt, to prevent the further spread of spilled material if it
can be done safely.
C. Disposal
1. Large quantity spills will be handled by the Hazmat Team, usually with the aid of
a private contractor.
2. Smaller spills, which cannot be pumped up, must be absorbed using absorbent
materials, such as “spill magic” or booms and pads.
3. The originator of the spill must be given the opportunity to clean up if he can do
so, while adhering to appropriate regulations. Otherwise, a specialized hazardous
materials cleanup contractor will be called.
III.
SAFETY
A. As early as possible, a hazard zone should be established and marked through the use
of fireline tape. This zone should include the spilled material and the area downwind
of the spill for a sufficient distance to account for reasonable vapor travel.
B. All personnel working in the hazard zone must wear full protective clothing,
including SCBA.
C. Unless absolutely necessary, personnel shall not work in a spill area. When this is
necessary to perform a rescue or to control a leak, the spill must be covered with
foam and all possible precautions against ignition must be taken as soon as possible.
The area shall be monitored with a combustible gas indicator.
Page 19 of 23
SPECIAL OPERATIONS/HAZMAT
IV.
COMMAND CONSIDERATIONS
A. Based on the initial size-up, information available, and recommendations from the
Hazmat Officer, Command will formulate an action plan to deal with the situation.
B. Command must focus on confinement, containment, and/or control of the materials in
such a way as to save lives and prevent unnecessary exposure of on-scene or nearby
personnel (including citizens, Firefighters, law enforcement and EMS) to the adverse
effects of the involved materials. Objectives must also provide for the protection of
uninvolved property and the environment.
C. There will be times when there is an immediate life hazard that may have to be dealt
with. In such cases, the best available protective clothing must be used along with
positive pressure masks. Before attempting rescue, evaluate the risk and
compounding of the problem by exposing improperly equipped members. While
some risks may be justified, it must be weighed against the expected results.
Page 20 of 23
SPECIAL OPERATIONS/HAZMAT
DECONTAMINATION
I.
INTRODUCTION
A. The specific measures required to decontaminate personnel, equipment, or apparatus
will vary with the contaminant, the circumstances, and the level of contamination.
These will be considered on a case-by-case basis.
B. Decontamination should begin in the Hot Zone and travel through the Warm Zone,
ending in the Cold Zone.
C. The reason for decontamination is to ensure that any potentially harmful
contaminants or dangerous residues are kept out of the Cold Zone. This would
include residues or contaminants on persons, equipment, or apparatus.
II.
PROCEDURE
A. Decontamination Process
1. The decontamination process will be decided by the Hazmat Officer and
confirmed by Reference.
2. An outside Engine Company will be responsible for setting up and operating the
proper decontamination area. Reference will advise the appropriate PPE for
decontamination.
Page 21 of 23
SPECIAL OPERATIONS/HAZMAT
3. The Hazmat Unit has a decontamination compartment with the equipment and
directions for setting up the different types of decontamination.
4. Any runoff or residue from decontamination procedures must be contained within
the decontamination area (Warm Zone).
5. All tools and equipment needs to be placed in a tool drop at the entrance to the
decontamination area. They will remain isolated until they have been
decontaminated.
B. Emergency/Gross Decontamination
1. This will be performed on civilians or unprotected responders.
2. Emergency decontamination may also be used on a large number of people who
may be encountered during a terrorism incident.
3. Separation of males and females is required for common dignity.
4. Should follow a specific sequence.
a. Dry contaminations should be brushed off the skin.
b. Affected skin and mucous membranes (including the eyes) should be flushed
with water.
c. Outer clothing should be removed.
d. Flush again with water.
e. If the contaminated substance is not water soluble, as with oily materials, the
skin, but not the eyes, should be washed with a solution of liquid soap in
water.
f. Used water and solutions should be contained if possible.
g. Self Decontamination
1) This will be performed by the responder to remove contaminated gear and
clothing in a manner which reduces the risk of exposure and cross
contamination.
C. Mass Decontamination
1. Used on a large number of people who may be encountered during an accidental
or terrorism incident.
Page 22 of 23
SPECIAL OPERATIONS/HAZMAT
2. Mass decontamination may be set up by using Engine Companies with a master
stream device or a mass decontamination tent carried on Foam 1 or the
Decontamination trailer.
D. Technical Decontamination
1. Consists of a three pool system.
2. Used for Hazmat Team members who have made entry, contaminated first
responders or where an incident is small enough that a decontamination tent is not
required.
E. Contaminated Patients
1. Patients in need of medical treatment should be removed as quickly as possible.
2. These patients must not be allowed to contaminate further areas or persons.
3. Patients need to be decontaminated by one of the processes above (depending on
if they are already out of the area or need to be rescued).
4. Depending on the type of contamination, the transport Unit may need to be set up
for protection and the attendants may need PPE.
5. The arriving facility should be notified and have their personnel in appropriate
PPE if applicable. Consider placing the patient in a negative pressure room.
6. Treatment of patients should not be delayed because they are not decontaminated.
Treatment and decontamination may be going on simultaneously.
III.
COMMAND CONSIDERATIONS
A. Based on the initial size-up, information available, and recommendations from the
Hazmat Officer, Command will formulate an action plan to deal with the situation.
B. Command must focus on confinement, containment, and/or decontamination of the
materials in such a way as to save lives and prevent unnecessary exposure of on-scene
or nearby personnel (including citizens, Firefighters, law enforcement and EMS) to
the adverse effects of the involved materials.
C. There will be times when there is an immediate life hazard that may have to be dealt
with. In such cases, the best available protective clothing must be used along with
positive pressure masks. Before attempting rescue, evaluate the risk and
compounding of the problem by exposing improperly equipped members. While
some risks may be justified, it must be weighed against the expected results.
Page 23 of 23
DIVIDER
8. SPECIAL OPERATIONS/TRT
CONFINED SPACE RESCUE
I.
INTRODUCTION
A. A confined space is large enough and so configured that an employee can enter and
perform assigned work. It has limited or restricted means for entry (e.g., tanks,
vessels, silos, storage bins, hoppers, vaults, pipes, and pits). It is not designed for
continuous human occupancy.
B. A Permit Required Confined Space is a space with one or more of the following
characteristics.
1. It contains, or has the potential to contain, a hazardous atmosphere.
2. It contains an airborne combustible dust that meets or exceeds its LFL. The rough
rule is if dust obscures vision at a distance of five feet or less.
3. The atmospheric oxygen is below 19.5% or above 23.5%.
4. It contains a material that has the potential to engulf an entrant.
5. It may entrap or prevent the entrant from exiting under his own power, due to the
internal design of the space.
6. It contains other serious safety or health hazards.
II.
FIRST ENGINE
A. Size up the scene and attempt to make contact with the attendant (co-worker) if one is
present. Attempt to gain information from on scene resources.
B. Look for and secure the entry permit and the MSDS. Determine how many workers
and what kind of work was being conducted in the space.
C. If the space is inside a structure, make sure it is safe to enter. The most dangerous
hazard with confined space is an atmosphere incapable of sustaining life. Even a grab
and go scenario could prove fatal for rescuers.
D. Secure the space and the area surrounding the space. Remove all unnecessary
personnel from in or around the space and prohibit further entry.
E. Identify and secure any hazards associated with the space (lock out/tag out).
Page 1 of 15
SPECIAL OPERATIONS /TRT
F. Try to determine the down time of the victim.
G. Determine if the entrant is on air and if there is a tag line present.
H. Request onsite maintenance personnel for hazard control and site specific safety
issues.
I. Identify any actions that have been taken by onsite personnel prior to OFD arrival.
Report this and any other relevant information to Command.
III.
FIRST RESCUE
A. Establish an area away from the confined space for treatment and the staging of EMS
equipment.
IV.
FIRST TRT TOWER
A. Assess the space and determine the best point of entry.
B. Conduct air monitoring of the space and record these readings.
C. Start ventilation if safe to do so. This may be just natural ventilation.
D. Using onsite personnel, secure lock out/tag out of any hazards in the space.
E. Secure a staging location for equipment and personnel.
F. If working from elevated platform, make sure access is safe for personnel operating
near the opening.
G. Size-up appropriate anchors, clear any obstacles.
V.
HEAVY RESCUE
A. Heavy Rescue and TRT unit will provide personnel for entry.
B. Confirm that Lock out/ Tag out has taken place. Utilize OFD Lock out/ Tag out kits
when possible.
C. Assign a two-man entry team with a two-man back-up team staged at the entry area.
D. Ensure monitoring and ventilation of the space.
E. Determine the appropriate level of personal protective equipment (PPE) in
conjunction with the Hazmat Officer.
Page 2 of 15
SPECIAL OPERATIONS /TRT
F. Determine the method of entry, i.e., tripod, or elevated anchor, and assign personnel
to rig the systems for rescue operations.
G. Maintain accountability of personnel in the space and monitor the duration of work
time.
VI.
COMMAND CONSIDERATIONS
A. Confined Space incidents are labor intensive operations. Rehab and personnel
rotation should be considered. Call for additional TRT resources as back-up.
B. The Safety Officer should at least have operational level training of Confined Space
Operations (TRT Unit Officer).
C. Rescue Operations should fall under the Heavy Rescue Officer.
D. Determine if this will be a Rescue or Recovery Operation.
E. OPD should be tasked with traffic and crowd control.
F. Have Communications contact OPD to notify the proper authorities, i.e., OSHA.
G. Command should provide additional resources as needed, i.e., Hazmat.
H. Have Communications call for a PIO early in the incident.
I. If this is a City project, contact City of Orlando Safety.
Page 3 of 15
SPECIAL OPERATIONS /TRT
TRENCH RESCUE
I.
INTRODUCTION
The intent of this procedure is to provide a safe and effective framework for incidents
involving collapsed and dangerous trench operations.
II.
FIRST ENGINE
A. Approach from the end of the trench. Use caution as heavy vehicles can cause
another collapse. Spot apparatus a minimum of 75‟ from the trench.
B. Size up the scene; determine the number of people trapped, what hazards exist, the
size of the trench and what resources will be needed.
C. Shut down all unnecessary equipment and control traffic if near an active roadway.
D. Evacuate the trench and the perimeter of all personnel. Make sure to keep all heavy
equipment operators and the job foreman on the scene. They may be needed to
operate equipment during the rescue or recovery efforts.
E. Secure any paperwork pertinent to the job site.
F. Determine or make the last known location of the victim if not visible to the eye.
III.
FIRST RESCUE
A. Establish an area away from the trench for treatment and staging of EMS equipment.
IV.
FIRST TRT TOWER
A. TRT Tower shall assume Safety.
B. Assess the condition and size of trench, including depth, and determine access points.
C. Determine if de-watering is needed.
D. Provide atmospheric monitoring of the trench and start ventilation using electric fans.
Any ignition sources should be isolated and secured prior to this step.
E. Secure all hazards through a lock out/tag out method when applicable.
F. If onsite resources allow, begin preparing site for rescue operations.
G. Provide update and direction to scene for Heavy Rescue and additional resources.
Page 4 of 15
SPECIAL OPERATIONS /TRT
H. Establish a staging location for equipment and resources. Equipment should be staged
near the entry point of the trench.
V.
HEAVY RESCUE
A. Assess soil conditions (packed, loose, wet, etc.)
B. Reassess or confirm the need for de-watering (larger pumps).
C. Confirm that any hazards have been locked out or tagged out.
D. Assess weather conditions and have the Communications Center obtain a weather
report for the next few hours. Have them provide updates as needed for the operation.
E. Assign personnel to all the positions needed to affect the rescue effort.
F. Place ground pads in the area of the trench where rescue and entry are taking place.
G. Make sure ladder placement provides for safe access to trench, based on current
standards (currently 20‟).
H. Determine the best option for protection systems and begin construction and
placement. Have the Incident Commander secure additional materials needed for
extended or complex operations.
VI.
COMMAND CONSIDERATIONS
A. Trench incidents are labor intensive operations. Rehab and personnel rotation should
be considered. Call for additional TRT resources as back-up.
B. The Safety Officer should at least have operational level training of Trench
Operations (TRT Tower Officer).
C. Rescue Operations should fall under the Heavy Rescue Officer.
D. Determine if this will be a Rescue or Recovery Operation.
E. OPD should be tasked with traffic and crowd control.
F. Have Communications contact OPD to notify the proper authorities, i.e., OSHA.
G. Command should provide additional resources as needed, i.e., Hazmat.
H. Have Communications call for a PIO early in the incident.
I. If this is a City project, contact City of Orlando Safety.
Page 5 of 15
SPECIAL OPERATIONS /TRT
STRUCTURAL COLLAPSE OPERATIONS
I.
INTRODUCTION
A. Units should approach a building that has suffered structural damage as though a
piece of the puzzle has been removed.
B. This type of operation can present many hazards, which might include compromised
utilities.
C. Depending on the type of occupancy and the time of day, this operation could include
a high number of occupants creating a mass casualty operation.
II.
FIRST ENGINE
A. Approach with caution, remembering that ground vibrations could cause additional
collapse.
B. Attempt to identify the best access for additional resources, number of victims, or
potential number of victims based on the building and conditions of the building.
C. First-in units should assist in removing victims on the surface. Remember that for
each action there could be a reaction of unfavorable consequences. Moving parts of
the building without taking precautions should be avoided until crews with
specialized training arrive.
D. Move all victims and occupants to a location that is safe from the building.
E. Locate the persons in charge of the building to assist efforts with occupant
accountability.
F. Initiate triage if patients are present.
III.
FIRST RESCUE
A. Establish an area away from the collapse for treatment and staging of EMS
equipment.
IV.
ADDITIONAL UNITS
A. Prior to any Technical Rescue Team (TRT) arrival, provide manpower and assistance
in removing surface victims.
B. After arrival of the TRT Unit, manpower may be assigned to supportive positions
with Collapse Technicians.
Page 6 of 15
SPECIAL OPERATIONS /TRT
V.
TECHNICAL RESCUE TEAM
A. Confirm that a Structural Engineer or Code Enforcement has been contacted and is
responding.
B. Confirm that all victims on the surface have or are being removed.
C. Designate specific search teams and specialized equipment required for search and
recovery efforts.
D. Evaluate the condition of the building and consult with a Structural Engineer as to
shoring methods and materials.
E. If victims are located, vertical removal pathways should be the primary approach with
secondary means being horizontal. Horizontal removal pathways usually involve the
breaching of walls, which may include load-bearing walls.
F. The potential for secondary collapse is reduced if rescue teams breach structural
members from above or below.
G. Prior to breaching a structural load-bearing member, a specially trained structural
collapse specialist (Structural Engineer, architect) should approve and oversee the
breaching operation. If the atmospheric conditions are not known in the room of
desired entry, a “pilot” hole shall be punched to monitor the atmosphere prior to
breaching operations.
H. If rescue teams have not been able to locate victims through other methods, then they
should be located by selective debris removal. If the potential for live victims exist,
be cautious of secondary collapse.
I. If a victim‟s location is known from someone else, then debris should be removed to
reach that victim. In lightweight frame construction buildings, this could be
accomplished by cutting and hand removing structural members.
J. If the building is of reinforced concrete, it may require breaking large pieces into
smaller and more manageable size pieces. This may also require the use of other
heavy equipment to pick up and move the structural components to reach potential
victims.
K. Rescue team members should assist in the break up and removal of structural
components. Safety Group shall oversee all of these operations to ensure site safety
for all operating personnel. If structural components are removed from the site, they
should be marked in some way to identify them with the particular building for future
investigative purposes.
Page 7 of 15
SPECIAL OPERATIONS /TRT
L. As debris is removed, all operations should be stopped periodically to search
(listening, dog team, and hailing) for victims. After enough debris has been removed
to reasonably ascertain that there are not any victims, search and rescue operations
can be suspended in that building.
M. During general debris removal, if heavy equipment operators spot a sign of a
decreased victim or victims, selected debris removal shall be conducted to remove the
victim(s) respectfully. The Coroner and/or other investigative personnel should be
notified to handle the removal of the body or bodies.
N. As victims are removed, they will be moved to the Medical Group.
O. Command should consider CISD and provide frequent relief for Crews, to reduce
fatigue and exposure to stressful situations.
P. Prior to termination of the incident, Command shall account for all personnel who
have been operating at the collapse site. Each Company Officer should ensure Crew
and equipment accountability before returning to service.
VI.
SAFETY RESPONSIBILITIES
A. TRT Tower Officer shall assume Safety.
B. Safety should check for hazards directly associated with the structural collapse.
C. Potential for secondary collapse
D. Explosion or fire associated with broken gas and electric lines
E. Falling debris
F. Toxic atmosphere
G. After advising Command of initial hazards present, Safety will coordinate
continuously with operations to ensure the safety of personnel.
H. After initial surface victim removal has been completed, Safety Group should ensure
that all personnel are removed from the collapse site. This will give rescue personnel
time to re-group, and a specific action plan implemented for the search and rescue of
any remaining trapped victims. This will also allow for the removal of all civilians
from the area.
I. Any further rescue attempts should be delayed until input from the Safety Group is
received. Freelancing will not be tolerated.
Page 8 of 15
SPECIAL OPERATIONS /TRT
VII.
MEDICAL RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Medical Group should set up an area away from the immediate hazards of the
collapse.
B. Based on the number of victims, the collapse could require mass casualty procedures
to be implemented.
VIII.
LOGISTICS
A. Due to the amount of specialized equipment needed, Command must designate a
Logistics Group to maintain control of the equipment used.
B. Depending on the size of the incident, this may be accomplished within the
Operations Group utilizing personnel who are most familiar with the equipment. As
the incident progresses, it may be necessary to assign an entire Company to this task.
C. For extended operations, it may be necessary for Command to utilize and coordinate
with the Staff & Line manager to assist with equipment needs and repairs.
IX.
COMMAND CONSIDERATIONS
A. Based on information reported from first arriving Units, determine the need for
additional resources (MCI/First Alarm Medical) and early Division/Groups.
B. Determine the need for a Structural Engineer, or at the minimum, a representative
from Code Enforcement.
C. Command should plan on establishing Division/Groups for operations of this type.
This might include the following areas: Operations (Rescue), Safety,
Medical/Transport, Logistics (equipment/materials), Rehabilitation and Public
Information.
D. Command should recognize that this type of operation is often long term and
extremely fatiguing. Command should not hesitate to recall all Heavy Rescue
members and/or other State and Federal resources if the situation warrants.
E. Rehab and personnel rotation should be considered. Call for additional TRT resources
as back-up.
F. The Safety Officer should at least have operational level training of Structural
Collapse Operations (TRT Unit Officer).
G. Rescue Operations should fall under the Heavy Rescue Officer.
Page 9 of 15
SPECIAL OPERATIONS /TRT
H. Determine if this will be a Rescue or Recovery Operation.
I. OPD should be tasked with traffic and crowd control.
J. Have Communications contact OPD to notify the proper authorities, i.e., OSHA.
K. Command should provide additional resources as needed, i.e., Hazmat.
L. Have Communications call for a PIO early in the incident.
M. If this is a City project, contact City of Orlando Safety.
N. If the size and complexity of the incident are beyond the capabilities of local
jurisdictions, a request shall be made via the Fire Chief or his designee to obtain State
resources, i.e. USAR Team.
Page 10 of 15
SPECIAL OPERATIONS /TRT
HIGH ANGLE/ROPE RESCUE
I.
INTRODUCTION
A. This procedure establishes guidelines for performing rope rescues under fireground
operations and under non-fire operations. A rope rescue is defined as any incident
which involves the removal of a patient(s) by OFD personnel with the use of rope and
rope accessories from locations unreachable by standard fire department equipment.
B. The purpose of High Angle Rescue is to relocate patients, which cannot be reached
by normal means, utilizing rope accessories, to a place of safety where first aid can be
given or transportation to a medical facility initiated, if applicable.
C. The fire department recognizes the dangers to its personnel during any rope-assisted
rescue, which takes members to extreme heights or into confined spaces. These
operating procedures are designed to ensure the safety of each rescuer during such
operations.
D. Fire department personnel should think of rope rescue as the ability to extend the
rescuer‟s reach, making it possible for a rescuer to reach a patient at any location,
whether it be an above or a below ground location.
II.
PROCEDURES
A. The First Arriving Officer must secure the area under the patient if that patient is in
an elevated location. If the patient is in a sub-grade location, the area surrounding the
location shall be secured. If the patient is in an elevated location, securing the area
means roping off a large area below the patient(s) location. If possible, one person
must maintain visual contact with the patient at all times throughout the operation
from the ground.
B. Scene Evaluation (upon arrival) to determine the number of patients and their
locations. Remove all surface-trapped patients who are located in dangerous
positions; i.e. directly under failed scaffolding which is hanging, positioned under
broken out windows above, or a patient who has pulled themselves out of a sub-grade
location, but is close to the edge.
1. Determine the location of patients to enable members to choose the proper
equipment.
2. Locate the quickest and safest route to take all personnel and equipment to the
operation site.
3. Secure the area below the patient. If this is a sub-grade location, secure the area
above the patient.
Page 11 of 15
SPECIAL OPERATIONS /TRT
4. When hauling systems are used, Command may need to request additional
manpower.
C. Initial response to all rope rescue situations should have two “A” team members
dressed in harness and protective gear (i.e., helmet, gloves, and uniform shoes).
D. The members of the “A” team have the responsibility of being the rescuers who will
come in contact with the patient(s). Their primary job is getting to the patient,
packaging, and maintaining contact with the patient until they have reached a safe
location for further treatment/transportation. The skills that these members can expect
to be performing are:
1. Rappelling
2. Ascending
3. Being lowered by a rope system
4. Riding with the patient
5. Being lowered into sub-grade areas
E. The members of the “B” team have the responsibility of supporting the “A” team
members. Their primary job is rigging and operating the secondary belay lines. The
skills that these members can be expected to perform are:
1. Rigging and mechanical advantages
2. Lowering and belay safety
3. Back-up systems for safety
4. Anchoring techniques
F. The members of the “C” team have the responsibility of checking all parts of the
operation, from technique to safety. Their primary responsibility is to oversee the
rigging operations, to pick the main anchor points, and to supervise the operations of
the “B” team. Both of the “C” team members will assist the “A” and “B” team
members in accomplishing their assignments.
G. The Heavy Rescue Lieutenant (Operations Group) has the primary responsibility to
oversee and visually check each operation to assure all safety measures are met.
Page 12 of 15
SPECIAL OPERATIONS /TRT
H. The Operational Plan is established once the Incident Commander and the Heavy
Rescue Lieutenant have investigated and evaluated the scene. The operational plan is
then implemented.
I. The Mode of Operation is determined by the Incident Commander and the Heavy
Rescue Lieutenant, as to the resources needed, how the team members are going to
get to the patient, what equipment they will use, and how many rescuers are going to
get on the rope.
1. Critical Rescue Mode – When the patient is in a situation in which time becomes
an important factor in the patient‟s recovery (i.e., patient hanging from
unstable/failing structures or submerged underwater in a confined space), the
Incident Commander and Heavy Rescue Lieutenant must quickly define a plan of
action that will include the most important aspect of the operation: the safety of
the team members.
2. Non-Critical Rescue Mode – When the patient is not injured and in no immediate
danger. The patient is in a position that he cannot get down or out of without
assistance.
J. Upon arrival, the Heavy Rescue Lieutenant shall report to the Incident Commander
for a situation report and other pertinent information. Based on the information given,
the responding team shall decide the following action:
1. Control of the situation
2. Most direct access to the patient
3. Initial responsibilities as directed in the SOPs
III.
ON-SCENE STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
A. Whenever a rescue line is tied off to an anchor point, the Heavy Rescue Lieutenant
will make a determination as to the relative safety of the operation.
B. If it is impossible to establish a second anchor for the safety tag lines, the Heavy
Rescue Lieutenant will also make a determination as to the relative safety of using a
single anchor to execute the rescue operation.
C. Only one-half inch or greater static kernmantle rope will be used for rescue. This rope
must meet or exceed the criteria established in NFPA 1983 for Life Support Rope.
D. Safety tag lines, guidelines, and personal safety roof edge lines must also be a
minimum of one-half inch static kernmantle rope.
Page 13 of 15
SPECIAL OPERATIONS /TRT
IV.
ROPE RESCUE SAFETY STANDARDS
A. No member of the team goes on a rope or starts an operation until another team
member checks him.
B. Every part of the rescue system must be backed up with a safety.
C. Each line shall have a safety person. The rescue person that is rappelling shall always
get the attention of the safety personnel before they start their rappel.
D. Rope shall not be deployed or hung over any height without being anchored off first.
Each member who is going to work on a line shall check his anchor.
E. If a roof does not have a parapet wall (at least 42 inches high), any person within six
feet of the roof edge must be attached to a safety tag line.
F. If a roof has a parapet, personnel shall hook up to the rescue/descent line prior to
mounting the parapet wall.
G. If the rescue is a vertical basket lowering, a safety line must be attached to all
personnel working with the basket near the roof edge, whether the roof has a parapet
wall or not.
H. All ropes and equipment shall be inspected before and after each training session
and/or rescue operation.
I. Any piece of hardware equipment dropped onto a hard surface from a height of five
feet or above shall be taken out of service.
J. Each team member is responsible for the safety of all team members. Any team
member observing an unsafe practice shall correct the situation immediately.
V.
SAFETY RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Safety Group (first-due TRT Tower Officer) must get to the point known as the
“edge” as quickly as possible. The edge is the point at which the rescuer is going
over. On a building, this would be the roof top above the patient. At a sub-level
location, the edge would be at the point where the ground opens up the hole. On a
structure like a radio tower, the edge would be the point at the base of the tower. The
edge could be thought of as the point at which the rescuer is going to start descending
or ascending to reach the patient.
B. The Safety Officer is responsible for making sure all those rappelling have a
secondary line with a secondary anchor, that all climbers have a safety rope (in the
form of a climbing system) and all personnel (including Safety) working close to the
edge have a safety line attached to them.
Page 14 of 15
SPECIAL OPERATIONS /TRT
C. The only situation in which a secondary line is not used when rappelling on the
Orlando Fire Department is under emergency fireground operations, whether it is a
rope rescue or a Firefighter emergency escape.
VI.
COMMAND CONSIDERATIONS
A. High Angle incidents are labor intensive operations. Rehab and personnel rotation
should be considered. Call for additional TRT resources as back-up.
B. The Safety Officer should at least have operational level training of High Angle
Operations (TRT Unit Officer).
C. Rescue Operations should fall under the Heavy Rescue Officer.
D. OPD should be tasked with traffic and crowd control.
E. Have Communications contact OPD to notify the proper authorities, i.e., OSHA.
F. Command should provide additional resources as needed, i.e., additional TRT Tower.
G. Have Communications call for a PIO early in the incident.
H. A Stokes Basket Operation utilizing a Tower Truck as the lifting mechanism may not
require the same detailed procedures used in a complex High Angle Rescue.
Page 15 of 15
DIVIDER
9. SPECIAL OPERATIONS
INDUSTRIAL MACHINERY ACCIDENT WITH ENTRAPMENT
I.
INTRODUCTION
A. This section provides a basic operating guideline for Units responding to incidents of
entrapment outside of vehicles.
B. Lock out/ Tag out shall be completed with the aid of building and machinery
personnel.
C. This type of response can vary due to the endless number and types of entrapment
and entanglement scenarios. Often times basic extrication techniques and tools are the
remedy. However, there are situations which require specialized tools and techniques.
With this in mind, consideration shall be given to spotting of TRT Towers. Some
equipment has a limited range from the apparatus.
II.
UNIT OBJECTIVES
A. First Engine
1. Upon arrival, the Officer will identify, secure the area and state any significant
information such as what type of machinery, level of entrapment, and other
pertinent information to responding units.
2. If possible, determine the mechanism of entrapment and what is entrapped.
3. Report any actions taken by on scene personnel.
4. If available, request and secure personnel from the area of entrapment.
5. Identify all hazards to rescue personnel and ensure that these hazards are
addressed.
6. Identify locations for pertinent lock out/tag out operations, and if capable, secure
any sources of energy (hydraulic, electrical, pneumatic, chemical, thermal and
gravitational).
7. Perform a basic stabilization operation to control all hazards.
8. If safe to do so, initiate BLS/ALS treatment and stabilize the patient. Determine if
additional medical personnel (surgeons) will need to respond.
9. Provide updates for Units still responding.
Page 1 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
B. First Tower (TRT)
1. Meet face-to-face with the Engine Company Officer and make an assessment of
the scene and what resources will be needed.
2. Confirm that lock out/tag out has or is being completed.
3. Determine the type of entrapment and what resources beyond the scope of the fire
department are needed.
4. Perform stabilization operations to further control hazards and protect the patient
from further movement.
5. Determine the need to stabilize the victim if suspended or in a precarious position.
6. Set up an equipment and personnel staging area near the entrapment.
7. As soon as possible, communicate with the Heavy Rescue for closest possible
access. Some of the specialized tools that are available are limited to a distance of
100-150 feet from the apparatus.
C. First Rescue
1. Assist Engine Company with patient stabilization and treatment.
2. Assess patient for potential medical implications of entrapment (i.e., crush
syndrome, compartment syndrome, large volume fluid loss, etc.).
3. Consider advanced medical direction to assist in patient care.
D. Heavy Rescue
1. Primary responsibility of the Heavy Rescue is to provide additional manpower,
specialized tools, equipment and techniques to ensure an efficient and effective
disentanglement operation.
2. Ensure appropriate lock out/tag out has been accomplished.
3. Meet face-to-face with the first arriving TRT Officer and determine what, if any,
additional resources are needed.
4. Identify the need for possible heavy equipment resources to assist in the rescue
effort.
5. Consideration should be given for partial disassembly on scene and then have the
patient transported to the trauma center for further disentanglement.
Page 2 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
6. Consider or recommend the need for onsite medical direction for complex/longterm operations.
E. First District
1. Overall Incident Command
III.
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
A. Consider a hazmat response if chemicals (liquids, solids, or gases) are present, or if
patient or rescue personnel need decontamination.
B. Confirm the proper wearing of PPE. Bunker gear may not be suitable for every
incident. Loose clothing may need to be secured and air quality should be assessed.
C. Rescue personnel should always be aware of the potential for stored energy when
dealing with rescues involving machinery.
D. Manipulation of the patient‟s extremities and disassembly of the mechanism are
preferred methods of disentanglement. This will reduce any unplanned reactions from
force.
E. Take the appropriate time to adequately size-up the entrapment mechanism and
consult with onsite maintenance personnel.
F. This process may allow (what might appear to be a complicated rescue) to, in fact, be
nothing more than utilizing some hand tools.
G. Consideration should be given for post incident decontamination of equipment and
personnel.
IV.
COMMAND CONSIDERATIONS
A. Command will provide additional resources based on the information received from
the Officers involved.
B. Command should consider having OPD respond and act as a liaison.
C. Advise Communications to contact OPD to notify the proper authorities.
Page 3 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
VEHICLE EXTRICATION
I.
INTRODUCTION
A. This section provides an organized framework for approaching standard vehicle
extrications. Although this SOP addresses OFD‟s basic operation, many of these tasks
will apply to any vehicle entrapment incident.
B. The first arriving Unit will provide an arrival report for all responding Units. This
report should include any significant information, such as power lines, broken water
mains, large vehicles, and/or large number of people. This report should detail travel
direction and roadway if different from dispatch, as is the case sometimes with on or
off ramps at interchanges.
II.
UNIT OBJECTIVES
A. First Engine
1. Scene size-up and assessment of number of people entrapped and total number of
patients.
2. Coordinate patient care and overall scene safety.
3. Position apparatus using procedures outlined in the SOP for apparatus placement.
4. Stabilize vehicles prior to entering for patient care.
5. Establish patient contact and begin triage and treatment. Update Communications
and/or Command with the total number of ALS or BLS patients.
6. One charged handline is to be placed into service with one Crew member in
approved protective equipment manning the line.
B. First Tower
1. Position apparatus for best application of extrication tools and required
equipment. Provide scene lighting using lights mounted on apparatus.
2. Meet face-to-face with the Engine Company Officer. Determine the best method
of patient removal. This should be coordinated between the treating Paramedic
and the Extrication Officer.
3. Make sure the vehicle is stabilized and safe before initiating extrication
procedures.
Page 4 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
4. The Truck Company Officer is responsible for coordinating the extrication
operation. All Units performing extrication operations should have a preassignment of tools and tasks. This will enhance the action plan and overall
function of the extrication team.
C. First Rescue
1. Primary function is to assist the Engine Company with patient care.
2. Position apparatus for ease of leaving the scene.
D. Heavy Rescue
1. Provide additional manpower and tools allowing for enhanced and safer
extrication operations.
2. Position apparatus for best advantage of tools and required equipment. Provide
scene lighting with light towers.
3. Heavy Rescue Officer will meet face to face with the Truck Officer for the action
plan, and provide additional resources. The Heavy Rescue Officer shall become
Safety Officer for extrication operations.
4. Provide specialized tools and equipment.
E. First District
1. Overall Incident Command
III.
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
A. With the ever-increasing presence of safety devices and alternative fuels, personnel
must be aware of the inherit dangers associated with them.
B. Disable the vehicle battery if it is accessible. Starting with negative first, a method
known as chunking (cutting a chunk out instead of just one cut) should be used to
keep the cut ends from touching once they are cut.
C. Make sure the ignition is rendered safe, as some of today‟s cars do not have keys.
D. Never cut any cables that are orange or red in color! These can carry high
voltage in hybrid vehicles.
E. Survey the interior of the vehicle to determine the presence of supplemental restraint
systems. This can be accomplished by stripping the interior molding, and looking for
markings indicating these systems. The Extrication Officer should account for the
Page 5 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
presence and locations of these systems prior to the start of the extrication operation.
This will avoid accident deployment or damage to system components, which may
injure operating personnel.
F. When operating near air bags that have not deployed, personnel should follow the 510-20 rule, maintaining a clearance of the following distances from these airbags. 5”
for side impact bags, 10” for steering wheel, and 20” for passenger side bag.
G. With the increase of safety devices, size of the vehicles, and alternative fuels, the
extrication has become more complex, therefore the combining of two extrication
Crews will increase the safety of patients and Crew members involved.
H. When positioning apparatus, be careful not to have apparatus exhaust directed into
the work area.
I. All personnel should be aware of alternative fueled vehicles and the hazards
associated with them. Gas/electric combinations have high voltage systems. Others
use CNG (compressed natural gas), LP (liquefied petroleum) and hydrogen.
Note: While it is the goal of OFD to extricate patients as rapidly as possible, a
methodical and thorough size-up must be performed to protect our personnel and the
patients involved.
IV.
COMMAND CONSIDERATIONS
A. Command shall provide additional resources based on request from Officers and the
number of patients involved.
B. Based on the complexity of the incident, Command should consider establishing
Divisions and Groups.
C. Command may wish to have the Heavy Rescue Officer act as the Extrication Officer
in incidents involving large commercial vehicles or machinery.
Page 6 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
ELEVATOR RESCUE
I.
INTRODUCTION
The operation of the Orlando Fire Department at an elevator emergency shall be limited
to the safe removal of persons trapped in the elevator car and/or hoistway. Repairs and
reactivation of elevators shall not be carried out by members of the Orlando Fire
Department. Do not hesitate to contact an elevator mechanic for complex rescues or
assistance.
II.
DEFINITIONS
A. Pit Switch – Elevator run/stop switch that controls power to the elevator hoistway
motor. The switch is located in the lower-most part of interior hoistway, usually to
one side or the other. The pit switch is normally painted red by elevator code for easy
identification.
B. Elevator inspection station switch – a three position run/stop/inspection switch that is
located on top of the individual elevator car and is utilized to control power to the
hoistway motor. When the inspection station switch is in the inspection mode, the
elevator car can be moved at a much slower rate of speed. This allows the elevator
mechanic to perform maintenance and other advanced procedures.
III.
UNIT OBJECTIVES
A. First Unit
1. Attempt to make contact with building personnel and secure the keys to the
stairways and mechanical rooms.
2. Determine the location of the elevator either through Dispatch or on-site
personnel.
3. Inside Team will attempt to access the pit switch from the ground floor (lobby)
and place this in the stop position. Use of the 6‟ hook may be needed for this
operation. Keep body parts clear from plane of hoistway doors in the event that
the car suddenly moves. If no further access is required of this area, make sure the
hoistway doors are closed prior to leaving this area.
4. Once the stalled elevator car is located, attempt to make verbal contact with the
occupants inside the car. Determine if there are any medical concerns and the total
number of occupants.
5. If someone is having medical issues and this was not given on initial dispatch,
make sure to update Dispatch and have a Rescue respond. They should report to
the Inside Teams locations for treatment of patients.
Page 7 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
6. The Outside team should proceed to the floor above the location of the stalled
elevator car. With Gen 2 elevators, one Firefighter may have to go to the main
electrical room for the elevators to control power to the car door. With some
newer applications, this may not be above the elevator shaft. These are referred to
as Machine Room-Less (MRL) elevators.
7. The Outside Team will attempt to control the run/stop switch, which is located on
top of the car. Use of the 6‟ hook will allow safe operation of this switch, keeping
body parts clear of the plane of the hoistway doors.
8. If the Outside Team can safely access the top of the car, they now can do so.
Older style elevator cars may have large and small wheels, which are belt-driven.
Moving the larger wheel will assist with opening the car door. Use caution when
moving any part of an elevator or its components.
9. The Inside Team will relocate to the floor landing closest to the stalled elevator
for removal of occupants. They will open hoistway doors and then car doors once
the Outside Team confirms that power has been controlled to the car.
10. Occupants should be instructed to exit one at a time, with Inside Team members
assisting at the opening of the hoistway. Guard open shafts when occupants must
step down from car floor to the floor landing.
11. Once all occupants have been safely removed from the stalled elevator, make sure
the car doors, along with the hoistway doors are closed. Building personnel
should be advised that the elevator is out of service, until their elevator repairman
can return it to service.
12. Once power is secured by OFD, notify property management to have the elevator
repaired, serviced and re-energized. OFD will not return a malfunctioning
elevator to service.
IV.
TOOLS
A. Officer: radio, light, and Knox Box key
B. Right Jump: radio, light, halligan, 6‟ hook and elevator bag
C. Engineer: radio, light, 6‟ hook, attic ladder as needed
D. Left Jump: radio, light, 6” hook and elevator bag
Page 8 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
WATER RESCUE
I.
INTRODUCTION
This procedure establishes guidelines for performing a water rescue. A water rescue is
defined as any incident which involves OFD personnel entering any body of water (e.g.,
lakes, ponds, or canals) for removal of victims. Water Rescue incidents will be divided
into two distinct operational procedures; Surface Water Rescue and Dive Rescue.
II.
FIRST ARRIVING UNIT
A. The first arriving Officer must quickly secure the immediate area, and assure that no
more citizens enter the water. Well intentioned and untrained citizens can quickly
become additional victims.
B. The Officer must identify the problem and make a decision to operate in either a
Rescue or a Recovery Mode. The Officer must properly size-up the situation and then
determine whether or not this is a Surface Water Rescue or a Dive Rescue and direct
the responding Units to the best point-of-entry for the body of water. The first
arriving Officer should consider waiting for the arrival of the Dive Team before
committing personnel to the rescue, and concentrate efforts on obtaining reliable
witnesses to pinpoint the area of rescue. Information should be gathered as to the
point where the victim was last seen, time of incident, and the total number of
victims.
III.
SIZE-UP CONSIDERATIONS
A. Determine if there is a visible patient in the water.
1. Determine consciousness of the patient.
2. If the patient is not conscious, locate witnesses who observed the victim entering
or struggling in the water before becoming unconscious.
3. Determine the distance from the shore to the patient.
B. Condition of the Victim
1. Cooperative victim
2. Uncooperative victim
3. Unconscious witnessed victim
4. Unconscious un-witnessed (“floater”)
Page 9 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
5. Unknown location and condition.
C. Establish the total number of patients.
D. Determine what the victim was doing prior to the emergency.
E. Establish the time of the accident.
1. Determine how long the victim has been missing.
2. Determine the last known location of the victim.
3. Determine if there is a vehicle in the water.
a. Attempt to get a visual on the vehicle.
b. Ascertain if witnesses observed the vehicle entering the water.
c. Check depth of the water.
F. Try to obtain written statements from the witnesses.
1. Get complete witness information.
a. Name
b. Date of birth
c. Address (if local – visitor)
d. Phone number (local and permanent)
G. Depending on the answer to the above, size-up concerns, a decision can be made on
whether this fits the profile of a Surface Water Rescue or a Dive Rescue incident.
IV.
DEFINITIONS
A. Dive Rescue: An incident in which OFD personnel designated as Rescue Divers enter
a body of water to perform submerged search and rescue/recovery operations.
B. Dive Team Member: Those Department members having scuba and specialized dive
rescue training and identified as members of OFD‟s “Dive Team”, organized for the
purpose of providing safe and complete water rescue and recovery services.
C. Dive Tender: A member of the OFD Dive Team, who will assist the diver to the entry
point and maintain contact with the diver via the communication rope or tag line.
Page 10 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
D. Dive Team Coordinator: A Chief Officer appointed to coordinate the Dive Team
activities and organization.
E. Dive Team Leaders: The Company Officers of Tower 1 or Heavy Rescue 1, who
serve as a liaison between the Dive Team and the Incident Commander.
F. Rescue Mode: The time frame beginning at the incident dispatch to one hour after
dispatch is considered the “Rescue Mode.” Other variables may affect this time
frame.
G. Recovery Mode: The time frame beginning with the termination of the Rescue Mode
and ending with the termination of the incident is considered the “Recovery Mode.”
Other variables may also alter this time frame.
H. Surface Water Rescue: An incident involving a patient(s) in the water, at or near the
surface, in which non-submersion rescue techniques can be used to safely extricate
the victim from the water.
I. Rescue Swimmer: A member of OFD who has successfully completed the Surface
Water Rescue training program and has been designated by the Training Division as a
“Swimmer.”
J. Tender: A member of OFD who has successfully completed the Surface Water
Rescue training. The tender will be responsible for the rope bag and the tethering
operation of the Rescue Swimmer.
K. Training Dive: Only those training dives formally identified by the Department as
training dives and developed by the Dive Team Coordinator or Leader.
V.
SURFACE WATER RESCUE RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Upon arrival, the Officer will determine if the current water rescue situation fits the
profile of a Surface Water Rescue.
B. Surface Water Rescue incidents will fall into one of the following criteria:
1. Cooperative conscious victim
2. Uncooperative conscious victim
3. Unconscious witnessed victim
4. Unconscious un-witnessed victim (“Floater”)
5. Vehicle in the water (shallow water, visible, and upright)
Page 11 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
C. If the Officer finds that the current situation falls into one of the above criteria and the
risk versus gain assessment presents a viable rescue scenario, the Officer should
consider a Surface Water Rescue attempt. A few examples of some risk versus gain
variables include:
1. Combative person
2. Suicidal person
3. Eluding police
4. Night operations
5. Cold water temperature
D. If the Officer finds that the current situation does not fit the above criteria or during
the course of the rescue attempt the situation changes where it no longer fits the
above criteria, the Officer shall wait or call off the Surface Water Rescue operation
and await the arrival of the Dive Team.
E. Only those personnel designated as “Swimmers” shall enter the water for a Surface
Water Rescue attempt.
F. OFD personnel who enter the water to attempt a Surface Water Rescue shall do so
wearing the designated PFD and shall be tethered to the 100‟ long floating rescue
rope.
G. At no time shall the Swimmer remove the PFD to attempt an under-the-surface
rescue.
H. Under no circumstances will the approved yellow PFD be substituted by the use of
the SCBA.
1.
VI.
If the arriving Crews are confronted with the unconscious victim (who was not
witnessed entering the water or struggling to survive), the Officer shall not
commit his swimmer to the water.
CONSCIOUS VICTIMS/ SURFACE WATER RESCUE
A. If the victim is conscious, a rope throw and retrieval should be attempted before
committing a Swimmer to the water.
B. The Officer on the scene will make the final decision as to deploy a Rescue
Swimmer.
Page 12 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
C. The swimmer shall don the yellow rescue-style Personal Flotation Device (PFD),
booties, fins, and gloves. The Swimmer shall carry the Rescue Can when entering the
water to provide flotation to the victim during the rescue.
D. The Swimmer shall be tethered to the 100‟ long floating throw rope before entering
the water.
E. The Tender will don the Red Personal Flotation Device (PFD). The Tender shall
maintain contact with the rope attached to the Rescue Swimmer.
F. The Tender will remain in constant visual and verbal communication with the
Swimmer at all times.
G. The Tender will monitor the victim and provide for the Swimmer‟s safety by alerting
him to any changes in victim status.
H. If contact is to be made with the victim, the swimmer will pass the Rescue Can to the
victim and secure the victim. If unable to calm the panicked victim, keep your
distance while passing the Rescue Can and release the lanyard as to not be overcome
by the victim.
I. After the victim is secured with the Swimmer, the Tender and shore personnel will
pull the Swimmer and victim to shore in a safe and controlled manner.
VII.
UNCONSCIOUS VICTIMS/ SURFACE WATER RESCUE
A. If the victim was not witnessed entering the water or struggling to survive or
otherwise observed conscious in the water, the Officer shall not commit his Swimmer
to the water. The victim may have been in the water for a period of time and OFD
will not make contact with floating un-witnessed victims. Wait for the arrival of the
Dive Team.
B. If the victim was witnessed entering the water or was observed struggling to survive,
but is currently unconscious, the Officer may commit his Swimmer to the rescue
attempt.
C. The Swimmer should don the yellow PFD, booties, fins, and gloves. The floating
rescue rope should be attached to the connection point on the PFD.
D. The Tender should assist the Swimmer with connecting the rope to the designated
attachment point.
E. The Swimmer should then swim to the unconscious victim and using the approved
method, roll the victim onto their back, secure the victim, and communicate to the
Tender.
Page 13 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
F. The Tender, while assisted by onshore personnel, will pull the Swimmer and victim
back to shore in a safe and controlled manner.
VIII.
VEHICLES IN THE WATER/ SURFACE WATER RESCUE
A. The Officer shall ensure that a Swimmer responding to a vehicle in the water will
work from the roof or trunk. There is always the possibility of the vehicle shifting or
sinking further, which could pin the Swimmer under the water.
B. The Officer will determine if there is the potential for a viable rescue.
1. Determine if the vehicle was witnessed entering the water.
2. Determine if there are lights on or if there are other signs of possible victim
entrapment.
3. Check to see if the vehicle is visible.
4. Check to see if the vehicle is upright in the water.
5. Determine if the vehicle is shallow enough to be reached while working off the
roof or trunk.
C. If the Officer determines that the current situation falls into the parameters for a
Surface Water Rescue attempt, he may commit a Swimmer to the water.
D. The Swimmer will don the approved yellow PFD, booties, fins, gloves, and the
floating rescue rope will be attached to the connection point.
E. The Tender will assist in connecting the float rope to the connection point on the
Swimmer‟s PFD.
F. The Tender will maintain contact with the rope at all times while the Swimmer is in
the water.
G. The Swimmer will enter the water and then make contact with the vehicle.
H. While working off the roof or trunk, the Swimmer will use the center-punch to take
out the glass and sweep what he can reach, paying particular attention to the roof line
for victims who may float up.
Page 14 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
IX.
AFTER ENTRY/ SURFACE WATER RESCUE
A. Decontaminate all equipment and the Swimmer.
B. Uniform should be washed.
C. Swimmer PFD, booties, fins, and gloves should be thoroughly washed and allowed to
dry before replacing in the gear bag.
D. A first report of injury/exposure shall be documented following department policy.
E. A water sample shall be taken by the Dive Team leader and turned over for testing.
Once the test results are determined, the report shall be turned over to CentraCare for
inclusion in the injury/exposure report.
X.
EQUIPMENT/ SURFACE WATER RESCUE
A. Each Engine and Tower Company will be provided with the following Surface Water
Rescue equipment.
1. Gear bag
2. PFD for Rescuer (yellow)
3. PFD for Tender (red)
4. Floatable 100‟ rope with throw bag
5. D-ring, seatbelt cutter, and center punch combo
6. Fins
7. Booties (one pair size 10, one pair size 14)
8. Rescue can
9. Gloves
XI.
DIVE RESCUE
A. Dive Operations Group and Safety Officer Responsibilities
Page 15 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
1. Dive Operations Group must quickly establish the area to be searched. For each
diver who enters the water, one additional diver will be dressed and ready to enter
the water. Each diver will, at all times, have a search line attached, and a line
tender on shore.
2. Safety Officer will keep Command aware of progress of the search, and suggest
any other personnel or equipment needs. He should see that all needed equipment
is set up in a defined staging area for easy access.
3. Dive Operations Group is responsible for the safety of the dive personnel. He may
utilize the Heavy Rescue Officer as a Safety Officer. These roles may be reversed
or assigned as determined by Command.
XII.
MEDICAL TREATMENT GROUP RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Medical Treatment Group should have an area set up adjacent to the entry point of the
water rescue operation, capable of providing ALS treatment of any victim(s) removed
from the water.
XIII.
PROCEDURES
A. Initial Response – Initial response to all water type incidents should have at least two
divers dressed and ready to enter the water.
B. Operational Plans – Once the Incident Commander has investigated the accident and
completed the scene evaluation, he must establish and implement the operational
plan.
C. Mode of Operation: The Incident Commander must decide how many divers to put in
the water, the type of search pattern, the equipment needs, and any additional
personnel needs. The Incident Commander will coordinate with the Operational
Group in making these decisions:
1. Rescue Mode: The Rescue Mode shall be operational during the first hour from
time of dispatch. During this time frame, a Medical/Treatment Group will be
established at the scene.
2. Recovery Mode: Two factors will change the rescue to recovery mode:
a. Time frames – Ability to affect a rescue in one hour from the time of the
incident.
b. Risk factor – “Is the end result of the operation worth the risk in which the
divers will be placed?”
D. The Incident Commander must work closely with the Dive Operations Group.
Page 16 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
E. Checklist for auto accidents involving a water rescue.
F. A wrecker will always be dispatched at the time the call comes in, as it may be
needed to help with extrication.
G. Consider the possibility of rescue. Victims could be trapped in an air pocket. Vehicle
may be only partially submerged.
H. Make sure divers are dressed, equipped, and ready to enter water immediately.
I. To locate vehicle, look for physical evidence on shore; such as tire tracks, debris,
witnesses, etc., and in water, oil slick, and debris.
J. Secure search line for diver to shore. Line Tender should stand at entry point. When
the vehicle is located, attach a surface marker.
K. Check vehicle for victim. If victim is not inside, check in front and under the rear of
the vehicle.
L. When removing the vehicle from water, attach wrecker cable directly to frame or to
chain which is attached to the rear of the vehicle. Do not hook cable to itself. Divers
should leave immediate area after attaching cable.
Note: Dive Team members are not to enter a submerged vehicle. Divers will only
reach into a vehicle with a hand or foot to check for occupants.
XIV. CHECKLIST FOR BOAT ACCIDENTS
A. While responding, find out what type of accident, e.g., boat/boat, boat/shore,
boat/skier. This information may be given at time of dispatch.
B. Set priorities and plan rescue operations.
C. Find out if there is any danger of fire, explosion, sinking, or capsizing.
D. Treat seriously injured upon arrival.
E. Mark location and boat with marker line.
F. Determine if ambulance, additional divers, or other support assistance is required.
G. Be sure the Orlando Police Department and Orange County Sheriff‟s Office have
been notified for investigative purposes.
Page 17 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
XV.
UNDERWATER DEATH
A. After the body has been located, remove all other personnel from the area to reduce
activity in the death scene area.
B. Mark body with a direct line to shore or with a surface marker.
C. Remove body from water using a body bag, if possible.
XVI. LOCATION OF DIVE RESCUE PERSONNEL
A. Dive Team members are assigned to Tower-1 and Heavy Rescue-1.
XVII. DRIVER FOR DIVE TEAM VEHICLE
A. The driver for the Dive Team vehicle will be staffed from on-duty personnel at
Station #1.
XVIII. COMMAND CONSIDERATIONS
A. District 1 Commander will be dispatched to all mutual aid dive calls.
B. The Incident Commander will be responsible for overall Command and control of the
scene.
C. The Incident Commander should request an OPD liaison to report to the Command
Post and utilize them to assign control of the perimeter as needed.
D. Command should appoint a Dive Operations Group and Safety Officer to liaison
between the Dive Team and Command.
E. Command should consider all of the potential hazards to rescuers (e.g., underwater
debris, water contamination, fatigue, hypothermia), as team members are committed.
F. Command should recognize that underwater search patterns are extremely fatiguing
and provide for rehab of on-scene personnel.
G. When switching from the “Rescue” to the “Recovery Mode”, Command will
downsize the initial Dive Team units by returning either Heavy Rescue-1 or Dive-1 to
service. This will depend upon any precipitating factors. At this time (if not done so
already) the OCSO side scan sonar resource should be requested through OPD
dispatch, after consultation with the Dive Operations Group.
Page 18 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
Orlando Fire Department
Dive Team Worksheet
Incident Number: _________________ Date:____/_____/____ Time Call Received:_______________
Units Responding:______________________________________________________________________
Type of Call:_______________________________ Location of Call:_____________________________
Wind Speed and Direction:_______________________________________________________________
1st Diver
2nd Diver
3rd Diver
4th Diver
Name / Tender
Tank PSI (start)
Time In
Time Out
Tank PSI (end)
Victim Recovery Time _______________________
Benchmarks/Considerations
Last Seen Location/Marked with Buoy
Triangulation
Chase (OCSO)
Wrecker Responding
Rescue Standby for Diver
Engine for Diver Decon
Air Truck
Patterns Used:_________________________________________________________________________________
Total Dives Made:________________________________ Maximum Depth:______________________________
Visibility:____________________ Weather:_____________________ Air Temp:_________ Water Temp:____
GPS Marking/Victim Location:___________________________________________________________________
Dive Team Leader:_____________________________________________________________________________
Notes:_______________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
Line Signals
Tender to Diver: 1 - Are you OK?
Diver to Tender: 1 - I‟m OK
2 - Stop change direction
2 - Need more line
3 - Surface
3 - Object found
Page 19 of 41
4 - Danger stay on bottom
4 or more - Emergency
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
Orlando Fire Department
Surface Water Rescue Worksheet
How many people were involved? ________________________________________________________________
How did the incident happen? ___________________________________________________________________
Where did the incident happen? __________________________________________________________________
What was the victim doing at the time of the incident? ________________________________________________
Dive Team Information
Date and Time of the incident: ____/______/______
____________________
Where was the victim last seen? ___________________________________________________________________
(landmarks, distance from shore, etc.)
Where was the witness(es) Location?_______________________________________________________________
(mark witness location for triangulation)
Is there a boat ramp and location? __________________________________________________________________
Witness Information
Name: ___________________________________________________ Contact Number: (_____)______________
Name: ___________________________________________________ Contact Number: (_____)______________
Name: ___________________________________________________ Contact Number: (_____)______________
Page 20 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
HELICOPTER OPERATIONS
I.
INTRODUCTION
The use of helicopters has become a more frequent tool for the fire service. These uses
range from transporting of the sick and injured, brush and woods fire operations, and
reconnaissance flights for major incidents. The purpose of this operations guide is to
establish orderly and safe operations in the use of helicopters for and during an operation.
II.
IDENTIFICATION OF LANDING ZONE (LZ)
A. A suitable landing area must be located and identified for the pilot.
1. A minimum of 100 feet x 100 feet area is required for a LZ.
2. This area should be free from obstructions and any debris that might interfere
with the landing.
3. The LZ should be at least 300 feet from all other activities.
a. If the LZ is located close to the scene, additional precautions regarding rotor
wash should be taken.
4.
Do not mark the LZ with flares and do not shine lights at the aircraft.
Page 21 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
5. When possible, utilize the LZ lights located in the District vehicles to make the
boundaries of the LZ.
III.
SECURITY
A. A LZ Group should be created by Command, and that person is responsible for
securing the area from the vehicles, pedestrians, and any other objects that may
interfere with the safe operation of the helicopter.
B. Use of law enforcement is encouraged, especially when blocking roadways and in
areas where large crowds may be present.
IV.
COMMUNICATIONS WITH THE AIRCRAFT
A. The LZ Group Officer must establish communications with the aircraft and supply the
aircraft with all pertinent information regarding the LZ.
1. Specifics about obstructions, hazards, and vehicle traffic must be relayed, if
applicable.
2. Communications should be done via radio and on the Operations frequency so
Command is aware of the helicopter status during the incident.
B. When the aircraft is on final approach, the LZ Officer should not stand in the LZ area,
but instead stand in the point that the Aircraft Commander would land facing the
Group Officer.
C. After the LZ has been established, identified by the pilot, and accepted by the pilot,
the aircraft will announce “LZ in Sight, Ready to Land.”
D. When the LZ Group Officer has determined that there are no hazards or reasons to
keep the aircraft from landing, the Group Officer will announce, “Clear to Land.”
1. At this point the aircraft will be on final approach and will announce to Orlando:
“ON FINAL APPROACH, REQUESTING PRIORITY TRAFFIC.”
2. At this point, Orlando will transmit a Steady Tone and repeat the announcement
of the aircraft on final approach. The purpose is to:
a. Make sure all personnel are aware of the helicopter landing.
b. Make personnel aware of any unforeseen hazards that previously were not
identified.
c. At any point, a hazard may be identified that may interfere with the helicopter.
Any person may announce, „ABORT, ABORT, ABORT.” This will be the
Page 22 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
announcement that will identify that there is an unsafe situation that may
jeopardize the safety of the aircraft.
d. The pilot will immediately announce confirmation of the Abort Order and
resume a safe holding pattern until the hazard can be identified and removed.
e. The Aircraft Commander (upon aborting) or landing successfully, will
announce that Orlando will resume normal traffic. Orlando will announce the
resumption of normal traffic.
f. The same procedure will be applied when the aircraft is ready to depart.
V.
LOADING OF PATIENTS OR PERSONNEL
A. No person shall approach the aircraft without the authorization from the pilot or
aircraft crew member.
B. Upon completing a face-to-face transfer of patient information and the patient is
loaded onto the helicopter stretcher, the responsibility for the patient and the patient‟s
safety becomes that of the helicopter crew.
C. The aircraft crew members are responsible for the loading and unloading of their
equipment and patients.
1. When operating around an incident with a helicopter, all personnel should
consider the following:
a. Do not mark the LZ with flares and do not shine lights at the aircraft.
b. Never approach the aircraft from the rear.
c. Keep away from the tail rotor.
d. Establish eye contact with the pilot before approaching the aircraft, especially
if the rotors are turning.
e. Always approach from the front or at a 45-degree angle from the front.
f. Helmets and eye protection should be worn by the LZ Group Officer and
chinstrap tightened to prevent them from being blown off.
g. Staging of patients should be at least 150 feet from aircraft.
h. All loose items on personnel and the patients should be secured.
Page 23 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
i. Be aware of the flight paths of incoming and outgoing aircraft. This is
extremely important in the use of multiple transport aircraft or if news media
helicopters are in the area.
j. Command may have the area declared a no-fly zone. This keeps all
unauthorized aircraft from entering the airspace. This must be done through
the FFA Flight Service Station at the Orlando International Airport.
VI.
COMMAND CONSIDERATIONS
A. Command should consider the dispatch of an additional Engine Company to perform
the LZ Group tasks, as well as being prepared for any unforeseen aircraft
emergencies.
B. The use of a helicopter can be a valuable resource for an Incident Commander. If the
incident becomes a situation that aerial reconnaissance is needed, the Commander
may request a helicopter to visualize the incident from the air. Aerial Recon may be
considered, but not limited to, the following possible uses: hazmat scenes, brush fires,
natural disasters, multi-alarm fires, and highrise fires.
C. Command may consider the need to employ the use of a helicopter for highrise
operations, to deliver crews to the roof, and possibly remove occupants from the roof.
Page 24 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
EOD - BOMB THREATS, SUSPICIOUS PACKAGE/DEVICE IN POSSSESSION, &
POST BLAST
I.
INTRODUCTION
A. OFD and OPD will respond to bomb threats within the City of Orlando.
B. OFD and OPD will respond and operate with the Hazmat Team and Bomb Squad on
incidents involving the following:
1. Unknown Packages
2. Suspicious Items or Packages
3. Improvised Explosive Devices
4. Incendiary Devices
5. Explosives
6. Explosive Chemicals
7. Shock Sensitive Materials
8. Pyrotechnics
9. Abandoned/Deteriorated Explosives
10. Ammunition
11. Any package suspected of containing any of the above
Note: The above items will be referred to as “Hazards” throughout this SOP.
C. The operational considerations are listed by priority.
1. Public safety
2. The safety of all OFD, OPD, and other responders
3. The protection and preservation of public and private property
4. The collection and preservation of evidence
5. The convenience for the public/restoration of services
Page 25 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
D. Definitions
1. Bomb Threat: Any written or verbal threat involving a hazard that may include an
explosive device or an explosive chemical with no visible hazards.
2. Suspicious Item or Package: An item or package that looks out of the ordinary, or
out of place, and brings an elevated concern for public safety.
3. Device in Possession: A hazardous item that has been deemed to be a
“Destructive Device” by Bomb Squad personnel.
4. Time of Detonation window: 15 minutes before, 15 minutes after the expected or
threatened detonation time.
5. PAR (Personnel Accountability Report): Called by Command at any time
personnel accountability needs to be established.
6. Render Safe Procedure (RSP): Announced by Command to advise all Units that
the Bomb Squad will be taking action against a hazard. This could involve the use
of a disrupter (gunshot), counter charge explosive, etc.
7. Explosive Ordinance Disposal (EOD): Bomb Squad events
E. When Command advises that a “Render Safe Procedure” will be used, all OFD
personnel will ensure they are behind hard cover and not in the line of sight of the
hazards (i.e., “Stand by for Render Safe Procedure”, personnel should be aware that a
disrupter and/or the sound of explosives may be heard).
F. OFD personnel will NOT routinely conduct searches of a building; however, they
may be utilized at the discretion of Command. OFD personnel may be requested to
conduct searches in common areas such as the exterior of the threatened building
and/or targets.
G. OPD and OFD will NOT mandate evacuations for bomb threats unless a hazard has
been confirmed. On-site management may voluntarily initiate an evacuation.
H. OFD personnel should try to locate any potential witnesses who may have knowledge
related to the hazards and have those witnesses report to Command for questioning by
responding Bomb Technicians and/or OPD.
II.
GENERAL SAFETY
A. OFD personnel WILL NOT move, open or disturb any potential hazards to confirm
that a “hazard” does exist.
B. It is necessary to realize that someone‟s real target may be public safety personnel.
Page 26 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
C. Always consider the possibility of secondary hazards, such as an explosive device
or persons (suicide bomber), that may have been put in place to harm First
Responders.
D. OFD must consider that ALL potential devices could contain radiological, chemical,
nuclear, and/or biological agents.
E. No human life will be risked or put in jeopardy for the purpose of securing or
preserving evidence or property.
F. Once an area has been evacuated and the perimeter secured, no personnel (law
enforcement, fire service, and/or others) will enter the hazard zone without the
expressed permission of the Bomb Technician and/or the Hazmat Officer.
G. During the EOD operation, radios should be used to monitor radio traffic and to
transmit only for an emergency situation.
H. Once an item as been deemed suspicious/hazardous by a Bomb Technician, only a
Bomb Technician may officially determine that the item is a non-hazard.
I. OFD personnel SHALL wear full protective gear, including SCBA, during the
following(may be modified at the discretion of Command):
1. Conducting searches
2. While waiting for the „time of detonation window” to elapse
J. Do not permit media personnel to establish communication up-links (microwave
transmitters) with their mobile units transmitting in the direction of the hazard (radio
energy could detonate the hazard).
III.
POLICY
A.
When approaching the scene, slow down to assess and observe the surroundings for
suspicious activities, items, and/or persons. Responding Units will stage a minimum
of 300 feet from the hazards. Remember to visually check for possible secondary
devices (hazards) where personnel are staged.
Note: The initial safety distance is 300 feet for all hazards. This distance may
change depending on the circumstances and type of hazard. The chart located at
the end of this section (ATF Evacuation Distance Table) may be used as a guideline
to establish appropriate evacuation distances. This distance may be modified at the
discretion of Command and/or the on-scene Bomb Technicians.
Page 27 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
IV.
B.
All civilians will be evacuated a minimum distance of 300 feet. If possible,
evacuated civilians and OFD personnel should remain upwind and protected by
hard cover.
C.
If the hazards are near or inside a building, stage evacuated personnel at a safe
distance that provides protection from flying debris, shrapnel, and possible building
collapse.
D.
If the hazard is located inside a building, evacuate a minimum of three floors (the
hazard floor, plus the floor above and below the hazard).
E.
Do not stage Units in the “line of sight” of the hazards. Protect personnel by using
hard cover when possible.
F.
When able, stage Units in a departing direction of travel, away from the hazards.
H.
All Units must work together to maintain the perimeter around the scene once it
has been established by Command.
COMMUNICATION GUIDELINES
A. OFD will respond one Unit (1 Engine or 1 Tower) to bomb threats involving
buildings, and/or open areas within the City of Orlando.
B. When any unknown package, suspicious item/package, device and/or potential
explosive hazard have been confirmed by OFD and/or OPD, OFD will initiate an
EOD response. The OFD Bomb Squad will not be dispatched until OFD and/or OPD
has arrived on the scene and confirmed a suspicious package has been located.
1. First Alarm EOD Response – EOD Group:
a. 1 Hazmat Tower
b. 1 Rescue
c. 1 District
d. Hazmat Unit, including E-101
e. Arson/Bomb Squad
Page 28 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
BOMB THREATS
I.
INTRODUCTION
A. This procedure establishes the guidelines that OFD will follow in response to all
incidents involving bomb threats.
B. Bomb threats are identified as two types. The two types (Normal Target and
Special Target) are based on the types of occupancy and will establish the OFD
search procedure.
C. “Normal Target” includes any normal residential or commercial occupancy.
D. “Special Target” includes three special commercial targets which have been
specifically identified due to the high liability designation of the occupancy and/or an
increased security risk. (OPD, OIA, OEA)
II.
PROCEDURE
A. NORMAL TARGET
1. First Engine or Tower
a. Size-up building and determine occupancy, construction type, and conditions
found (evacuation progress, threat specifics, etc.).
b. Wear full protective gear and breathing apparatus while assessing the potential
threat and waiting for the “time of detonation window” to elapse.
c. Meet with OPD Officer and ensure that the ranking OPD Officer has advised
the owner/occupant that the building or area should be evacuated.
d. If there is no compliance to this warning, the OFD Company Officer or the
OPD Officer will read the “Owner/Managers Advisory Card” (attachment A)
to the owner/manager. OPD Officers will not mandate an evacuation from the
building or area unless a suspicious package or explosive device is found.
e. Conduct a search. Instruct the owner/manager in charge, of their responsibility
to search the premises for a suspicious device or package. Instruct the
owner/manager that radios should only be used to receive information and not
to transmit from the area being searched. Inform the owner/manager that in
case a suspicious device or package is located, do not touch or move it, and
notify the Company Officer. The Company Officer would then initiate an
EOD response and advise the owner/manager to evacuate the premises
immediately. If the request is not met, notify OPD to mandate an evacuation.
Page 29 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
f. As a safety precaution, halt all operations and evacuate all personnel 15
minutes prior to “detonation time” and do not re-enter the building or area
until 15 minutes afterwards.
B. SPECIAL TARGET
1. Orlando Police Headquarters (OPH)
a. If the threat occurred to the OPD Headquarters or substation during normal
business hours, each OPD employee will be responsible for searching their
assigned work area and report the discovery of any suspicious package or
device.
b. If the threat occurred to OPD Headquarters or substation after normal business
hours, OPD personnel will be responsible for searching the interior of the
building.
c. The decision to evacuate OPD Headquarters or substations will be made by
the Chief of Police or his/her designee during normal business hours. After
hours, the decision may be made by the OPD Watch Commander.
2. Orlando Executive Airport (OEA)
a. For bomb threats to areas other than aircraft, the response and action will be
the same as any other building within the city.
b. Bomb threats to aircraft. Upon arrival, OFD Company Officer shall determine
the status of the aircraft and what actions have already been taken.
1) OFD Company Officer shall direct the aircraft to the designated bomb
disposal area or another area away from buildings, fuel storage, or other
aircraft.
2) All passengers shall be evacuated with their hand luggage and directed to
a designated search area.
3) At the direction of the OFD Incident Commander, Communications will
notify the appropriate agencies (OPD, FBI, FAA, etc.).
4) OFD Incident Commander may utilize airline personnel or other agencies
to search the aircraft.
5) In conjunction with the appropriate agency, OFD may inspect mail,
freight, and other cargo. If a passenger‟s luggage is opened, have the
owner of the luggage present.
Page 30 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
c. During the search, all portable radios shall be left “on” in order to receive
communications. The portable radios shall not be utilized by the search teams
to transmit. All communications by the search teams shall be verbal or by
using hand signals.
3. Orlando International Airport (OIA)
a. Bomb threats to buildings, aircraft and other areas of the airport shall be
handled by OPD Airport personnel and GOAA Fire Department in accordance
with current OPD, GOAA, and FAA directives.
b. In the event that a hazard is located, the OFD Bomb Squad will respond and
coordinate the scene with the FBI, OPD, GOAA Fire Department and OIA
operations personnel.
III.
COMMAND CONSIDERATIONS
A. When approaching the scene, slow down to assess and observe the surroundings for
suspicious activities, items, debris, and/or persons.
B. Upon stopping, visually check the surrounding area for possible hazards. Always be
aware of potential secondary devices.
IV.
APPENDIXES
A. Bomb Threat Advisory Card
Bomb Threat Owner/Manager Advisory Card
“In my judgment, the premises should be evacuated. Failure of the
owner/manager to comply with this request could result in criminal and/or civil
action if any injuries occur from the detonation of an explosive device”.
Page 31 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
SUSPICIOUS PACKAGE/DEVICE IN POSSESSION
I.
INTRODUCTION
A. This procedure will establish OFD‟s operating guidelines when dealing with a
suspicious package/device in possession.
B. An item has been identified by OFD or OPD as a package that looks out of the
ordinary, or out of place, and brings an elevated concern for public safety.
C. No explosion or detonation has been reported.
II.
PROCEDURE
A. First Engine or Tower
1.
Size up building and determine occupancy, construction type, and conditions
found (evacuation progress, package and/or threat specifics, etc.)
2. Wear full protective gear and protective breathing apparatus while assessing the
potential threat.
3.
Analyze the situation to determine threat level.
a. What does the item look like?
b. What is the size and type of container?
c. Any visible components/explosive?
d. Any additional items (secondary device)?
e. What is the exact location of the suspicious item?
f. How long has it been there?
g. Anyone in the vicinity of item, how long, what activity performing?
h. What approach was made to the item?
i. Was the item moved? If so, how?
j. Any additional hazards present? (chemicals, petroleum, etc)
4. If the item is obviously not a hazard, the scene will be terminated and/or released
to OPD.
Page 32 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
5. Make a determination based on the above criteria. If item looks out of the
ordinary, or out of place, and brings a concern for public safety.
6. Fill out an EOD Response.
7. Establish other support operations required.
a. Evacuation
b. Fire Support
c. EMS Support
d. Utilities
e. Technical Assistance
f. Blueprints/building plans
g. Area personnel/keys
8. Establish an EOD Group and communicate this location to the responding EOD
team.
a. Do not transmit on the radio if within a 300‟ perimeter of the Suspicious
Package, to confirm the hazard. Relocate to an area outside the safety
perimeter and transmit.
b. Once the area is evacuated, no fire service, law enforcement personnel or any
other people shall enter the established perimeter without the expressed
permission from the Bomb Technician.
c. The Suspicious Package shall not be moved, disturbed, or contacted in any
way.
d. All persons will be evacuated a minimum distance of 300 feet from the
Suspicious Package and behind cover.
e. If the Suspicious Package is located inside or near a structure, the immediate
area will be evacuated, including the surrounding rooms, as well as above and
below the package.
f. OFD Communications will send a “group page” to SIS team members to
complete the EOD response assignment.
Page 33 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
g. Search the surrounding area for potential secondary explosive devices.
h. The Bomb Technician shall determine the most appropriate method of
disposal of any Suspicious Package.
i. Assemble the following equipment at RIT staging area (Rescue Rope Bag,
Rescue Sled, SCBAs, Kevlar Vest and Helmet)
j. Maintain visual contact with the Bomb Technician during the Render Safe
Procedure (RSP), if possible.
k. Provide Rescue/Recovery as needed.
B. Hazmat Unit
1. Set up meters and equipment for Bomb Squad. (Ludlum Rad in basket, Multi-Rae
PID, HRM, APD 2000 for post screening/decon, hand cart).
a. Assist the Bomb Technician with suiting up.
b. Assist the Bomb Technician with evaluating the threat and assess the
environment. Assume that all devices may have harmful chemical, biological
and radiation agents added.
C. Rescue
1. Stage the Rescue with the EOD Group.
2. Park the Rescue in an area that will provide for an unobstructed departure.
3. Do not” bunker out” in protective gear, EMS only.
4. Treat and transport EOD Group personnel as needed.
5. Provide hydration and medical monitoring for the EOD Group.
III.
COMMAND CONSIDERATIONS
A. Verify response of the Bomb Truck.
B. Command Post location minimum 300‟ from threat (non-line-of-sight).
C. Establish Rapid Intervention Team.
D. Establish contact with OPD to verify/order evacuation and safety perimeter.
Page 34 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
E. In order to determine if further evacuation is necessary, the Incident Commander will
consider the following criteria:
1. Size and construction type of the structure
2. Occupancy and use of the structure
3. Exposures in the immediate vicinity of the structure
4. Size and external appearance of the Suspicious Package
5. Available information relating to the threat and/or Suspicious Package
6. Safe evacuation areas
7. Recommendations from the Bomb Technician
F. The Incident Commander will constantly evaluate the scene and request the
appropriate equipment.
1. Obtain Pre-Plans
2. Dedicate Rescue Unit to EOD Group
G. Establish decontamination as needed.
Page 35 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
POST BLAST (CONFIRMED OFD/OPD)
I.
INTRODUCTION
A. This procedure will establish OFD‟s operating guidelines when a Device in Possession
has detonated/exploded and has been confirmed by OFD or OPD.
B. A Post Blast incident may occur with many possible components, including:
1. Improvised Explosive Device(s)
2. Incendiary Device(s)
3. Explosive(s)
4. Explosive Chemical(s)
5. Shock Sensitive Material(s)
6. Pyrotechnics
7. Abandoned/Deteriorated Explosive(s)
8. Ammunition
C. A Post Blast incident may involve two potential scenarios;
1. An explosion occurring with No Previous OFD Response
2. An explosion occurring while OFD Bomb Squad is actively working a Confirmed
“Device in Possession”. If an explosion occurs with OFD on the scene, all Units will
relocate outside of the blast area and establish a 1000‟ perimeter.
II.
PROCEDURES
A. Unit Objectives
1. First Engine or Tower
a.
Size up building and determine occupancy, construction type, and conditions
found (evacuation progress, size of the blast site, approximate number of victims,
etc.)
b. Wear full protective gear and protective breathing apparatus while assessing
the potential threat.
Page 36 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
c. Analyze the situation to determine the additional threat level.
1) What does the area or building look like?
2) What size is the blast damage?
3) Any visible components/explosive?
4) Any additional items (secondary device)?
5) Exact location of the blast site?
6) Any additional hazards present (chemicals, petroleum, etc)?
d.
Establish other support operations required
1)
Evacuation
2)
Fire Support
3)
EMS Support
4)
Utilities
5)
Technical Assistance
6)
Blueprints/building plans
7)
Area personnel/keys
e.
Make a determination based on above criteria. Add necessary resources based
on the situation found.
f.
IF EOD NOT ON SCENE, Initiate an EOD Response and communicate an
appropriate EOD Group location to the responding EOD team (1000‟ away,
upwind, non line of sight).
1)
Do not transmit on the radio if within a 1000‟ perimeter of the Blast Site
while confirming the hazard. Relocate to an area outside the safety
perimeter and transmit.
2)
Once the area is evacuated, no fire service, law enforcement personnel or
any other people shall enter the established “hot zone” perimeter without
the expressed permission from the Bomb Technician.
Page 37 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
3)
No secondary devices or other suspicious items shall be moved, disturbed,
or contacted in any way.
4)
All persons will be evacuated a minimum distance of 1000 feet from the
Post Blast Site and behind cover.
5)
If the Post Blast Site is located inside or near a structure, the immediate
area will be evacuated, including the surrounding rooms, as well as above
and below the blast site.
6)
OFD Communications will send a “group page” to SIS team members to
complete the EOD response assignment.
7)
Search the surrounding area for potential secondary explosive devices.
8)
The Bomb Technician shall determine the most appropriate method of
disposal of any secondary suspicious device.
9) Assemble the following equipment at RIT staging area (Rescue Rope Bag,
Rescue Sled, SCBAs, Kevlar Vest and Helmet)
10) Maintain visual contact with the Bomb Technician during the Render Safe
Procedure (RSP), if possible.
11) Provide Rescue/Recovery as needed.
2.
Hazmat Unit
a. Set up meters and equipment for Bomb Squad. (Ludlum Rad in basket, MultiRae PID, HRM, APD 2000 for post screening/Decon, Hand Cart).
b. Assist the Bomb Technician with suiting up.
c. Assist the Bomb Technician with evaluating the Secondary Threat, if
applicable, and assess the potentially hazardous environment. Assume that all
devices may have harmful chemical, biological and radiation agents added.
3.
Rescue
a. Stage the Rescue Unit with the EOD Group.
b. Park the Rescue Unit in an area that will provide for an unobstructed
departure.
c. Do not “bunker out” in protective gear, EMS only.
Page 38 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
d. Treat and transport EOD personnel as needed.
e. Provide hydration and medical monitoring for the EOD personnel.
III.
COMMAND CONSIDERATIONS
A.
Obtain a PAR from all on scene Units if explosion occurs while on the scene.
B.
Evaluate the situation and the request appropriate equipment.
C.
Verify response of the Bomb Truck.
D.
Direct rescue efforts to immediately remove the injured out of the blast site area
prior to administering any medical treatment. A triage flag should be marked at the
patient location before removal of the victim.
E.
Establish contact with OPD to verify/order evacuation and establish an appropriate
safety perimeter.
F.
The Command Post shall be established upwind, a minimum of 2000‟ from the seat
of the explosion (non line-of-sight).
G.
Upon removal of the injured to a Treatment Group outside the secured area, only
Explosive Ordinance Personnel shall be permitted inside the secured area until
determined to be safe.
H.
Establish the Treatment Group(s) upwind, big enough to accommodate a large
number of casualties. This location should also interface with the Transportation
Group.
I.
Limit radio transmission inside the secured area. Prevent media from using
communication up-links with their mobile units until the Bomb Squad has
determined the area to be safe.
J.
Search for secondary devices.
K.
In order to determine if further evacuation is necessary, the Incident Commander
will consider the following criteria:
1. Size and construction type of the structure
2. Occupancy and use of the structure
L.
Exposures in the immediate vicinity of the structure:
1. Size and external appearance of the Suspicious Package/Device in Possession.
Page 39 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
2. Available information relating to the threat and/or device
3. Safe evacuation areas
4. Recommendations from the Bomb Technician
M. Obtain Pre-Plans
N. Request Bomb K-9 to establish a “safe zone” around the Command Post.
O. Establish decontamination as needed.
IV.
FIRST ALARM
A. EOD Response – 1 Hazmat Tower, 1 Rescue, 1 District, Hazmat Unit/E101,
Arson/Bomb Squad
Page 40 of 41
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
Explosives Mass1
(TNT equivalent)
Building
Evacuation
Distance2
Outdoor
Evacuation
Distance3
Pipe Bomb
5 lbs
2.3 kg
70 ft
21 m
850 ft
259 m
Suicide Belt
10 lbs
4.5 kg
90 ft
27 m
1,080 ft
330 m
Suicide Vest
20 lbs
9 kg
110 ft
34 m
1,360 ft
415 m
50 lbs
23 kg
500 lbs
227 kg
1,000 lbs
454 kg
4,000 lbs
1,814 kg
10,000 lbs
4,536 kg
30,000 lbs
13,608 kg
150 ft
46 m
320 ft
98 m
400 ft
122 m
640 ft
195 m
860 ft
263 m
1,240 ft
375 m
1,850 ft
564 m
1,500 ft
457 m
1,750 ft
534 m
2,750 ft
838 m
3,750 ft
1,143 m
6,500 ft
1,982 m
60,000 lbs
27,216 kg
20 lbs/5 gal
9 kg/19 l
1,570 ft
475 m
Fireball
Diameter4
40 ft
12 m
7,000 ft
2,134 m
Safe
Distance5
160 ft
48 m
100 lbs/25 gal
45 kg/95 l
69 ft
21 m
276 ft
84 m
2,000 lbs/500 gal
907 kg/1,893 l
184 ft
56 m
736 ft
224 m
8,000 lbs/2,000 gal
3,630 kg/7,570 l
292 ft
89 m
1,168 ft
356 m
40,000 lbs/10,000 gal
18,144 kg/37,850 l
499 ft
152 m
1,996 ft
608 m
High Explosives (TNT Equivalent)
Threat Description
Briefcase/Suitcase
Bomb
Compact Sedan
Sedan
Passenger/Cargo
Van
Small Moving Van/
Delivery Truck
Moving Van/Water
Truck
Semi-trailer
Threat Description
LPG Mass/Volume1
1
Based on the maximum amount of material that could reasonably fit into a container or vehicle. Variations possible.
Governed by the ability of an unreinforced building to withstand severe damage or collapse.
3
Governed by the greater of fragment throw distance or glass breakage/falling glass hazard distance. These distances can be
reduced for personnel wearing ballistic protection. Note that the pipe bomb, suicide belt/vest, and briefcase/suitcase bomb are
assumed to have a fragmentation characteristic that requires greater standoff distances than an equal amount of explosives in a
vehicle.
4
Assuming efficient mixing of the flammable gas with ambient air.
5
Determined by U.S. firefighting practices wherein safe distances are approximately 4 times the flame height. Note that an LPG tank
filled with high explosives would require a significantly greater standoff distance than if it were filled with LPG.
2
Page 41 of 41
DIVIDER
10. MEDICAL OPERATIONS
MASS CASUALTY
I.
INTRODUCTION
A. It is the policy of this department to institute Standard Command Structure at EMS
incidents requiring the commitment of three or more Companies. The basic system
outlined in this procedure is applicable to all multiple patient situations and should be
used routinely in such incidents.
1. This plan establishes standard structure and guidelines for the management of
OFD operations in a multi-casualty emergency medical situation.
2. This basic system may be applied to any multi-casualty incident and will integrate
into the overall fireground management system.
3. It is the responsibility of Command to make an early determination of situations
requiring the implementation of this plan.
4. Situations calling for the MCI plan to be implemented may include:
a. Aircraft accidents
b. Fires and/or explosions
c. Hazardous materials incidents
d. Structural collapse
e. WMD incidents
II.
ESTABLISHING MULTI-CASUALTY INCIDENT OPERATIONS
A. The following descriptions are guidelines to determine the level of OFD operations:
1. Normal day-to-day operations: Usually involving five or less victims and
requiring three or less fire department units.
2. First Alarm Medical (MCI): extended operations involving six or more victims or
requiring more than three OFD Units.
3. MCI Level 1 – 5-10 patients
MCI Level 2 – 11-20 patients
MCI Level 3 – 21-100 patients
MCI Level 4 – 101-999 patients
Page 1 of 12
MEDICAL OPERATIONS
MCI Level 5 – 1000+ patients
Note: Refer to Orange County EMS System Mass Casualty Medical Communications
Plan.
4. Disaster: Disaster operations involving more victims over a greater area than can
be handled by OFD resources, requiring coordination with outside agencies.
OFD‟s Disaster Plan will be implemented at this level. This level of operation will
also require that the Orlando Emergency Operations Center (EOC) is activated.
5. Consideration should be given to requesting that the MSU trailer be dispatched on
any First Alarm Medical or greater.
6. Consideration should also be given to requesting that EMS and Training Staff
respond on any First Alarm Medical or greater, to assist with Group operations.
Page 2 of 12
MEDICAL OPERATIONS
COMMAND
FIRE
MEDICAL
Fire Control Group
Triage Group
Treatment Group
Extrication Group
Transportation Group
Transport Staging Group
Page 3 of 12
MEDICAL OPERATIONS
III.
BASIC OPERATIONAL APPROACH
A. This Tactical Plan is intended to deal with incidents involving significant numbers of
patients in need of emergency medical care. This plan should be used routinely on the
5 to 10 patient type scenarios, and then the same basic approach could be expanded to
accommodate a disaster operation involving hundreds of patients.
B. The first priority is to locate the patients, assess the emergency care they will need,
and remove them from any immediate physical danger.
C. The second priority is to triage the injured using the START (Simple Triage and
Rapid Transport) System.
D. Upon completion of the above priorities, patients should be moved to the Treatment
Area for appropriate care. The Treatment Group should coordinate with the
Transportation Group to ensure that all patients are transported to the appropriate
medical facilities.
IV.
OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES
A. First Arriving Units – The first arriving Unit on the scene should start a size-up and
begin a simple victim triage using the S.T.A.R.T. system. This Unit should
immediately request assistance if the need is indicated. This Unit should request
resources needed to the responding Command Officer (or Dispatch if no Command
Officer is responding) or call for a First Alarm Medical, the most expeditious
response. The first arriving Unit on the scene of the incident should determine the
level of the MCI (Level 1-5) and notify the responding District Chief or
Communications of the situation and level.
B. The first arriving Unit should give an initial report containing the following:
1. Exact incident location
2. Incident description
3. Estimated number of patients: ALS and BLS
4. Estimated number of transport Units
5. Hazmat information if applicable
Page 4 of 12
MEDICAL OPERATIONS
C. When the first arriving Unit is overwhelmed, the request for a First Alarm Medical
shall be requested and an MCI shall be declared.
Note: A First Alarm Medical dispatch will include the following:
2 Engines, 1 Tower, 1 Rescue, 1 Heavy Rescue, 1 District Chief, and the next closest
ALS Unit.
D. The first arriving Officer on the scene shall be in charge and will begin deploying the
resources as needed until a Command Officer assumes Command. All other Units
shall stage or assume assignments as ordered.
E. Units shall bring all first aid equipment, backboards, traffic cones, and triage markers
used by the department to the scene. First aid equipment and triage tags should be
deposited at the Treatment Area. If no Treatment Area is established, Command
should consider assigning the second arriving Unit to establish this critical area.
F. Backboards shall be used to stabilize patients and transport these patients to the
Treatment Area. Traffic cones should be used to outline the different areas as needed.
G. All other arriving Units shall bring their equipment to the Treatment area for a
resource pool of equipment.
V.
GROUPING
A. Command and Group Officers must not get involved in the hands-on tasks of the
Group.
B. Nearly all multiple casualty incidents require victims to be extricated or located,
triaged, treated and transported to the hospital. These tasks, along with the support
tasks of these functional areas, become the Groups of the operations. To ensure
efficiency in the operation, Command should assign Groups as early as possible. Only
Command assigns the Groups and Command should assign one Officer to manage the
needs of each Group.
C. Group Officers should remember the following:
1. Group Officers should be supervisory personnel who are familiar with the role
assigned to them.
2. Each Group assumes a radio designation consistent with the function and
responsibility of the Group. Example: Transportation Group is responsible for the
transportation of the injured and will be called “Transportation.”
3. Each Group Officer communicates with Command via the radio. All personnel
assigned to the Group should communicate face-to-face.
Page 5 of 12
MEDICAL OPERATIONS
4. Group Officers should have visible identification, such as reflective vests, to
indicate the Group role that can easily be seen by personnel and crowds.
5. Each Group Officer is responsible for management of all required activities
within the Group.
6. Each Group Officer is responsible for the completion of adequate and appropriate
records of their Group‟s operation.
7. Group Officers shall direct all requests for additional manpower or equipment to
Command via the radio.
8. Group Officers shall provide Command with frequent updates on the progress of
the Group.
9. Group Officers should advise Command of completed tasks and notify Command
of personnel who are ready to be reassigned or redeployed.
10. Group Officers must not become involved in the physical tasks of the groups.
This may result in the loss of management control of the Group and/or operation.
VI. GROUPS
A. Creating Groups is vital for Command to manage the incident. The bigger the
incident, the more Groups that Command may have to establish. Each Group should
have a Group Officer and the personnel assigned to the Group should communicate
via face-to-face.
1. Triage: Upon arrival and initial assessment of multiple patients or an MCI, crews
should establish one or two person Triage Teams. These teams should utilize the
Department-provided triage equipment and begin to assess patients using the
START System. Triage Teams should not become involved in complex treatment
of patients.
2. START System: the START System utilizes three criteria to categorize victims:
a. Respiration
b. Perfusion
c. Mental status
B. Upon evaluation of these criteria, patients will be placed into one of the following
categories:
Page 6 of 12
MEDICAL OPERATIONS
1. Red: These are the highest priority patients that may be saved. This does not
include patients who have obvious fatal injuries. This classification will include
all critical patients who present with life-threatening conditions. These patients
will receive the highest priority transport.
2. Yellow: The Yellow category is the hardest category to assign. The classification
between critical and non-life-threatening is made upon an individual‟s
determination on what they may be presented with. The Yellow category is that of
patients who need field treatment, but in most cases are considered non-lifethreatening.
3. Green: This will usually encompass most of the patients in an MCI. These are
known as the “walking wounded.” Many of these patients will just need to be
checked, without treatment. These patients can be taken to a Staging Area for
transport when available, or use buses to stage and transport these patients to a
medical facility when time permits.
4. Black: These are the obvious dead and nothing can be done for these patients. In
an MCI, patients in cardiac arrest are considered dead. Do not attempt to perform
CPR on these patients. CPR is a time and resource intensive operation and
unreasonable in a true MCI. Black tagged patients should also have body marker
flags put in place prior to the body being moved to a morgue or a Temporary
Morgue Staging Area. (Body Marker flags are required in aircraft incidents as
part of the NTSB investigation.)
VII.
EXTRICATION
A. The Extrication Group is utilized in multi-patient medical incidents that require
physical extrication of trapped patients. In most cases, this will involve Tower
Companies that specialize in the removal of trapped patients.
B. The Extrication Group should advise Command of resources needed to complete
the task at hand. This request should include the amount of manpower needed for
litter bearers and any extra or specialized types of tools, machinery, transport
vehicles and lifting equipment.
C. Persons who are assigned to the Extrication Group are responsible for locating the
START triaged patients, removing them from the entanglement, and transporting
them to the established Treatment Areas. This may require multiple units to be
assigned as litter bearers. Coordination between the Extrication Group and the
Treatment Group is critical. Treatment must have adequate resources to treat the
different level patients. A staging or pooling area should be established near the
Treatment Area and all ambulatory patients should be directed there to be
evaluated.
Page 7 of 12
MEDICAL OPERATIONS
D. In certain cases, personnel from the Treatment Group may have to begin and
continue treatment of a patient while being extricated. Again, coordination between
the Treatment Group, Extrication Group, and Command is critical.
VIII.
TRANSPORTATION STAGING
A. In a large MCI, where OFD would be responsible for the treatment and
transportation of victims/patients, mutual aid from all available transport capable
ambulances and Rescues would be requested. In order to maintain a smooth
transition of these transportation units entering the scene and leaving for hospitals,
it is imperative that a Transportation Staging Group be created with the
responsibility of holding Units in staging until the Transportation Group requests
them to the scene. This will be typically located one to two blocks from the scene
with a direct path to the Transportation Staging Area. Units from outside the
immediate area should be given directions from their respective communications
center to report to the Transportation Station Area and await orders or directions.
This staging will allow the transfer of hospital directions and information to Units
that may not be familiar with the routes to the hospitals in the Orlando area. It will
also facilitate a direct one-on-one, when radio communications do not match or may
be down.
1. Efforts should be concentrated on removing the most critically injured (red tags),
however, do not overload the Treatment Area with patients, who will use all
available resources. If during the movement of patients to the Treatment Area,
Crews find patients who have expired, they should be left until last or until a
temporary morgue has been established. Upon moving the dead, Crews will mark
the spot of the body with a survey flag that is in the triage tubes.
2. All non-ambulatory patients should be moved on the backboards with CIDs as
required. Patients should be secured with straps, tape and/or cravats to ensure
immobilization. Litter bearers who deliver their patients to the Treatment Area
should return with additional equipment to continue the movement of patients.
Litter bearers should utilize carts, pickup trucks, Rescue vehicles, and other
suitable conveyances to help in completing the task. Care needs to be taken by
Crews not to over-extend themselves in lifting and carrying. If members need
help lifting and carrying, they need to ask for help. Upon completion of patient
movement, the Group Officer should notify Command of the manpower
availability and Command may redirect those Crews as needed.
3. Treatment
a. Red: Critical, unstable, high priority, life-threatening injuries. These could be
both treatable and untreatable in the field setting.
b. Yellow: Serious, non-critical, BLS, to eventual life-threatening injuries if
allowed to go untreated.
Page 8 of 12
MEDICAL OPERATIONS
c. Green: Walking wounded to non-injured patients. Usually these patients can
be transported by bus or large capacity vehicle for evaluation.
d. Black: Dead. These patients are either left where they have been found until
all others have been transported, or they may be placed in a temporary morgue
until arrangements can be made from the Medical Examiner‟s Office.
IX.
TRANSPORTATION
A. The Transportation Group Officer is responsible for coordination between the
Treatment Group, transport Units, and the hospitals. This Group Officer will, in most
cases, need to secure a second radio to be in communication with Command on the
primary channel and with Transport or hospitals on the second radio on the
MEDCTRL Talk Group. This radio may be secured from personnel working on the
scene. This Group Officer is required to keep records of the number of patients
transported, where the patients are being transported, and who is transporting. It is
imperative that the Transport Group works with the private ambulance Supervisors
and DES representatives to ensure smooth, orderly movement of the patients. The
Transportation Group Officer must also coordinate between the area hospitals as to
not overload any one hospital. The following are high consideration factors that the
Group must understand and address:
1. Hospital T-Cap: This report is the number and type of patients that each hospital
can receive in the first hour of an MCI (before additional resources become
available following the activation of the facilities disaster plan). The T-cap is
available from Orange County Med-Com on the Medical Directors channel or the
MCI channel. The Transport Group Officer will need to communicate with MedCom to keep updated on the different hospital status levels.
2. Ground Transport: Most patients will be transported to the hospital via Rescues or
ground ambulances. This requires the Transport Group Officer to direct which
Unit will transport which patient. If the incident is of such magnitude the Incident
Commander may have to appoint a Medical Staging Officer for ground transport
Units. Ground Transports may include fire department Rescues, ambulances, and
buses for the walking wounded.
3. Provide accountability for all patients.
a. Announce transport of each patient, giving triage category and destination.
b. Keep record of patient ID (triage tag # or UPI armband #) and destination on
patient accountability log.
c. Follow up to verify patients arrived at designated hospital, as time permits (by
tag # or patient name).
Page 9 of 12
MEDICAL OPERATIONS
4. Landing Zones
a. If utilized, the Transportation Group Officer will select a Landing Zone and
assign personnel to staff it. Assigned personnel must have a portable radio, ear
protection, eye protection, and be identified with orange safety vest and/or
emergency lights or landing zone lights.
b. The Landing Zone must be located and identified for the pilot. The Landing
Zone must be relatively flat and free from obstructions in an area
approximately 100 feet by 100 feet. The approach and departure paths must be
free of obstructions and into the wind.
c. Approach and departure paths should not pass over the Treatment Area,
Command Post or any area where the rotor was and noise will cause
problems.
d. Attempt to locate the landing zone at least 300 feet from other activities.
e. Further information on landing zones may be found under the Helicopter
Operations Section.
X.
REHABILITATION
A. Command should understand and consider utilization for rehab for all Crews
operating on an MCI. It should be understood that most Firefighters will not volunteer
to go to Rehab, but must be ordered there. Crews may feel pressure to continue to
push themselves to a point of exhaustion. Crews who work this long may end up
being patients and not rescuers. If needed, Command should request additional
resources to replace some Crews.
XI.
SAFETY
A. As with any fire department operation, safety should be of high importance to
Command. Command should appoint an overall Safety Officer to ensure Crew and
scene safety. The Safety Officer should be aware of all the aspects of the operation:
Extrication, Treatment, Transportation, Helicopter Operations, and Crew fatigue. The
Safety Officer needs to identify hazards and keep Command aware of these hazards
during the operations. Should the Group Officer see any severe threatening safety
factors, they should immediately stop operations in that area and either remove the
Crews or rectify the safety issue.
XII.
COMMAND CONSIDERATIONS
A. The Officer assuming Command of a medical incident is responsible for the
management and control of the following functions:
Page 10 of 12
MEDICAL OPERATIONS
1. Establishment of a Command Post and appropriate Command Structure
2. Determination of resources needed to accomplish objectives
3. Extrication of trapped patients and movement of patients to appropriate Treatment
Areas
4. Triage of patients
5. Field treatment, stabilization, and preparation of patients for transport
6. Transportation and distribution of patients to appropriate medical facilities
7. Provisions of medical supplies needed at the scene
8. Liaison with other departments and agencies involved in the incident
9. Communication of regular progress reports to Dispatch
10. Maintain adequate and appropriate records of Operations
B. These overall Command responsibilities may be assumed by the Officer in Command
of the entire incident or may be delegated to a Division or Group level, depending on
the size and complexity of the situation.
C. In incidents that involve firefighting or other operations, the medical responsibilities
should be assigned to a separate District Chief or higher and be called “Medical
Group.” In this case, Units assigned to the Medical Group should be assigned to a
different radio talk group. The Medical Group Officer should secure a second radio
and be available to talk to both Command on the primary talk group, and other Units
on the Medical talk group.
D. The following items should also be considered by Command:
1. Groups must be established early in the incident.
2. Command should assign one Officer to manage the needs of each Group.
3. When face-to-face assignments are given by Command, Command should repeat
these assignments over the radio.
4. Written records of the incident must be kept by Command and Group Officers.
5. An aide should be assigned to the Command Post to assist in recordkeeping.
Page 11 of 12
MEDICAL OPERATIONS
6. Assign a Safety Officer upon arrival of the second District Chief.
7. Representatives from Orange County Department of Emergency Services ((DES)
should be assigned to assist the Transportation Group.
8. The Medical Director (if responding) and all other authorized physicians should
be assigned to assist the Treatment Group.
9. Rehab Group should be assigned and crews should be mandated to rotate through
Rehab. This includes Group Officers and Command.
10. Consider establishment of a CISD Group if conditions warrant.
Page 12 of 12
DIVIDER
11. SUPPORT OPERATIONS
STAGING
I.
INTRODUCTION
Staging is the process of assembling resources in a designated area to possibly be utilized
to the advantage of the Incident Commander. Command should constantly evaluate the
situation and understand the necessity of maintaining a reserve of Companies in an effort
to proactively control the incident.
A. Command must balance the tactical problems with the resources required to control
those problems and stay ahead of the situation.
1. Beware of “crisis management” where the situation grows at a rate faster than the
response to that situation. Command ends up with an out of control situation and
inadequate resources to control it.
B. Many times, Command will reach a point where he begins to consider calling for
another alarm or not. In such cases, call for it.
1. Always opt for the extra in the “should I, or shouldn‟t I stage”? If the extra
resource is not needed, it can easily be put back in service.
C. In most cases, Command should utilize greater alarms, rather than piecemeal Units
into the scene.
1. Requesting additional alarms is quicker and provides for move-ups.
2. These additional alarms should be struck sequentially (from first alarm, second
alarm, third alarm, fourth alarm, etc.)
D. It is the responsibility and function of Command to determine the resources required
to control the situation and to provide for the timely call for any additional resources
required.
E. Command must be aware of both the capability and response time of additional
resources and effectively integrate these facts into calls for additional resources.
F. Some tactical situations move slowly, while some move very quickly. Command
must call for additional resources at a rate that stays ahead of the fire.
1. Some situations require the call for additional alarms upon Command‟s
knowledge of particular conditions.
Page 1 of 25
SUPPORT OPERATIONS
2. In other situations, Command will initiate some fire control activities, ask for
reports, and based upon the receipt of bad news, will strike more alarms.
G. As Command calls for additional resources, he must build a corresponding Command
structure to manage those additional resources.
1. Command cannot encounter a big fire situation, call additional alarms, and then
expect to effectively manage additional resources in a single alarm Command
Mode.
II.
WHEN TO SUMMON ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
A. An actual or potential fire situation exists and the life hazard exceeds the rescue
capabilities of the initial alarm Companies.
B. The number, location, and condition of actual victims exceed the
rescue/removal/treatment capabilities of Companies.
C. An actual or potential fire situation exists and the property protection demand (both
internal and external) exceeds the fire control capabilities of initial alarm Companies.
D. Fire conditions become more severe or the situation deteriorates significantly.
E. All Companies have been committed and the fire is not controlled.
F. Forces are depleted due to exhaustion, injury, entrapment, or missing. Command
must forecast the effect the fire will have on personnel in advance.
G. Command runs out of some resource (personnel, apparatus, water, equipment,
Command, etc.).
H. There is evidence of significant fire, but Companies are unable to determine location
or extent.
I. The commitment of Companies is not effective.
J. Companies cannot effectively perform early salvage operations.
K. Situation becomes so widespread and complex that Command can no longer
effectively “cope” and the situation requires larger Command organization and more
Division/Group functions.
L. Command instinctively feels the need to summon additional resources (don‟t
disregard fireground hunches).
Page 2 of 25
SUPPORT OPERATIONS
III.
STAGING
A. Staging is used when an “on the scene” reserve of Companies is required.
B. These Companies are placed in a staging area at a location designated by Command.
When Command announces “Staging”, all second alarm and greater Companies will
report to and remain in the staging area until assigned. When going to Staging,
Command will give an approximate location for the Staging Area. All other
responding units will proceed to the Staging Area.
C. The Staging Area should be away from the Command Post and from the emergency
scene in order to provide adequate space for assembly and for safe and effective
apparatus movement.
D. When calling for additional resources, Command shall call for Staging and the
location of Staging at the time of the call. This is more functional than calling for
Staging while Units are en route. The additional Units will be dispatched to the
Staging Area.
IV.
STAGING GROUP
A. Command or Support should designate a Staging Officer who will be responsible for
the activities outlined in this procedure. This is a must on large scale operations,
however, it may not occur in fast and rapidly developing incidents (first and second
alarm working fires). In the absence of such an assignment, the first OFD Officer to
arrive at the Staging Area will automatically become the Staging Officer and will
notify Command or Support on the assigned tactical channel.
B. Due to the limited number of Truck Companies, a Truck Company Officer will
transfer responsibility for staging to the first arriving Engine Company Officer.
Staging Officers will assign their Company members to the best advantage. Upon
arrival of the day staff and additional Chief Officers, Command should replace the
front line Company Officer assigned as Staging Group, as soon as possible.
C. In some cases, Command or Support may ask the Staging Officer to scout the best
location for the Staging Area and report back as to the location.
D. The radio designation for the Staging Officer will be “Staging.” All other Companies
will stand by their Unit with Crew intact and warning lights turned off. Staged Units
will indicate their status to Communications as “Staged.”
E. When directed by Command or Support, the Staging Officer will verbally assign
Companies to report to specific Divisions or Groups, telling them where and to whom
to report. Staging will then advise Command or Support of the specific Units
Page 3 of 25
SUPPORT OPERATIONS
assigned. The operating Division/Group Officer may then communicate directly with
the Company by radio. When assigned, Companies will indicate their status as “on
the scene” by radio.
F. Staging will give Command or Support periodic reports of available Companies in
staging. Command will utilize this information to request additional resources.
G. The Staging Officer will also be responsible for the following functions:
1. Coordinate with the police department to block streets, intersections, and other
access required for the Staging Area.
2. Ensure that all apparatus are parked in an appropriate manner.
3. Maintain a log of Companies available in the Staging Area and inventory all
specialized equipment that might be required at the scene.
4. Send progress reports to Command or Support indicating number and type of
Units available.
5. Assume a position that is visible and accessible to incoming and staged
Companies. This will be accomplished by leaving the Unit‟s warning lights in
operation.
6. In some cases, the Staging Officer may have to indicate the best direction of
response and routing for responding Companies to get into the Staging Area.
H. Ambulances responding to incidents where Staging has been established will be
dispatched to the Staging Area. The Staging Officer will acknowledge the arrival of
the ambulances with Communications and will give instructions to the ambulance
personnel as required by Command or Support.
I. At some incidents, such as a major medical emergency, it may be necessary to
designate a parking area for used (committed) apparatus near the incident scene. This
would be necessary when the Staging Area is too far from the incident to facilitate
hand-carrying needed equipment to the incident site. In such cases, the Staging
Officer shall designate the parking site and instruct each Company of its location
prior to leaving Staging. The parking area should be close enough to the incident site
to allow easy transfer of needed equipment to the scene. The parking area should in
no way impede necessary access for ambulances or other Units to the incident area.
J. Unless otherwise instructed by Command or Support, Staging will advise Command
when the level of resources in the Staging Area is depleted to two Engines and one
Truck or less. Command or Support will make a decision whether or not to request
additional Companies.
Page 4 of 25
SUPPORT OPERATIONS
V.
COMMUNICATIONS
A. Communications will dispatch all Staging Units, per normal procedure, and then
assign them to a Staging TAC.
B. Units responding as part of Staging will give responses on this assigned TAC and
remain off the operations TAC until assigned by Staging or Command to report to the
scene.
C. Units will give “Staged” report to Communications and report in person to the
Staging Officer.
D. All communications involving Staging will be between the Staging Officer and
Command or Support.
Page 5 of 25
SUPPORT OPERATIONS
EVACUATION
I.
PUBLIC INFORMATION AND EVACUATION CENTERS
A. Any major evacuation will require and benefit from complete Public Information
notification.
1. A Public Information Officer must be assigned to communicate with radio and
television stations as quickly as possible to explain exactly what the situation is
and what people involved should do.
2. Radio and television stations will make special announcements when requested by
the Public Information Officer.
B. In most situations, it is desirable to have a location where evacuees can be directed.
1. This should be a school, church, or public facility where evacuees can gather and
find temporary shelter in a safe location.
a. This center should be located and identified as quickly as possible.
C. When a long-term evacuation (more than two to three hours) is anticipated, contact
the City Emergency Manager who will contact Red Cross to set up a temporary
shelter.
1. This is usually best accomplished at a school.
II.
IDENTIFICATION OF EVACUATION AREA
A. In a variety of possible situations, it may be necessary to evacuate an area of the city.
1. This may include hazardous material emergencies, potential explosions,
hurricanes, major fires, or similar situations.
2. An evacuation of anything more than a single structure requires a coordinated
effort between Fire and Police Commanders at the scene to ensure that evacuation
is rapid and complete, without unnecessary duplication of effort.
3. It requires a definite plan and a method of reporting progress.
B. When the evacuation of an area is indicated due to an imminent physical hazard (fire,
explosion, toxic material, etc.), the limits of the Evacuation Area will normally be
determined by OFD Command at the scene.
1. The practical considerations of what resources are available and what degree of
risk is involved will be factors in the determination of evacuation limits.
Page 6 of 25
SUPPORT OPERATIONS
C. In cases involving other influences and when time is available, the evacuation may be
deliberately planned.
1. Normally, a unified Command Post will be established involving multiple
departments/agencies.
Example: Evacuation for hurricane expected within six hours would be planned
in the EOC involving other departments, management, National Guard, etc.
D. OPD will be responsible for enforcement of the perimeter of the evacuation area,
including traffic and pedestrian control.
E. OFD will be responsible for assessment of the degree of danger, the need for
evacuation and the physical safety of personnel operating within the evacuation zone.
III.
ORGANIZATION OF EVACUATION
A. Once the desired area of evacuation and the perimeter have been established, a plan is
necessary to actually conduct the desired evacuation.
1. This will be dependent on the resources available (fire, police, other agencies) and
the type of situation.
2. Personnel from one or several agencies may be involved in actually alerting
citizens and assisting them to evacuate.
B. Establish a Command Post for both police and fire.
1. OPD‟s Mobile Command vehicle is most suitable for the purpose.
2. Utilize maps of the area to make assignments and report progress jointly to avoid
duplication or omissions.
3. If it is not feasible to have a unified Command Post with both Police and Fire
together, a liaison will have to be established.
4. Assign Units or Companies to evacuate specific objectives (e.g., a building, a
block, a street) and report completion.
5. Assign Geographic Divisions to supervise operations.
6. Advise personnel if evacuees are to be directed to a particular Evacuation Center.
7. Use public announcement function on electronic sirens to alert citizens.
Page 7 of 25
SUPPORT OPERATIONS
8. Start with areas in the most immediate danger first. Assign priorities based on the
degree of risk.
9. Consider contacting Communications and have Reverse 911 initiated to assist in
evacuation notification.
Page 8 of 25
SUPPORT OPERATIONS
FIRE CAUSE INVESTIGATION
I.
POLICY
A. It is the responsibility of Command or the Officer in charge of the scene to provide
for cause investigation of every fire incident causing injury or property damage. This
must be accomplished after fire control activities and before overhaul actions, which
could hinder the investigation. There is a responsibility to attempt to determine fire
cause in all cases, not only when arson is suspected. The lessons learned in cause
determination of accidental fires will be relayed back to the OFD property
management database and will be used to prevent future fires. Prior to requesting a
fire investigator, Field Operations personnel will complete a preliminary investigation
and comply with the following guidelines. Remember that they may be requested
after a preliminary investigation has been completed and the need for an investigator
has been confirmed.
The following points will be considered prior to requesting an investigator:
1. Interviews
a. The process of fire investigating begins with personal observations and the
interviewing of witnesses. Upon initiating an investigation, make contact with
involved parties and compile background information. Upon making contact
with involved parties, properly identify yourself and inform them of your
objective. Consider interviewing other Firefighters, police officers, witnesses,
property owners, occupants, tenants, lease holders, etc. and properly document
any findings.
2. Origin and Cause
a. When attempting to locate the origin of a fire, work from the least fire
damaged area to the most damaged area. Secondly, after determining the
origin, attempt to locate the cause of the fire. This may be done using a
process of elimination, observations made at the fire scene, and by using the
common sense approach.
b. Remember to limit overhaul and scene damage in the event your preliminary
investigation determines the incident is suspicious, undetermined, and/or
arson.
Page 9 of 25
SUPPORT OPERATIONS
B. Requesting a fire investigator
1. A fire investigator may be called once the following tasks have been
completed.
a. The Company Officer has interviewed and documented all pertinent
information from witnesses and other involved parties.
b. An attempt was made to determine an origin and cause.
2. An investigator may be requested for the following circumstances.
a. Questions and/or concerns need to be addressed with an investigator. A
response is not automatic. The investigator will determine whether to
respond, based on SIS criteria.
b. Undetermined origin and cause
c. Attempted or confirmed arson
d. Serious injury and/or death (investigator notification is NOT required for
minor, non-life-threatening injuries)
e. Large dollar loss, greater than $250,000
f. Vehicle fire
-
Investigators should not be called to accidental vehicle fires.
-
Investigators will respond to intentional or suspicious vehicle fires at
their discretion. Contact the “on call” investigator.
-
Field Operations personnel must gain access to the engine
compartment and trunk space to verify extinguishment and document
evidence or lack thereof. Disconnect battery.
-
Search the surrounding area to look for evidence connected to the fire
(e.g., gas container, tire tracks, foot prints).
g. When requesting an investigator, request the “on call” investigator.
h. Contacting an investigator for consultation does not mandate a response. If
there are questions related to a fire, contact an investigator for assistance
and support.
Page 10 of 25
SUPPORT OPERATIONS
i. Request OPD to respond to assist with documentation.
C. When a fire investigator is on the scene or responding, Companies shall delay nonessential overhaul until the investigator has time to survey the area. Salvage activities,
which stop further property damage, should continue if they do not interfere with the
area of origin or any possible evidence.
1. When delay in response by an investigator is indicated, Command shall assign
personnel to protect the fire scene and maintain custody until the arrival of an
investigator.
2. If, in the opinion of Command, a logical determination as to the cause of the fire
has been made, they will not be required to contact an investigator.
a. Exceptions:
- Any structure fire in which there has been an excessive loss of property
and/or large dollar loss (notification decision is based on Command‟s
discretion).
- Any fire where there is a serious casualty (civilian or Firefighter) that
requires hospitalization and is directly due to the incident.
- Where arson or criminal mischief is suspected.
- Any fire that is deemed suspicious.
D. After achieving fire control, Command will release Companies not required to
complete investigation and overhaul.
1. In some cases involving lengthy investigation times, Companies can return to
quarters and later return to the scene to complete overhaul activities with the
consent of the investigator.
E. Command will turn over jurisdiction of the fire area to the investigator as soon as
possible after the fire is stabilized.
1. The investigator retains jurisdiction until he releases it back to Command.
2. The investigator may inform Command that he intends to maintain custody of the
scene for further investigation.
F. The investigator will request from Command any manpower or equipment needed to
assist in the investigation. Command will respond to such requests to the extent
possible under the prevailing circumstances.
G. All personnel will cooperate with the investigator. Protection of the fire scene and
preservation of physical evidence will be a primary concern, once life safety is
secured and fire control is achieved. Personnel will assist the fire investigator with
debris removal, lighting, ventilation, air monitoring, etc.
Page 11 of 25
SUPPORT OPERATIONS
II.
DESTRUCTION OF EVIDENCE
A. One of the reasons incendiary fires are not prosecuted is the misconception of all
evidence being destroyed by the fire. Evidence is not destroyed in fires (except in rare
cases)
1. The form, shape, color, size and weight are certainly altered; but it can still be
identified and placed in proper perspective.
2. OFD must protect the scene from damage during firefighting. Regardless of who
is conducting the investigation, preservation of the fire scene is essential for a
quality fire scene investigation. Upon extinguishment of the fire, unnecessary
personnel must be restricted from the fire scene and overhaul must be limited.
a. Extinguishment: Evidence can be “washed out” with misuse of fire streams.
b. Overhaul: Causes the most damage to evidence needed by police and fire
investigators for prosecution.
c. Salvage: Limiting salvage operations is necessary to prevent destruction of
evidence and preserve the scene for the investigator.
3. The fire scene is the investigator‟s laboratory, therefore:
a. Search it carefully and thoroughly.
b. Photograph everything in place.
c. Reconstruct the scene.
d. Collect and preserve all evidence.
III.
EVIDENCE
A. Guard the scene
1. Post a guard (preferably an OPD Officer).
2. Maintain custody until release of the scene.
3. Prevent unauthorized persons from entering (OFD has the authority to close the
scene).
4. Prevent contamination of the fire scene and destruction of evidence.
Page 12 of 25
SUPPORT OPERATIONS
a. On scenes where criminal activity is suspected and a fatality has occurred or
probable, Command should consider removal of all non-essential personnel
from the building involved. OPD will establish a list of anyone who enters the
scene.
b. Do not refuel any power saws or other equipment near the fire scene.
c. Do not touch items on a fire scene with an ungloved hand, unless absolutely
necessary.
d. Do not walk through the scene after completing the initial fire suppression,
unless authorized by the Incident Commander or investigator.
e. Do not remove furniture or other items from the scene, unless absolutely
necessary for the fire control.
B. Keep witnesses on the scene.
1. Units on the scene that come in contact with witnesses or occupants should advise
them to stand by for Command or the fire investigator.
2. On all fire scenes, the first-in Crew is one of the most valuable witnesses.
a. This is particularly true on any fire considered suspicious in nature.
b. Command needs to keep all Units on the scene that have taken part on any fire
that involves a fatality or potential fatality. This will ensure that the
investigator obtains necessary statements from all personnel.
3. If any potential witness needs to leave the scene, Command should obtain as
much information as possible and/or have OPD make contact with the witness.
Witness information shall be provided to the fire investigator upon arrival.
Page 13 of 25
SUPPORT OPERATIONS
POLICE LIAISON
I.
POLICY
A. A large portion of Emergency Responses from OFD involves some interaction of a
routine nature between OPD and OFD personnel.
B. In complex situations, however, there is often a need for Command level interaction
between the two departments.
C. In cases where this interaction becomes complex, Command may assign a Fire
Officer as a Liaison to coordinate functions in this area.
1. In situations involving several OPD Officers, a senior Officer or Supervisor
should be instructed to report to the Command Post.
2. When there is a need for communication between OFD and OPD, and no
supervisor has reported to the Command Post, one should be requested through
Communications or through any OPD Officer on the scene.
3. The OPD Supervisor should be requested to stay at the Command Post with the
assigned Liaison.
D. The Liaison will coordinate all activities requiring coordination between the
departments. Examples are:
1. Traffic control
2. Crowd control – establishment of perimeters
3. Evacuation – hazardous materials, etc.
4. Fatalities
5. Crime scenes – bombing, etc.
6. Persons interfering with fire department operations
E. The Liaison will be responsible for determining the specific needs in each situation
and communicating these to the Police Supervisor.
Page 14 of 25
SUPPORT OPERATIONS
F. Some situations are naturally more of a police responsibility than a fire responsibility.
1. In these situations, the Liaison should station himself at the Police Command Post
to coordinate requests for assistance from OPD.
2. OPD will provide specialized equipment or expertise and all personnel must be
aware of their jurisdiction.
3. Deceased bodies are the responsibility of OPD, delegated by the Medical
Examiner.
II.
TRAFFIC CONTROL
A. Communications will automatically notify OPD for the need for traffic control at any
working fire.
1. When the need for traffic control is urgent or complex, it should be reported to
Communications to be relayed by Police dispatcher.
2. Time will be saved if specific traffic control locations are relayed through
Communications.
a. Example: “Have Police Department close Orange Avenue from Colonial
Drive to Livingston Street.”
3. When specialized traffic control measures are needed, such as with hazardous
materials incidents, the basic requirements may be relayed through
Communications with a request for a Police Supervisor at the Command Post.
III.
CROWD CONTROL
A. OPD will enforce a “fireline” as identified by OFD.
B. It is the responsibility of OPD to keep unauthorized persons outside this fireline.
1. Authorized personnel inside this fireline are the responsibility of OFD (including
news media, utility personnel, fire buffs, etc.).
2. Command must identify the area to be controlled to OPD, keeping in mind the
possible dangers of the situation and the area needed for Operations.
Page 15 of 25
SUPPORT OPERATIONS
C. The Liaison is responsible for coordinating the location and establishment of the
fireline with OPD and directing the work of OFD personnel assigned to assist with
this function.
1. Within the fireline is a smaller area known as the “fireground.” This is the
immediate danger zone within which only specifically assigned personnel with
protective clothing and equipment are authorized. Control of this zone is an OFD
responsibility.
IV.
EVACUATION
A. At incidents involving exposure of a large number of citizens to danger, such as
hazardous materials incidents, it often becomes necessary to use OPD Officers to
maintain evacuation of an area.
1. In these cases, it is essential that a Liaison and a Police Supervisor meet to
coordinate manpower needs and assignments, establish perimeters, and exchange
information.
2. Accurate and timely information must be shared by both departments to minimize
risks to personnel and the public.
V.
PERSONS INTERFERING WITH FIRE DEPARTMENT
A. When OFD personnel encounter interference from anyone at the scene of an incident,
a specific request shall be made to OPD, identifying the problem encountered and the
desired actions. In such circumstances, a Police Liaison Group Officer shall be
assigned to work with the Police Supervisor.
B. If the situation reaches a point where OFD personnel are physically endangered by an
unstable situation, OFD Units will withdraw until OPD can stabilize the situation.
1. The Liaison will work with the Police Commander in coordinating the re-entry of
Units into such areas.
2. Unstable civil situations are an OPD responsibility, therefore, OFD personnel and
equipment will not be used in violent crowd control situations, except in selfdefense.
C. Following a fire, for which no responsible party is available, it may become necessary
to leave the premises or valuable property in the possession of OPD.
1. At major incidents, the Police Liaison Group Officer will handle the details of
transferring responsibility with the Police Supervisor.
Page 16 of 25
SUPPORT OPERATIONS
PROPERTY CONSERVATION
I.
PROPERTY CONSERVATION
A. It is standard procedure to commit whatever fireground resource is required to reduce
property loss to an absolute minimum. The activities that relate to effective property
conservation require the same early and on-going Command functions and aggressive
action as both rescue and fire control. All members are expected to perform in a
manner that continually reduces loss during fire operations.
B. Early recognition that the forward progress of the fire has been stopped is an
important element in reducing loss. The earlier the salvage operations begin, the
smaller the loss. When basic fire control has been achieved, Command must commit
and direct Companies into “stop loss” activities. Such activities generally include:
1. Evaluating damage to overall fire area
2. Evaluating the salvage value of various areas
3. Evaluating the personnel and equipment that will be required
4. Committing the required Companies to salvage functions
5. Reducing hoselines from fire control functions to salvage functions
C. In cases where there is an overlapping need for both fire control and salvage to be
performed, and where initial alarm Companies are involved in fire, additional alarms
may be used in the salvage function.
D. Commit the same overall resources to property conservation activities as were
devoted to rescue and fire control.
E. Be aware that personnel involved in rescue and fire control operations are generally
fatigued by the time property conservation functions must be completed. This can
result in sloppy work and many injuries. Evaluate the condition of personnel and
replace with fresh Firefighters, if needed.
F. The provision of salvage functions must be integrated with the investigation phase.
When fire control becomes stable, back fire control Companies out and let fire
investigators develop a plan. Be cautious of early salvage operations, to avoid
disturbing potential evidence for the fire investigation. They may shovel out the
evidence with the debris. All Units on the scene should handle the scene as a crime
scene until Command or an investigator determines otherwise. Command and interior
Crews should consider the following recommendations.
Page 17 of 25
SUPPORT OPERATIONS
1. Units should use their thermal imaging equipment to assess the extent of fire
spread and the best location to breach and open up the voids.
2. Truck Companies should also consider breaching walls and ceilings on the
opposite side of the room of origin. This will leave fire patterns intact in the room
of origin and give the Crews the ability to search for extension of the fire.
3. When there is smoldering furniture in the room of origin, prior to removing the
furniture, Crews should consider the following:
a. Can the smoldering be stopped by the use of an extinguishing agent (i.e., a
water can/extinguisher or the hoseline)?
b. Make mental notes as to the location of the items removed to assist the
investigator in the reconstruction of the scene.
G. Much of the property conservation profile of a building can be identified during prefire planning activities. Command must consider this profile in developing and
extending a plan of attack.
H. The five objectives to be considered during property conservation operations are:
1. Stopping additional property loss
2. Verifying that the fire is completely extinguished
3. Determining the fire origin
4. Determining the fire cause
5. Returning the occupancy to use, when possible
II.
COMMAND CONSIDERATIONS
A. Command should be aware of two types of fire damage:
1. Primary fire damage is caused by the products of combustion. It affects both
victims and property in similar ways, causing injury and death to one and damage
and destruction to the other.
2. Secondary damage is caused by rescue, forcible entry, ventilation, checking for
extension, and water application.
B. During salvage and overhaul operations, Command will confirm if the IDLH
atmosphere still exists. The following will be ensured by Command after the IDLH
confirmation:
Page 18 of 25
SUPPORT OPERATIONS
1. Use of proper PPE
2. Use of SCBA
3. Continuous ventilation
4. Continuous atmosphere monitoring
III.
SUMMARY
A. Manage resources in a manner that minimizes and reduces loss.
B. Decide what property conservation operations will be required.
C. Commit necessary personnel, equipment, and Command to property conservation.
D. Continue to coordinate and manage property conservation efforts until loss is stopped.
E. Time property conservation efforts with fire conditions; loss control versus damage to
structure.
F. Reduce secondary damage.
G. Insist on professional, responsible, firefighting activities.
H. Shut down hoselines in a timely manner.
I. Overhaul completely to eliminate rekindles.
J. Maintain concern for personnel during long overhaul operations.
K. Coordinate salvage and overhaul with the investigation to assist in determining origin
and cause.
Page 19 of 25
SUPPORT OPERATIONS
PUBLIC INFORMATION
I.
POLICY
A. This section will establish a standard operating procedure to provide the news media
with information normally requested from OFD on fire and EMS incidents, and will
control the movement of media personnel for safety reasons and establish an
operating framework for public information that will effectively integrate into the
overall fireground management system. It is the policy of the Orlando Fire
Department to establish and maintain a positive working relationship with the news
media.
1. In the day-to-day operation of the Orlando Fire Department, staff on day shift will
act as the PIO for all media requests for information. This person will also be
available to respond as requested to assist Command in the need of a PIO.
2. If the PIO is not available, the assigned shift District Chief PIO will answer the
day-to-day requests from the media. The on shift Assistant Chief will be used
when the assigned shift District Chief PIO is not available.
B. Command will be responsible for the management of public information on the
fireground.
1. At typical incidents, the District or Assistant Chief in Command should conduct
media briefings as soon as Command responsibilities permit.
2. The appearance of a ranking, uniformed Officer making a well thought-out
statement and answering questions, reflects well on the Department‟s public
image.
C. At large-scale incidents, after basic rescue and fire operations are in place, Command
will establish a Public Information Officer.
1. The PIO will relieve Command of the task of dealing directly with the media
during critical Command stages of the incident and will provide and structure the
information the media will need to accurately report the situation.
2. The presence of a designated Public Information Officer does not reduce the
efficiency of having a ranking, uniformed Officer conduct a media interview, as
soon as time permits.
3. The Public Information Officer radio designation will be “PIO”.
4. The Commanding Officer shall be notified of any media requests or contacts.
Page 20 of 25
SUPPORT OPERATIONS
II.
GUIDELINES
A. Individuals assigned to perform Public Information Officer functions should be
regulated by the following general guidelines:
1. Establish a news media area that is more advantageous than the general public,
but restricts their entrance into high hazard areas.
a. This is extremely important in hazardous materials situations and unstable
incidents (fire not under control, building structural damage).
b. The establishment of a Press Area limits the presence of the media in the areas
where Firefighters may be working.
B. If you can add anything to the basic information that will enhance the story of the
situation, such information might include:
1. An extremely hazardous situation
2. A rescue
3. A person or Company that did an outstanding job
C. The extra information will make a better story for the reporters and tell the citizens
how OFD provides fire and/or EMS services.
D. Don‟t be afraid to talk to reporters. They will report the facts as given. Tell them
everything, but make sure everything said is correct.
E. Usually, during the time you are gathering information, you will have inquiries from
reporters seeking information. Give them what you have at that point and emphasize
that this information is preliminary.
1. If it gets to the point that questions from reporters are keeping you from gathering
information, use these alternatives:
a. Tell the reporters to gather in one place and that you will return shortly with
more information.
b. Request additional manpower from Command to utilize as aides in gathering
information and stay with reporters.
c. Tell the reporters to proceed with photo shots and filming without interfering
with fireground operations while you are gathering information, and then
arrange to meet with them shortly with more facts.
Page 21 of 25
SUPPORT OPERATIONS
d. If they have deadlines to meet, get a phone number where they can be reached
and phone the facts to them as soon as possible.
e. Do not release the names of persons injured or deceased due to the fire.
F. When possible, the Communications Center will release all known information,
unless advised otherwise by Command.
1. The Communication supervisor shall advise the Incident Commander of media
requests for information.
G. Never assume that anything said is off the record. All statements made to the media
are reportable.
H. When in the presence of any recording device (audio and video), always assume the
device is recording.
III.
PUBLIC INFORMATION WORKSHEET
A. The following guidelines will describe the information requirements involved in
completing the Public Information Worksheet;
1. The media is interested in the number of Units that respond to the emergency (not
necessarily their Unit designation).
2. They are also interested in total manpower figures.
a. 4 Engines, 2 Trucks, 1 District Chief = 7 Units with 25 personnel.
3. The media will also want to know how long it took the Department to get on the
scene, and how long it took to control the situation.
a. Volunteer the other information if it is not asked for.
4. Tell the media what the first Unit on the scene encountered and the action taken.
a. “E-9 arrived on the scene and the house was well-involved. E-9 Officer
ordered a quick attack with 1-3/4” inch line and ordered T-7 to search and
rescue and to secure the utilities. T-7 removed one victim, who was treated at
the scene by R-3.”
5. In the event of injuries, fire or civilian, identify the extent of injuries and where
the patients were taken for treatment.
a. Omit the extent of injury in the case of a fatality until next of kin is notified.
Page 22 of 25
SUPPORT OPERATIONS
6. Denote specific hazards encountered (e.g., toxic materials, flammable liquids, or
special accomplishments such as rescues, good salvage work).
a. Talk about private fire protection and the benefit realized.
Page 23 of 25
SUPPORT OPERATIONS
Orlando Fire Department P.I.O. Worksheet - Information Release Form
PIO Name:
Alarm Number
Date
Address
Occupant
I. Event Type (check all that apply)
Fire
EMS Medical
EMS Trauma
Suspicious Device
Hazardous Materials Release
II. Event Time Table
Alarm Received
Mass Casualty
Technical Rescue
First Alarm Dispatched
First Unit on Scene
Agent Applied
All Clear
Event Controlled
Situation Found
Casualties
Age
Age
Age
Age
Age
Cause
M/F
M/F
M/F
M/F
M/F
Injuries
Injuries
Injuries
Injuries
Injuries
BLS/ALS
BLS/ALS
BLS/ALS
BLS/ALS
BLS/ALS
Resources committed to incident
Engines
Towers
Rescues
Total staffing to control incident
News outlets notified
Channel 2
FOX News
Channel 6
CNN
Fire/Civilian
Fire/Civilian
Fire/Civilian
Fire/Civilian
Fire/Civilian
Special Ops
Channel 9
Orlando Sentinel
Page 24 of 25
Transported to
Transported to
Transported to
Transported to
Transported to
Command
Channel 13
Other
SUPPORT OPERATIONS
EMERGENCY PERSONNEL RECALL
I.
PURPOSE
A. Emergency recall is a system used to recall off-duty personnel during natural
disasters, major medical operations, or fire activity.
B. The intent of this procedure is to establish a standard method for placing additional
Companies in service as quickly as possible.
II.
PROCEDURES
A.
The procedures for emergency recall are in OFD Policies and Procedures.
1. A District Chief not involved in the incident will relocate to Station #1 when a
second alarm or major emergency exists.
2. This District Chief will initiate the Emergency Recall System upon the indication
that a manpower shortage exists, or is projected to exist, due to tactical activity, or
when advised by Support.
3. When recalling off-duty personnel to report to duty, do so as an ORDER, and
advise them where to report.
a. Usually, the Staging Area is by far the best place to have personnel report.
They can then be assigned to Companies and given tasks to perform.
Page 25 of 25
DIVIDER
12. ADDENDUMS/FORMS
Addendum A. – Alarm Responses
1. Highrise
First Alarm – 4 Engines, 2 Towers, 1 Rescue, 1 Heavy Rescue, 2 Districts, Assistant,
Air 7
Second Alarm – 2 Engines, 1 Tower, 1 Rescue, 1 District, Air 7
Third Alarm – 2 Engines, 1 Tower, 1 Rescue
Fourth Alarm – 2 Engines, 1 Tower, 1 Rescue
2. Commercial/Apartment
First Alarm – 3 Engines, 2 Towers, 1 Rescue, 1 Heavy Rescue, 2 Districts
Second Alarm – 2 Engines, 1 Tower, 1 Rescue, 1 District, Assistant, Air 7
Third Alarm – 2 Engines, 1 Tower, 1 Rescue, 1 District
Fourth Alarm – 2 Engines, 1 Tower, 1 Rescue
3. Residential (single and multiple story) Duplex/Triplex
First alarm – 3 Engines, 1 Tower, 1 Rescue, 1 Heavy Rescue, 2 Districts
Second Alarm – 2 Engines, 1 Tower, 1 Rescue, 1 District, Assistant, Air 7
Fourth Alarm – 2 Engines, 1 Tower, 1 Rescue
4. Trench Rescue/Confined Space Rescue/Structural Collapse Rescue
Unconfirmed – 1 Engine, 1 Tower, 1 Rescue, 1 District (first Unit emergency, all others
non-emergency.
Confirmed – 2 Engines, 1 Tower, 1 Rescue, 1 Heavy Rescue, 2 Districts, Air 7, Hazmat
Unit.
5. Dive Rescue
1 Engine, 1 Rescue, Boat 1, 1 Heavy Rescue, 1 District.
6. High Angle Rescue
1 Engine, 1 Tower (T1, T10, or T11), 1 Rescue, 1 Heavy Rescue, 1 District.
7. Vehicle Accident with Entrapment
High Speed Roadways – 1 Engine, 1 Tower, 1 Rescue, 1 Heavy Rescue, 1 District.
8. Industrial Machinery Accident with Entrapment
1 Engine, 1 Tower, 1 Rescue, 1 Heavy Rescue, 1 District.
9. First Alarm Medical
2 Engines, 1 Tower, 1 Rescue, 1 Heavy Rescue, 1 District, plus next closest ALS unit.
10. Automatic Fire Alarm
1 Engine, 1 Tower, 1 District (reduced response: 1 Engine or 1 Tower)
ADDENDUM / FORMS
11. Bomb Threat
1 Engine or 1 Tower
12. Suspicious Package
1 Engine or 1 Tower
13. EOD Response
1 Hazmat Tower, 1 Rescue, 1 District, Hazmat Unit/E101, Arson/Bomb Squad
14. Hazmat Response (full response based on information gathered by call taker)
2 Engines, 1 Tower, 1 Rescue, 1 District, Hazmat Unit/E101 (Hazmat Engine not
considered the second Engine for this response).
15. Hazmat Unit is Requested
E101, Hazmat 1 (first choice)
T7, T8, or T9, Hazmat 1 (second choice)
R1, Hazmat 1 (third choice)
16. Hazmat Team is Requested
E101, Hazmat 1, Hazmat Tower, R1, 1 District
17. Gas Leak (Natural and LP Gases)
Inside rupture/leak – 1 Engine, 1 Tower, 1 Rescue, 1 District, Hazmat Unit/E101
(Hazmat Engine would be considered as a second Engine for this response)
Inside odor only – 1 Engine or 1 Tower
Note: Communications personnel can add additional units as needed by request of the on-scene
Officer or Commander or if additional information becomes available.
ADDENDUM / FORMS
ADDENDUM / FORMS
ADDENDUM / FORMS
ADDENDUM / FORMS
ADDENDUM / FORMS
ADDENDUM / FORMS
Rehab Group – Company Check-In/Out Sheet
Crews Operating on the Scene: ____________________
Alarm # ______________
Unit #
# Persons
Time In
Time Out
ADDENDUM / FORMS
Rehab Group – Vital Signs Worksheet
Name
Unit
Time
B/P
Resp.
Temp.
Taken By
Complaints
Transport
where?
ADDENDUM / FORMS
Orlando Fire Department
Dive Team Worksheet
Incident Number: _________________ Date:____/_____/____ Time Call Received:_______________
Units Responding:______________________________________________________________________
Type of Call:_______________________________ Location of Call:_____________________________
Wind Speed and Direction:_______________________________________________________________
1st Diver
2nd Diver
3rd Diver
4th Diver
Name / Tender
Tank PSI (start)
Time In
Time Out
Tank PSI (end)
Victim Recovery Time _______________________
Benchmarks/Considerations
Last Seen Location/Marked with Buoy
Triangulation
Chase (OCSO)
Wrecker Responding
Rescue Standby for Diver
Engine for Diver Decon
Air Truck
Patterns Used:_________________________________________________________________________________
Total Dives Made:________________________________ Maximum Depth:______________________________
Visibility:____________________ Weather:_____________________ Air Temp:_________ Water Temp:____
GPS Marking/Victim Location:___________________________________________________________________
Dive Team Leader:_____________________________________________________________________________
Notes:_______________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
Line Signals
Tender to Diver: 1 - Are you OK?
Diver to Tender: 1 - I‟m OK
2 - Stop change direction
2 - Need more line
3 - Surface
3 - Object found
4 - Danger stay on bottom
4 or more - Emergency
ADDENDUM / FORMS
Orlando Fire Department
Surface Water Rescue Worksheet
How many people were involved? ________________________________________________________________
How did the incident happen? ___________________________________________________________________
Where did the incident happen? __________________________________________________________________
What was the victim doing at the time of the incident? ________________________________________________
Dive Team Information
Date and Time of the incident: ____/______/______
____________________
Where was the victim last seen? ___________________________________________________________________
(landmarks, distance from shore, etc.)
Where was the witness(es) Location?_______________________________________________________________
(mark witness location for triangulation)
Is there a boat ramp and location? __________________________________________________________________
Witness Information
Name: ___________________________________________________ Contact Number: (_____)______________
Name: ___________________________________________________ Contact Number: (_____)______________
Name: ___________________________________________________ Contact Number: (_____)______________
ADDENDUM / FORMS
Orlando Fire Department P.I.O. Worksheet - Information Release Form
PIO Name:
Alarm Number
Date
Address
Occupant
I. Event Type (check all that apply)
Fire
EMS Medical
EMS Trauma
Suspicious Device
Hazardous Materials Release
II. Event Time Table
Alarm Received
Mass Casualty
Technical Rescue
First Alarm Dispatched
First Unit on Scene
Agent Applied
All Clear
Event Controlled
Situation Found
Casualties
Age
Age
Age
Age
Age
Cause
M/F
M/F
M/F
M/F
M/F
Injuries
Injuries
Injuries
Injuries
Injuries
BLS/ALS
BLS/ALS
BLS/ALS
BLS/ALS
BLS/ALS
Resources committed to incident
Engines
Towers
Rescues
Total staffing to control incident
News outlets notified
Channel 2
FOX News
Channel 6
CNN
Fire/Civilian
Fire/Civilian
Fire/Civilian
Fire/Civilian
Fire/Civilian
Special Ops
Channel 9
Orlando Sentinel
Transported to
Transported to
Transported to
Transported to
Transported to
Command
Channel 13
Other